Ptn Huawei 1r6g32
This document was ed by and they confirmed that they have the permission to share it. If you are author or own the copyright of this book, please report to us by using this report form. Report 2z6p3t
Overview 5o1f4z
& View Ptn Huawei as PDF for free.
More details 6z3438
- Words: 42,938
- Pages: 160
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System V100R005C01
Product Description
Issue
01
Date
2011-06-30
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Perm issions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:
Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
[email protected]
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
About This Document
About This Document Product Version The following table lists the product versions applicable to this documentation. Product Name
Product Version
OptiX OSN 550
V100R005C01
iManager U2000
V100R005
Intended Audience This document describes the OptiX OSN 550 in of network application, function, hardware architecture, software architecture, features, and technical specifications. This document is intended for the following engineers:
Network planning engineers Data configuration engineers System maintenance engineers
Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol
Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ii
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Symbol
About This Document
Description Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
GUI Conventions Convention
Meaning
Boldface
Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK.
>
Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Change History Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 01 (2011-06-30) Initial formal release.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Contents
Contents About This Document.................................................................................................................... ii
1 Product Positioning and Features .............................................................................................. 1 1.1 Product Positioning.................................................................................................................... 1 1.2 Product Characteristics ............................................................................................................... 1
2 Quick Reference ............................................................................................................................ 3 3 Product Architecture................................................................................................................... 11
3.1 System Architecture ..................................................................................................................11 3.2 Hardware Structure ...................................................................................................................12 3.3 Software Architectu re................................................................................................................20 3.3.1 Overview of Software Architecture.......................................................................................21 3.3.2 Communication Protocols and Interfaces ...............................................................................21 3.3.3 Board Software ................................................................................................................22 3.3.4 NE Software ....................................................................................................................22 3.3.5 NMS Software .................................................................................................................23
4 Packet Functions and Features ................................................................................................. 24
4.1 Packet-Domain Access Capacity .................................................................................................24 4.2 Service ........................................................................................................................24 4.2.1 Native Ethernet Services ....................................................................................................25 4.2.2 ETH PWE3 Services .........................................................................................................34 4.2.3 CES Services ...................................................................................................................35 4.2.4 ATM/IMA Services ...........................................................................................................37 4.3 Protection ....................................................................................................................38 4.3.1 MPLS APS ......................................................................................................................38 4.3.2 PW APS..........................................................................................................................40 4.3.3 LPT................................................................................................................................41 4.3.4 LAG...............................................................................................................................42 4.4 Maintenance............................................................................................................................43 4.4.1 MPLS OAM ....................................................................................................................44 4.4.2 ETH-OAM ......................................................................................................................44 4.4.3 ATM OAM......................................................................................................................46 4.4.4 RMON ...........................................................................................................................46
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iv
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Contents
4.4.5 PRBS .............................................................................................................................47 4.4.6 CES Alarm Transmission....................................................................................................47 4.5 Synchronization .......................................................................................................................49 4.5.1 Synchronous Ethernet Clock ...............................................................................................49 4.5.2 CES ACR ........................................................................................................................49
5 TDM Functions and Features ................................................................................................... 51
5.1 TDM-Domain Access Capacity ...................................................................................................51 5.2 Service ........................................................................................................................51 5.3 Protection ....................................................................................................................52 5.3.1 SN .............................................................................................................................52 5.3.2 Ring MSP........................................................................................................................53 5.3.3 Linear MSP .....................................................................................................................55 5.4 Maintenance............................................................................................................................57 5.5 Synchronization .......................................................................................................................58
6 Networking and Application Scenarios ................................................................................. 59
6.1 Basic Network Topologies..........................................................................................................59 6.2 Typical Application of Hybrid Networking ....................................................................................60 6.3 Typical Application of Pure Packet Networking ..............................................................................61 6.4 Typical Application of TDM Networking ......................................................................................63
7 Security Management................................................................................................................. 65
7.1 Authentication Management .......................................................................................................65 7.2 Authorization Management ........................................................................................................65 7.3 Network Security Management ...................................................................................................66 7.4 System Security Management .....................................................................................................67 7.5 Log Management .....................................................................................................................67
8 Operation and Maintenance ..................................................................................................... 69
8.1 DCN......................................................................................................................................69 8.2 Equipment Maintenance ............................................................................................................70 8.3 Upgrade Methods .....................................................................................................................72 8.4 License Control........................................................................................................................74
9 Technical Specifications ............................................................................................................ 75
9.1 General Speci fications ...............................................................................................................75 9.2 Packet Performan ce Indicators ....................................................................................................76 9.3 TDM Perfo rmance Indicators ......................................................................................................81 9.4 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board ..............................................................................82 9.5 Optical Port Specifications .........................................................................................................82 9.6 Electrical Port Specifications ......................................................................................................87 9.7 Auxiliary Port Specifications ......................................................................................................89 9.8 Optical Module Specifications ....................................................................................................91 9.9 Indicator Status Explanation .......................................................................................................93
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Contents
9.10 Safety Certifi cation .................................................................................................................96 9.11 Environmental Specifications ....................................................................................................96 9.11.1 Storage Environment........................................................................................................97 9.11.2 Transportation Environment ..............................................................................................99 9.11.3 Operation Environment .................................................................................................. 101
10 Energy Saving and Environmental Protection .................................................................. 104
11 Standard Compliance ............................................................................................................. 105 11.1 ITU-T Recommendations ....................................................................................................... 105 11.2 IETF Standards..................................................................................................................... 108 11.3 IEEE Standards .................................................................................................................... 110 11.4 Environment Related Standards ............................................................................................... 111 11.5 MEF Standards..................................................................................................................... 112
A Glossary and Acronyms.......................................................................................................... 113
A.1 Numerics ............................................................................................................................. 114 A.2 A ........................................................................................................................................ 114 A.3 B ........................................................................................................................................ 117 A.4 C ........................................................................................................................................ 118 A.5 D........................................................................................................................................ 121 A.6 E ........................................................................................................................................ 123 A.7 F ........................................................................................................................................ 125 A.8 G........................................................................................................................................ 127 A.9 H........................................................................................................................................ 128 A.10 I ....................................................................................................................................... 129 A.11 J ....................................................................................................................................... 130 A.12 L....................................................................................................................................... 130 A.13 M...................................................................................................................................... 132 A.14 N ...................................................................................................................................... 134 A.15 O ...................................................................................................................................... 135 A.16 P....................................................................................................................................... 136 A.17 Q ...................................................................................................................................... 139 A.18 R ...................................................................................................................................... 139 A.19 S....................................................................................................................................... 141 A.20 T....................................................................................................................................... 145 A.21 U ...................................................................................................................................... 146 A.22 V ...................................................................................................................................... 147 A.23 W...................................................................................................................................... 147
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vi
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Figures
Figures Figure 1-1 Product positioning and typical application of the OptiX OSN 550........................................... 1 Figure 3-1 Block diagram...............................................................................................................11 Figure 3-2 Ventilation design of the OptiX OSN 550 ...........................................................................19 Figure 3-3 General architecture o f software .......................................................................................21 Figure 4-1 Typical application of service model 1 ...............................................................................26 Figure 4-2 Model of VLAN-bas ed E-Line services ..............................................................................27 Figure 4-3 Typical application of service model 1 ...............................................................................29 Figure 4-4 Typical application of service model 2 ...............................................................................29 Figure 4-5 Typical application of service model 3 ...............................................................................30 Figure 4-6 Typical application of service model 4 ...............................................................................30 Figure 4-7 Model of E-LAN services based on the 802.1d bridge...........................................................31 Figure 4-8 Model of E-LAN services based on 802.1q bridge................................................................32 Figure 4-9 Model of E-LAN services based on 802.1ad bridge ..............................................................34 Figure 4-10 E-Line services carried by PWs.......................................................................................35 Figure 4-11 UNI-UNI CES services..................................................................................................36 Figure 4-12 UNI-NNI CES services .................................................................................................36 Figure 4-13 Typical application of ATM PWE3 (in the one-to-one encapsulation mode) .............................37 Figure 4-14 Typical application of ATM PWE3 (in the N-to-one encapsulation mode)................................38 Figure 4-15 Application example of MPLS APS .................................................................................40 Figure 4-16 Application example of PW APS .....................................................................................41 Figure 4-17 Typical application of LPT .............................................................................................42 Figure 4-18 Link aggregation group .................................................................................................43 Figure 4-19 Application of IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah .................................................................45 Figure 4-20 Typical application of ATM OAM ...................................................................................46 Figure 4-21 CES alarm transparent transmission between AC sides ........................................................48 Figure 4-22 CES alarm transparent transmission from the NNI side to the AC side....................................48
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Figures
Figure 4-23 CES ACR clock solution................................................................................................50 Figure 5-1 Application of the SN .................................................................................................53 Figure 5-2 Two-fiber unidirectional ring MSP ....................................................................................54 Figure 5-3 Two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP ......................................................................................55 Figure 5-4 1+1 linear MSP .............................................................................................................56 Figure 5-5 1:N linear MSP..............................................................................................................57 Figure 6-1 Hybrid ring network .......................................................................................................60 Figure 6-2 Board configurations on each NE of the Hybrid ring network .................................................61 Figure 6-3 Pure packet network .......................................................................................................62 Figure 6-4 Board configurations on each NE of the pure packet network .................................................62 Figure 6-5 TDM network ...............................................................................................................63 Figure 6-6 Board configurations on each NE of the TDM network .........................................................64 Figure 7-1 Log transmission of the Syslog protocol .............................................................................68
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
viii
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Tables
Tables Table 2-1 Overview of the OptiX OSN 550......................................................................................... 3 Table 2-2 OptiX OSN 550 packet fun ctions and features ........................................................................ 5 Table 2-3 OptiX OSN 550 TDM functions and features ......................................................................... 9 Table 3-1 Function units of the OptiX OSN 550..................................................................................11 Table 3-2 Boards that the OptiX OSN 550 s .............................................................................13 Table 3-3 Description of labels ........................................................................................................19 Table 4-1 Packet-domain access cap acity o f the OptiX OSN 550............................................................24 Table 4-2 Point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service model ..................................................25 Table 4-3 Models of VLAN-b ased E-Line servi ces ..............................................................................26 Table 4-4 Models of QinQ-bas ed E-Line Services ...............................................................................27 Table 4-5 Model of E-LAN servi ces based on the 802.1d bridge ............................................................31 Table 4-6 Model of E-LAN servi ces based on 802.1q bridge .................................................................32 Table 4-7 Models of E-LAN servi ces based on 802.1ad bridge...............................................................33 Table 5-1 TDM-domain access capacity of the OptiX OSN 550 .............................................................51 Table 5-2 Service types ed by the OptiX OSN 550 in the TDM domain .........................................51 Table 6-1 Network topologies ed by OptiX OSN 550s and corresponding legends ...........................59 Table 8-1 DCN solutions that the OptiX OSN 550 s...................................................................69 Table 8-2 Maintenance fun ctions that the OptiX OSN 550 s ........................................................70 Table 8-3 Upgrade methods available for the OptiX OSN 550 ...............................................................73 Table 9-1 General speci fications of the OptiX OSN 550 .......................................................................75 Table 9-2 OptiX OSN 550 packet fun ctions and features .......................................................................76 Table 9-3 OptiX OSN 550 TDM functions and features ........................................................................81 Table 9-4 Power consumption and weight of boards ed by the OptiX OSN 550...............................82 Table 9-5 Specifi cations of OptiX OSN 550's STM-1 optical ports .........................................................83 Table 9-6 Specifi cations of OptiX OSN 550's STM-4 optical ports .........................................................83 Table 9-7 Specifi cations of OptiX OSN 550's STM-16 optical ports........................................................84
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ix
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Tables
Table 9-8 Specifi cations of FE optical ports of the OptiX OSN 550 ........................................................85 Table 9-9 Specifi cations of OptiX OSN 550's GE optical ports ..............................................................86 Table 9-10 Specifi cations of 10GE optical ports of the OptiX OSN 550...................................................86 Table 9-11 Specifications of OptiX OSN 550's E1/T1 electrical ports ......................................................87 Table 9-12 Specifi cations of OptiX OSN 550's E3/T3 electrical ports......................................................88 Table 9-13 Specifi cations of OptiX OSN 550's CES/ATM/IMA service electri cal ports...............................88 Table 9-14 Specifi cations of OptiX OSN 550's Ethernet electrical ports ...................................................89 Table 9-15 Specifi cations of external clock ports ed by the OptiX OSN 550 ...................................89 Table 9-16 Specifi cations of synch ronous data ports ed by the OptiX OSN 550...............................90 Table 9-17 Specifi cations of asyn chronous data ports ed by the OptiX OSN 550 .............................90 Table 9-18 Specifi cations of ord erwire ports ed by the OptiX OSN 550.........................................90 Table 9-19 Outdoor cabinet monitoring ports ed by the OptiX OSN 550........................................91 Table 9-20 SFP/eSFP Optical Modules That the OptiX OSN 550 s...............................................91 Table 9-21 XFP Optical Modules That the OptiX OSN 550 s ......................................................92 Table 9-22 Definitions of indicators ed by the boards on the OptiX OSN 550 .................................93 Table 9-23 Safety certi fications that the OptiX OSN 550 has ed .......................................................96 Table 9-24 Climate requirements for the storage envi ronment ................................................................97 Table 9-25 Density requirements for mechani cal active substances during storage .....................................98 Table 9-26 Density requirements for chemically active substances during storage......................................98 Table 9-27 Limitations for mech anical stress during storage ..................................................................98 Table 9-28 Climate requirements for the transport ation environment .......................................................99 Table 9-29 Density limitations for mechanically active substances during transportation ........................... 100 Table 9-30 Density limitations for chemically active substances ........................................................... 100 Table 9-31 Mechanical stress requirements for the transportation environment ........................................ 100 Table 9-32 Requirements for temperature and humidity...................................................................... 101 Table 9-33 Other climate requirements ............................................................................................ 102 Table 9-34 Density limitations for mechanically active substances during operation ................................. 102 Table 9-35 Density limitations for chemically active substances ........................................................... 103 Table 9-36 Limitations for mech anical stress during operation ............................................................. 103 Table 11-1 ITU-T recommendations ............................................................................................... 105 Table 11-2 IETF standards ............................................................................................................ 108 Table 11-3 IEEE standards ............................................................................................................ 110 Table 11-4 Environment related standards ........................................................................................ 111
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
x
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Tables
Table 11-5 MEF standards ............................................................................................................ 112
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xi
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
1
1 Product Positioning and Features
Product Positioning and Features
1.1 Product Positioning This section describes the product positioning and networking application. The OptiX OSN 550 is used at the access layer of a transmission network, ing MPLS-TP technology and a variety of service network topologies in the TDM and packet domains. For its product positioning and typical application, see Figure 1-1. Figure 1-1 Product positioning and typical application of the OptiX OSN 550 Access layer
Convergence node
Convergence/ Back bone layer
E1/T1 STM-1/ STM-4
E1/T1 FE E1/T1
E1/T1 TDM netw ork STM-1/ STM-4 FE/ GE
FE
ATM/IMA E1
FE/ GE
Pack et n etwo rk FE/GE
ATM/IMA E1 ATM/IMA E1 FE
OptiX OSN 550
OptiX OSN 3500
FE
NodeB
BTS
RNC
BSC
1.2 Product Characteristics This section describes the equipment characteristics in of structure, technology, and networking.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
1 Product Positioning and Features
Simple Structure and High Integration The OptiX OSN 550 is a chassis whose dimensions (H x W x D) are 88 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm. Of simple structure and high integration, the OptiX OSN 550 can be installed in the following ways:
Mounting in an European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ET SI) cabinet or a 19-inch cabinet) Mounting on the wall Mounting on the desk Mounting in an APM30 outdoor cabinet Mounting in an open rack
"CO Dual Core" Architecture and Multi-Service Transmission The OptiX OSN 550 allows service transmission in the time division multiplexing and packet domains, achieving smooth and gradual evolution from the TDM domain to the packet domain.
ATM E1/IMA E1/TDM E1 Service and Flexible Networking The OptiX OSN 550 s the circuit emulation service (CES) technology, allowing direct transmission of TDM E1 services in the packet domain. ATM is a connection-oriented, fast packet switching technology. Integrating the advantages of circuit switching with those of packet switching, ATM is a standard broadband integrated services digital network (B-ISDN) transfer mode. Inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) is a technology that implements inverse multiplexing for asynchronous transfer mode (ATM).
Various Types of Power Inputs The OptiX OSN 550 s the following types of power input:
-48 V/-60 V DC power input 110 V/220 V AC power input
High Temperature Tolerance The OptiX OSN 550 can tolerate high temperature. For example, the equipment tolerates an extended operating temperature of -5 °C to +65 °C when installed in an outdoor cabinet. Extended operating indicates that the successive operating time of the equipment does not exceed 4 hours, and the accumulated operating time per year does not exceed 90 days.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
2 Quick Referen ce
2
Quick Reference
This section describes the product overview, including product photos, hardware, software, and functions and features. Table 2-1 lists the overview of the OptiX OSN 550. Table 2-1 Overview of the OptiX OSN 550 Item
Description
Appearance
Board
PCX/MD1/EM6T /EM6F/EF8F/SL1D/SL4D/SL1Q/SP3D/PL3T/AUX/PIU /APIU/FAN
Packet Function and Feature
See T able 2-2.
TDM Function and Feature
See T able 2-3.
Switching Capacity
60/40/20 Gbit/s
Cross-connec t capacity Equipment-L evel Protection
Higher order cross-connect capacity: 20 Gbit/s
Lower order cross-connect capacity: 5 Gbit/s
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
1+1 backup for power supply 1+1 backup between active and standby system control, switching, and timing boards LAG protection of the ports on Ethernet boards Fan protection (The failure of a single fan does not affect the operation of the other fans.)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
2 Quick Referen ce
Item
Description
Intelligent fans
Intellectual adjustment of the fan speed. When the working temperature of the equipment is lower than the threshold (determined by the measured ambient temperature and the current fan speed), the fan speed automatically reduces to the lowest.
Management ports and auxiliary ports
Interface Type
Description
Connector
Clock port
120-ohm external clock port, which can work in 2048 kbit/s mode or 2048 kHz mode.
RJ-45
Power supply port
Power supply port connecting to one -48/-60 V DC power supply
2 mm HM connector
T wo 100/240 V AC power supply ports
Three-phase socket
Network management port
Ethernet NM port/NM serial port, which is connected to the network management system (NMS)
RJ-45
Alarm input/output port
Alarm input/output
RJ-45
64 kbit/s synchronous data or orderwire byte transparent transmission port/19.2 kbit/s asynchronous data or orderwire byte transparent transmission port
One 64 kbit/s synchronous serial port, and one F2 transparent data port, which transparently transmits one channel of data services.
RJ-45
Orderwire phone port
Used to provide voice communication for operation personnel or maintenance personnel at different workstations.
RJ-45
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
2 Quick Referen ce
Table 2-2 OptiX OSN 550 packet functions and features Item
Description
MPLS suppo rt capab ility
The packet switching unit of the PCX board works with a service board to implement MPLS functions. Setup mode: static LSPs
PWE3 suppo rt capab ility
The packet switching unit of the PCX board works with a service board to implement PWE3 functions. Service categories − TDM PWE3 (CES) services − ATM PWE3 services − ETH PWE3 services Setup mode: static PWs Protection: 1:1 PW APS OAM: − the ping and traceroute commands of PWs, the virtual circuit connectivity verification (VCCV) command. − s PW OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.1711. s MS-PWs.
Servic e
Service Type
Protection: 1:1 MPLS tunnel APS OAM: − s MPLS OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.1711. − s LSP ping and LSP traceroute functions.
Description
Etherne s Native ETH t and ETH PWE3 service services. Format of Ethernet data frames: IEEE
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Maximum Re ceiving Capability
Service Port Descriptio n
Connector
FE (electrical port): 36
10/100BAS RJ-45 E-TX
FE (optical port): 48
100Base-F X
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LC
5
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Item
2 Quick Referen ce
Description
802.3 and Ethernet 10GE II (optical Jumbo frames port) MTU length: 1518 PCXLX/ bytes to 9600 bytes PCXX: 2 (1620 bytes, by default) MPLS function VLAN function . The VLAN IDs range from 1 to 4094. QinQ Size of a MAC address table: 16 KB (including static entries)
GE (optical port) PCXLG/ PCXGA/ PCXGB: 14
GE (electrical port): 12 CES service
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Service type: 192xE1 point-to-point service Encapsulation types: CESoPSN SAToP Compression of idle timeslots: ed (only for CESoPSN encapsulation) Jitter compensation buffering time: 375 us to 16000 us Packet loading time: 125 us to 5000 us CES ACR: ed Retiming: ed
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10GBAS E-LR (LAN) 10GBAS E-LW (WAN) 10GBAS E-ER (LAN) 10GBAS E-EW (WAN) 10GBAS E-ZR (LAN) 10GBAS E-ZW (WAN)
LC
1000Base -LX 1000Base -VX 1000Base -ZX
LC
10/100/100 0BASE-TX
RJ-45
75/120-oh m smart E1 port
Anea 96
6
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Item
2 Quick Referen ce
Description ATM/I MA service
Number of ATM connections: 256 ATM traffic management
192xE1
75/120-oh m smart E1 port
Anea 96
ATM encapsulation format N-to-one VPC N-to-one VCC One-to-one VPC One-to-one VCC Maximum number of concatenated ATM cells: 31 ATM OAM: F4 (VP layer) and F5 (VC layer) Maximum number of IMA groups: 32 Maximum number of in an IMA group: 16 Protec tion
MPLS APS
Maximum number of protection groups: 64 Switching duration not more than 100 ms
NOTE MP LS AP S and P W AP S share 64 protection group resources.
PW APS
Maximum number of protection groups: 64 Switching duration not more than 100 ms
NOTE MP LS AP S and P W AP S share 64 protection group resources.
MSTP
s the MSTP protocol that generates only the CIST . The MSTP protocol provides functions equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.
LPT
LAG
Maint enanc e
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
MPLS OAM
Point-point and point-multipoint LPT Switching duration not more than 5s Intra-board LAG and inter-board LAG A maximum of 16 LAGs. Each LAG has a maximum of 8 . Switching duration not more than 500 ms T unnel OAM and PW OAM Maximum number of MPLS OAM resources: 128
NOTE MP LS OAM and P W OAM share 128 OAM resources.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Item
2 Quick Referen ce
Description ETH-O AM
s the following IEEE 802.1ag OAM functions: − Management of OAM maintenance points − Continuity check (CC) − Loopback (LB)
Link trace (LT) s the following IEEE 802.3ah OAM functions: − OAM auto-discovery − Link performance monitoring − Fault detection − Loopback at the remote end − Self-loop detection and self-looped port blocking Number of MD/MA/MEP: 64 −
Synch roniza tion
ATM OAM
Maximum number of ATM connections: 256
RMON
s port-level and service-level RMON functions, in compliance with RFC 2819. s four RMON management groups: Ethernet statistics group, Ethernet history group, Ethernet alarm group, and Ethernet history control group. Port level: Basic Ethernet performance Extended Ethernet performance Service level: L2VPN T unnel PW
Synchr onous Etherne t clock
CES ACR
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Synchronous Ethernet that complies with ITU-T G.8261 and ITU-T G.8262. Port receiving/transmitting synchronous Ethernet clocks: FE/GE/10GE Input/Output of SSM packets Clock frequency stability (hold-over mode): less than 50 ppb Maximum number of CES ACR clocks: 4 The clock performance complies with the ITU-T G.823 Traffic template. Tributary retiming.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
2 Quick Referen ce
Item
Description
Other s
QoS
DiffServ s simple traffic classification by specifying PHB service classes for service flows based on their QoS information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DS values, or MPLS EXP values) carried by the packets. Complex traffic classification s traffic classification based on C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DS values carried by packets. CAR Provides the CAR function for the traffic flows at ports. Shaping s traffic shaping for a specific port, prioritized queue, or traffic flow. Queue scheduling policies − SP − WRR −
SP+WRR
Table 2-3 OptiX OSN 550 TDM functions and features Item
Description
Service
Service Type
SDH service
PDH service
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Re ceiving Capability
Service Port Description
Connector
26xSTM-1
S-1.1, L-1.1 and L-1.2 optical ports
LC
14xSTM-4
S-4.1, L-4.1 and L-4.2 optical ports
LC
14xSTM-16
S-16.1, L-16.1 and L-16.2 optical ports
LC
252xE1/T1
E1(75/120-oh m)/T1(100-oh m)electrical port
Anea 96
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Item
Description
Protection
SN
2 Quick Referen ce
MSP Ring
Linear MSP
Maintena nce Synchroni zation
PRBS
MSP Ring at the STM-1, ST M-4 and STM-16 levels Maximum number of protection groups: 13 Switching duration not more than 50 ms Linear MSP at the STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16 levels Maximum number of 1+1/1:1 Linear MSP protection groups: 13 Switching duration not more than 50 ms
ed
Physical layer clocks, including line clocks, tributary clocks, and two-input and two-output external clocks. The port impedance is 120 ohms or 75 ohms (a converter can be used to provide a 75-ohm clock port). Non-synchronization status message (SSM), standard SSM, and extended SSM protocols Tributary retiming
Tracing mode, hold-over mode, and free-run mode
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
SN at the VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 levels Maximum number of protection groups: 1032 Switching duration not more than 50 ms
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
3 Product Architecture
3
Product Architecture
3.1 System Architecture The OptiX OSN 550 is a dual-domain (TDM and packet domains) device. This section describes its function units and the relationship between these units. The OptiX OSN 550 consists of the following function units: service interface unit, timeslot cross-connect unit, packet switching unit, control unit, clock unit, auxiliary interface unit, fan unit, and power supply unit. Figure 3-1 Block diagram Timeslot cro ssconnect unit
VC-4 signal FE/GE
Service interface unit
E1 (TDM/CES/ATM/IMA) STM-1/4
Ethernet signal
Orderwire External alarm Synchrono us/Asynchronous data
Auxiliary interface unit
Clo ck unit
Packet switching unit
Co ntro l unit
Fan unit
NM data
Contro l and overhead bus
Power supply unit
-48 V/-60 V DC
Table 3-1 Function units of the OptiX OSN 550 Function Unit Service interface unit
Function
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Transmits/Receives TDM E1/T1/E3/T3 signals. Transmits/Receives ATM/IMA E1 signals. Transmits/Receives STM-1/4/16 signals. Transmits/Receives Ethernet signals. Performs E1/ATM/Ethernet PWE3 emulation.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Function Unit Timeslot cross-connect unit Packet switching unit
3 Product Architecture
Function
Control unit
Clock unit
Auxiliary interface unit
Power supply unit Fan unit
Provides the cross-connect function and grooms TDM services. Processes Ethernet services and forwards packets. Processes MPLS labels and forwards packets. Processes PW labels and forwards packets. Performs system communication and control. Configures and manages the system. Collects alarms and monitors performance. Processes overhead bytes. Traces clock sources and provides clock signals for the system. Provides the input/output port for external clocks. Provides the orderwire phone port. Provides the synchronous/asynchronous data port. Provides the external alarm input/output port.
Connects to -48 V/-60 V DC power supplies. Connects to 110 to 220 V AC power supplies.
Cools the NE.
3.2 Hardware Structure This section describes the structure of the chassis, applicable boards, and equipment labels.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
3 Product Architecture
Chassis Structure and Board Installation Area
Board installation a rea
H D
W
4
1
SLOT SLOT 10 91 SLOT (PI U) SLOT (PIU) 93 11 SLOT SLOT (FAN) (FA N) 929 (PI U) (PIU)
SLOT 7 (CS T/CSH) SLOT 7 (PCX)
S LOT 88(CST/CSH) SLOT (PCX)
SLOT SLOT 5 (EX 5 (EXT) T)
SLOT SLOT6 6 (EX (EXT) T)
SLOT 3 (EX T) SLOT 3 (EXT)
SLOT 4 4 (E XT) SLOT (EXT)
SLOT 1 (EXT ) SLOT 1 ( EXT)
SLOT 2 2 (EX T) SLOT ( EXT)
2 3
1 Power supply boards 2
Fan board
3 4
Ext ended boards S ystem con trol, switching, a nd timing bo ards
Boards Table 3-2 lists the boards that the OptiX OSN 550 s. Table 3-2 Boards that the OptiX OSN 550 s Board Classif ication
Board Acron ym
System TNM1 control, PCXL switchin X g, and timing board
Board Name Cross-co nnect, timing and line board
Function
Service Type
Port Type
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
s the 60 Gbit/s packet switching function. s the 20 Gbit/s higher
Native Ethernet services Point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service VLAN-based E-Line service QinQ-based E-Line
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port) One ST M-1/STM-4/STM-1 6 SFP optical port. The optical port type can be S-1.1, L-1.1, S-4.1, L-4.1, S-16.1, L-16.1, or L-16.2.
Valid Slot Slots 7 and 8
13
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Board Classif ication
Board Acron ym
Board Name
Function
TNM1 PCXX
Cross-co nnect, timing, system control, and line board
TNM1 PCXL G
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Cross-co nnect, timing, system control, and line board
order cross-conn ect capacity, 5 Gbit/s lower order cross-conn ect capacity. Performs system communic ation and control. s the 60 Gbit/s packet switching function. s the 20 Gbit/s higher order cross-conn ect capacity, 5 Gbit/s lower order cross-conn ect capacity. Performs system communic ation and control. s the 40 Gbit/s packet switching function. s the 20
3 Product Architecture
Service Type
service E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1d bridges E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1q bridges E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges ETH PWE3 services ST M-1/STM-4/STM -16 services
Native Ethernet services
Point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service VLAN-based E-Line service QinQ-based E-Line service E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1d bridges E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
Port Type
Valid Slot
One 10GE (XFP) optical port 10GBASE-LR (LAN)/10GBASE-LW (WAN)/10GBASE-ER (LAN)/10GBASE-EW (WAN)/10GBASE-ZR (LAN)/10GBASE-ZW (WAN)
One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port) One 10GE (XFP) optical port 10GBASE-LR (LAN)/10GBASE-LW (WAN)/10GBASE-ER (LAN)/10GBASE-EW (WAN)/10GBASE-ZR (LAN)/10GBASE-ZW (WAN)
Slots 7 and 8
One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port) One ST M-1/STM-4/STM-1 6 SFP optical port. The optical port type can be S-1.1, L-1.1, S-4.1,
Slots 7 and 8
E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges ETH PWE3 services
Native Ethernet services Point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service VLAN-based E-Line service
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Board Classif ication
Board Acron ym
Board Name
Function
TNM1 PCXG A
Cross-co nnect, timing, system control, and line board
TNM1 PCXG B
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Cross-co nnect, timing, system control, and line
Gbit/s higher order cross-conn ect capacity, 5 Gbit/s lower order cross-conn ect capacity. Performs system communic ation and control. s the 40 Gbit/s packet switching function. s the 20 Gbit/s higher order cross-conn ect capacity, 5 Gbit/s lower order cross-conn ect capacity. Performs system communic ation and control. s the 20 Gbit/s packet switching function.
3 Product Architecture
Service Type
Port Type
QinQ-based E-Line service E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1d bridges E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1q bridges E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges ETH PWE3 services ST M-1/STM-4/STM -16 services
Native Ethernet services Point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service VLAN-based E-Line service QinQ-based E-Line service E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1d bridges E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1q bridges E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges ETH PWE3 services
Native Ethernet services Point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Valid Slot
L-4.1, S-16.1, L-16.1, or L-16.2. One GE (SFP) optical port 1000BASE-LX/VX/ZX
One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port) One GE (SFP) optical port 1000BASE-LX/VX/ZX
Slots 7 and 8
One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port) One GE (SFP) optical port 1000BASE-LX/VX/ZX
Slots 7 and 8
15
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Board Classif ication
Board Acron ym
Board Name board
Function
Service Type
Packet processi ng board
s the 20 Gbit/s higher order cross-conn ect capacity, 5 Gbit/s lower order cross-conn ect capacity. Performs system communic ation and control.
TNM1 MD1
32xSmar t E1 service processi ng board
Transmits/R eceives E1 signals.
TNM1 EM6T
6xRJ45 FE/GE processi ng board
Transmits/R eceives FE/GE service signals and works with the packet switching unit to process the received FE/GE service signals.
TNM1 EM6F
TNM1 EF8F
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
4xRJ45 and 2xSFP FE/GE processi ng board
8xFE Ethernet
3 Product Architecture
Transmits/R eceives FE
Port Type
Valid Slot
75/120-ohm E1 port
Slots 1 to 6
VLAN-based E-Line service QinQ-based E-Line service E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1d bridges E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1q bridges E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges ETH PWE3 services
CES E1 ATM/IMA E1
Native Ethernet services Point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service VLAN-based E-Line service QinQ-based E-Line service
E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1d bridges E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1q bridges E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges ETH PWE3 services
Native Ethernet services
Four FE electrical Slots 1 ports: 10/100BASE-TX to 6 T wo GE electrical ports (compatible with FE electrical ports): 10/100/1000BASE-TX Four FE electrical ports: 10/100BASE-TX Provides two ports through the SFP module. The types of SFP module include 1000BASE-LX/VX/ZX .
8xFE optical port: 100BASE-FX
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Slots 1 to 6
Slots 1 to 6
16
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Board Classif ication
Board Acron ym
Board Name
Function
processi ng board
service signals and works with the packet switching unit to process the received FE service signals.
3 Product Architecture
Service Type
Port Type
Valid Slot
Point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service VLAN-based E-Line service QinQ-based E-Line service E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1d bridges E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1q bridges E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges ETH PWE3 services
SDH board
PDH board
Auxiliar y board
TNH2S 2xSTML1D 1 interface board
Transmits/R eceives 2xSTM-1 optical signals.
ST M-1 service
2xSTM-1 optical ports
Slots 1 to 6
TNH2S 2xSTML4D 4 interface board
Transmits/R eceives 2xSTM-4 optical signals.
ST M-4 service
2xSTM-4 optical ports
Slots 1 and 6
TNH2S 4xSTML1Q 1 interface board
Transmits/R eceives 4xSTM-1 optical signals.
ST M-1 service
4xSTM-1 optical ports
Slots 1 to 6
TNH2S 42xE1/T P3D 1 tributary board
Transmits/R eceives E1/T1 signals.
E1/T1 service
42x75-/120-ohm E1 ports or 42x100-ohm T1 ports
Slots 1 to 6
TNH2P L3T
3xE3/T3 tributary board
Transmits/R eceives E3/T3 signals.
E3/T3 service
3x75-ohm E3/T3 ports
Slots 1 to 6
TNM1 AUX
Auxiliar y interface
Provides the system with one orderwire
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Orderwire phone Asynchronous data service
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
One orderwire phone port One asynchronous data
Slots 1 to 6
17
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Board Classif ication
Power supply board
Fan board
Board Acron ym
Board Name
Function
board
phone port, one synchronous data port, one asynchronou s data port, and one 6-input/2-ou tput external alarm port.
3 Product Architecture
Service Type
Port Type
port One asynchronous data port 4-input/2-output external alarm port
TND1P IU
Power supply board
Provides one N/A -48 V/-60 V DC power supply.
Provides -48 V/-60 V DC power supply ports.
TNF1A PIU
Power supply board
Connects to 110-220 V AC power supplies.
N/A
Provides 100/240 V AC power supply ports.
Cools the NE.
N/A
TNM1 FAN
Fan board
Valid Slot
Slots 91 and 92
N/A
Slots 2 and 4 Slots 4 and 6 (reco mme nded )
Slot 93
Ventilation Design The case of the OptiX OSN 550 is densely covered with small air holes. Through these holes, air is let in from the left and out from the right by fans. Ensure the smooth flow of air inside and around the equipment. Do not block the air inlet and air outlet of the subrack when cabling. Keep the top of subrack clean.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
3 Product Architecture
Figure 3-2 Ventilation design of the OptiX OSN 550
AIR OUT
AIR IN
Description of Labels Table 3-3 lists the description of the labels on the chassis and the boards in the chassis. The actual labels may be different depending on the configurations of the chassis and boards. Table 3-3 Description of labels Label
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Label Name
Description
ESD protection label
Indicates that the equipment is sensitive to static electricity.
Grounding label
Indicates the grounding position of the chassis.
Fan warning label
Indicates that the fan leaves cannot be touched when the fan is rotating.
Power port warning label
Indicates that you must read the operation instructions before connecting a power cable.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
19
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Label 合 格证/QU ALIFICA TION CA RD
3 Product Architecture
Label Name
Description
Qualification card
Indicates that the equipment is qualified.
RoHS label
Indicates that the equipment contains certain hazardous substances specified in RoHS. The equipment needs to be recycled after the environment-frien dly use period of 50 years expires.
Product nameplate label
Indicates the product name and certification.
HUAWEI 华为技术有限公司
中国制作
HUAW EI TECHNOL OGIES CO. L , TD.
MADE N I C HINA
50
DC power
AC power
3.3 Software Architecture This section describes the system's general software architecture, as well as the functions of each software module. 3.3.1 Overview of Software Architecture The software system is of a modular structure. The modules accomplish the corresponding functions and interoperate with each other. 3.3.2
Communication Protocols and Interfaces
The communication interfaces on the equipment are mainly Qx interfaces. For the description of the protocol stacks and messages on the Qx interfaces, see ITU-T G.773, ITU-T Q.811, and ITU-T Q.812. 3.3.3
Board Software
This section describes the software architecture of the OptiX OSN 550.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
20
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
3 Product Architecture
3.3.4 NE Software The NE software manages, monitors, and controls the running of boards in the NE. In addition, the NE software serves as the service unit for the communication between the NMS and boards. In this manner, the NMS can control and manage the NE. 3.3.5 NMS Software Like other optical transmission equipment, the OptiX OSN 550 is managed by the iManager series NMS.
3.3.1 Overview of Software Architecture The software system is of a modular structure. The modules accomplish the corresponding functions and interoperate with each other. The software modules fall into three types: the board software that runs on a variety of functional boards, the NE software that runs on the system control and communication board, and the network management software that runs on the network management computer. The software system is of layered design. That is, each layer performs specific functions and serves its upper layer. Figure 3-3 shows the general structure of software. All the modules except the network management system and the board software are NE software. Figure 3-3 General architecture of software Network Management System
High Level Communication Module Real-time multi-task operating system
Network side Module Equipment Management Module
Database Management Module
Communication Module NE software
Board Software
3.3.2 Communication Protocols and Interfaces The communication interfaces on the equipment are mainly Qx interfaces. For the description of the protocol stacks and messages on the Qx interfaces, see ITU-T G.773, ITU-T Q.811, and ITU-T Q.812.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
21
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
3 Product Architecture
A Qx interface mainly connects a mediation device (MD), Q adaptation (QA), or network element (NE) with an operations system (OS) through the local communication network (LCN). A QA interface is provided at the NE management layer, and an MD and OS are provided at the network management layer. As specified in the Recommendation, a Qx interface is developed in compliance with the Connectionless Network LayerService (CLNS1) based on T /IP. A Qx interface s the remote access of NMS through a modem, and the IP layer uses the Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP) accordingly.
3.3.3 Board Software This section describes the software architecture of the OptiX OSN 550.
3.3.4 NE Software The NE software manages, monitors, and controls the running of boards in the NE. In addition, the NE software serves as the service unit for the communication between the NMS and boards. In this manner, the NMS can control and manage the NE. In compliance with ITU-T M.3010, the NE software belongs to the element management layer in the telecommunications management network (TMN), and provides NE functions, some coordination functions, and operations system functions at the network element layer. The data communication function (DCF) provides communication functions between the NE and other components (including mediation devices, NMS, and other NEs).
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Real-time multi-task operating system The real-time multi-task operating system of the NE software is responsible for the management of public resources and s applications. This system provides an application execution environment that is independent of the processor hardware, to separate applications from the processor. Communication and control module The Communication and control module is the interface module between the NE software and the board software. According to the corresponding communication protocol, the communication and control module achieves the communication between the NE software and the board software. In this manner, the information can be exchanged and the equipment can be maintained. On one hand, the communication and control module issues the maintenance operation commands of the NE software to the boards. On the other hand, it reports the status, alarms, and performance events of the boards to the NE software. Network side (NS) module The network side (NS) module is between the communication module and equipment management module. It converts the data format between the operation side on the application layer and the NE equipment management layer, and provides security control for the NE layer. The NS module can be subdivided into three submodules in of function: Qx interface module, command line interface module, and security management module. Equipment management module The equipment management module (AM) is the kernel of the NE software. It implements NE management, and includes the Manager and the Agent. The Manager sends network management operation commands and receives event information. The Agent responds to the network management operation commands sent by the Manager, performs operations to managed objects, and reports events according to the status change of the managed objects. Communication module
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
22
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
3 Product Architecture
This module fulfills the message communication function (MCF) of the functional blocks of the transmission network equipment. Through the hardware interface provided by the SCB board, the communication module transmits the OAM&P information and exchanges management information between the NMS and NEs, and between NEs themselves. The communication module consists of network communication module, serial communication module, and ECC communication module. Database management module The database management module is a principal component of the NE software. It consists of the data and the programs. The data, organized by database form, consists of the network database, alarm database, performance database, and equipment database. The program manages and accesses the data in the databases.
3.3.5 NMS Software Like other optical transmission equipment, the OptiX OSN 550 is managed by the iManager series NMS. The NMS manages the optical transport network, and maintains all the OSN, SDH, Metro, and DWDM equipment on networks. The NMS, which complies with the ITU-T Recommendations, adopts a standard management information model and the object-oriented management technology. The NMS exchanges information with the NE software through the communication module to monitor and manage the network equipment. The NMS software runs on a workstation or PC. It manages the equipment and the transmission network. The NMS software provides the operation and maintenance function for the transmission equipment, and also provides the management capability for the transmission network. The NMS software has the following management functions:
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Alarm management: collects, prompts, filters, browses, acknowledges, checks, clears, counts alarms in real time, inserts alarms, analyzes alarm correlation, and diagnoses faults. Performance management: sets performance monitoring; browses, analyses and prints performance data; forecasts medium- and long-term performance; resets the performance . Configuration management: configures and manages the ports, clocks, services, trails, subnets, and time. Security management: NM management; NE management; NE management; NE lockout; NE setting lockout; and local craft terminal (LCT) access control. Maintenance management: performs loopbacks; resets boards; automatically shuts down lasers; detects fiber power; collects equipment data. In this manner, the maintenance personnel can locate and rectify equipment faults more quickly.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
23
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4
4 Packet Functions and Features
Packet Functions and Features
4.1 Packet-Domain Access Capacity This section provides the packet-domain access capacities when different system control, switching, and timing boards are configured in the OptiX OSN 550. Table 4-1 lists the packet-domain access capacities when different system control, switching, and timing boards are configured in the OptiX OSN 550. Table 4-1 Packet-domain access capacity of the OptiX OSN 550 Board
10xGE (Optical Port)
GE (Optical Port)
GE (Electrica l Port)
FE (Optical Port)
FE ATM/IM (Electrica A/E1 CES l Port)
PCXLX
2
12
12
48
36
192
PCXX
2
12
12
48
36
192
PCXLG
0
14
12
48
36
192
PCXGA
0
14
12
48
36
192
PCXGB
0
14
12
48
36
192
4.2 Service This section describes Ethernet services, CES services, and ATM/IMA services in the packet domain. 4.2.1 Native Ethernet Services Based on the packet plane, Native Ethernet services are classified into six types. 4.2.2 ETH PWE3 Services In the topology, the E-Line services are point-to-point services. The E-Line services realize the point-to-point transmission of Ethernet services.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
24
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4.2.3
4 Packet Functions and Features
CES Services
CES: By using the PWE3 technology, PWE3 packet headers are added to TDM traffic to create circuit emulation services (CES). PWE3 packet headers carry the frame format information, alarm information, signaling information, and synchronization and timing information of the TDM traffic. The encapsulated PW packets are transmitted over the MPLS tunnel on the PSN. After being decapsulated at the PW egress, the TDM circuit switched service traffic is re-created. On a packet switching network, the transmit and receive ends of a CES service maintain clock synchronization by means of adaptive clock recovery (ACR). 4.2.4 ATM/IMA Services This section provides the definition of ATM PWE3 and describes its purpose.
4.2.1 Native Ethernet Services Based on the packet plane, Native Ethernet services are classified into six types.
Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line Service The point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line services are the basic E-Line model. Point-to-point transmission does not involve service bandwidth sharing, service isolation, or service distinguishing; instead, Ethernet services are transparently transmitted between two service access points.
Service Model Table 4-2 describes the point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service model. Table 4-2 Point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service model Service Model
Encapsulation Type
Service Direction
Traffic Flow
Description
Model 1
Null (source) Null (sink)
UNI-UNI
PORT (source) PORT (sink)
The source port transparently transmits all the received Ethernet frames to the sink port.
Model 2
802.1Q (source) 802.1Q (sink)
UNI-UNI
PORT (source) PORT (sink)
The source port processes the incoming Ethernet frames based on its TAG attribute, and then sends the processed Ethernet frames to the sink port. The sink port processes the Ethernet frames based on its TAG attribute, and then exports the processed Ethernet frames.
In service model 2, ports process the received Ethernet frames according to their TAG attributes. Therefore, service model 2 is not a real transparent transmission model and is not recommended.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
25
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
Typical Application Figure 4-1 shows the typical application of service model 1. Figure 4-1 Typical application of service model 1 NE 1 Port 1 Service 1
NE 2 Port 3
E-Line E-Line
Servic e 2
Port 3 Transmission Network
Port 2
Port 4
E-Line
Port 1 Service 1
E-Line Port 4
Servic e 2 Port 2
In service model 1, Ethernet service 1 and Ethernet service 2, which carry no VLAN ID or carry unknown VLAN IDs, are accessed to NE1 through port 1 and port 2 respectively. Port 1 and port 2 transparently transmit Ethernet service 1 and Ethernet service 2 to port 3 and port 4, respectively. Port 3 and port 4 then transmit Ethernet service 1 and Ethernet service 2 to NE2. Service processing on NE2 is the same as on NE1. In service model 2, Ethernet service 1 and Ethernet service 2, which carry no VLAN ID or carry unknown VLAN IDs, are accessed to NE1 through port 1 and port 2 respectively. Port 1 and Port 2 process the incoming packets based on their TAG attributes. Then, Port 1 and Port 2 send Ethernet service 1 and Ethernet service 2 to Port 3 and Port 4 respectively. Port 3 and Port 4 process the incoming packets based on their TAG attributes. Then, Port 3 and Port 4 send Ethernet service 1 and Ethernet service 2 to NE2. Service processing on NE2 is the same as on NE1.
VLAN-based E-Line Services VLANs can be used to separate E-Line services. With the VLAN technology, multiple E-Line services can share one physical channel. These services are VLAN-based E-Line services.
Models of Services Table 4-3 shows the models of VLAN-based E-Line services. Table 4-3 Models of VLAN-based E-Line services Type of Service
Encapsulation Mode of Port
Direction of Flow of Service Description of Service Service
VLAN-based E-Line services
802.1Q (source) 802.1Q (sink)
UNI-UNI
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
PORT +VLAN (source) PORT +VLAN (sink)
The source port processes the incoming Ethernet frames based on its TAG attribute, and then sends the Ethernet frames with a specific VLAN NOTE ID to the sink port. The sink The VLAN ID of port processes the Ethernet the source and the frames based on its TAG VLAN ID of the attribute, and then exports the sink must be the processed Ethernet frames. same.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
26
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
Typical Applications Figure 4-2 shows the typical application of VLAN-based E-Line services. Service 1 and Service 2 carry different VLAN IDs. Therefore, after the two Ethernet services are accessed to NE1 through Port 1 and Port 2 respectively, they can share the same transmission channel at Port 3. On NE1, Port 1 and Port 2 process the incoming packets based on their own TAG attributes. Then, Port 1 and Port 2 send Service 1 and Service 2 to Port 3. Port 3 processes all the outgoing packets based on its TAG attribute, and then sends Service 1 and Service 2 to NE2. Due to the different VLAN IDs, Service 1 and Service 2 can be transmitted through Port 3 at the same time. NE2 processes Service 1 and Service 2 in the same manner as NE1. Figure 4-2 Model of VLAN-based E-Line services NE 1 Service 1 VLAN ID: 100 Service 2 VLAN ID: 200
Po rt 1
Port 2
E-Line
e E- Lin
NE 2 Port 1 Po rt 3
Transmission Ne twork
Service 1 VLAN ID: 100 Service 2 VLAN ID: 2 00
Po rt 3 Service 1 VLAN ID: 100 Se rvice 2 VLAN I D: 200
E- Lin e
Service 1 VLAN ID: 100
E-Lin e
Service 2 Port 2 VLAN ID: 2 00
QinQ-Based E-Line Services S-VLAN tags can be used to isolate E-Line services. Therefore, multiple E-Line services can share one physical channel. These services are QinQ-based E-Line services. E-Line Services Carried on P Ws describes QinQ-based E-Line services carried by P Ws.
Model of Service Table 4-4 shows the models of QinQ-based E-Line services. Table 4-4 Models of QinQ-based E-Line Services Model of Service
Encapsulation Mode of a Port
Direction
Flow of Service Description of Service
Model 1
Null (source) QinQ (sink)
UNI-NNI
PORT (source) QinQ link (sink)
The source port adds the S-VLAN tag that corresponds to the QinQ link to all the Ethernet frames, and then transmits the Ethernet frames to the sink port where the QinQ link is configured.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
27
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
Model of Service
Encapsulation Mode of a Port
Direction
Flow of Service Description of Service
Model 2
802.1Q (source) a QinQ (sink)
UNI-NNI
PORT (source) QinQ link (sink)
The source port accesses only the Ethernet frames that carry C-VLAN tags. It adds the S-VLAN tag that corresponds to the QinQ link to all the Ethernet frames, and then transmits the Ethernet frames to the sink port where the QinQ link is configured.
Model 3
802.1Q (source) a QinQ (sink)
UNI-NNI
PORT +C-VLAN (source) QinQ link (sink)
The source port adds the S-VLAN tag that corresponds to the QinQ link to all the Ethernet frames that carry specific C-VLAN tags, and then transmits the Ethernet frames to the sink port where the QinQ link is configured.
Model 4
QinQ (sink) QinQ (sink)
NNI-NNI
QinQ link (source) QinQ link (sink)
The source port transmits the Ethernet frames that carry the S-VLAN tag to the sink port where the sink QinQ link is configured. The S-VLAN tag carried in the Ethernet frames corresponds to the source QinQ link. If the source and sink QinQ links correspond to different S-VLAN tags, the S-VLAN tags carried in the Ethernet frames are exchanged.
a: Set TAG to Tag Aware.
Typical Applications Figure 4-3 shows the typical application of service model 1. Service 1 and Service 2 include tagged frames and untagged frames. Service 1 is accessed to NE1 through Port 1, and Service 2 is accessed to NE1 through Port 2. Port 1 adds the corresponding S-VLAN tag to Service 1, and Port 2 adds the corresponding S-VLAN tag to Service 2. Then, Service 1 and Service 2 are transmitted to Port 3. Port 3 transmits Service 1 and Service 2 to NE2. NE2 processes Service 1 and Service 2 in the same manner as NE1.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
28
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
Figure 4-3 Typical application of service model 1 NE 1 Port 1 Service 1
NE 2
E -L in e
Service 2 Port 2
Strip S-VLAN Label
Transmission Network
Port 3
Port 3
E -L in
e E- Lin
Add S-VLAN Label
Port 1
E- Lin e
Add S-VLAN Label
Service 1 Service 2
e
Port 2
Strip S-VLAN Label
D ata( 1)
S-VLAN(300)
Data(1)
S-VLAN(300)
Data(1)
Data(1)
Data (2)
S-VLAN(400)
Data(2)
S-VLAN(400)
Data(2)
D ata(2)
Figure 4-4 shows the typical application of service model 2. Service 1 and Service 2 carry different unknown C-VLAN tags. Service 1 is accessed to NE1 through Port 1, and Service 2 is accessed to NE1 through Port 2. Port 1 adds the corresponding S-VLAN tag to Service 1, and Port 2 adds the corresponding S-VLAN tag to Service 2. Then, Service 1 and Service 2 are transmitted to Port 3. Port 3 transmits Service 1 and Service 2 to NE2. NE2 processes Service 1 and Service 2 in the same manner as NE1. Figure 4-4 Typical application of service model 2 Strip S- VLAN Label
Add S-VLAN Label
C-V LAN
Data( 1)
S-V LAN(300)
C-VLAN
Data(1)
C-V LAN
Data(2)
S-V LAN(400)
C-VLAN
Data(2)
NE 1 Port 1 Service 1 Unknown CVLAN Service 2 Unknown CVLAN
Port 2
NE 2
E -Li ne
E -Lin
Port 1 Port 3
Transmission Network
E -Lin
e
Add S-V LAN Label S -VLAN(300)
C- VLA N
S -VLAN(400)
C-VLA N
Service 1 U nknown CVLAN
E -Line
Port 3
Data(1) Data(2)
e
Port 2
Service 2 Unknown CVLAN
S trip S-VLAN Label C- VLA N
Data( 1)
C- VLA N
Data(2)
Figure 4-5 shows the typical application of service model 3. Service 1 and Service 2 carry different C-VLAN tags. Service 1 is accessed to NE1 through Port 1, and Service 2 is accessed to NE1 through Port 2. Port 1 adds the corresponding S-VLAN tag to Service 1, and Port 2 adds the corresponding S-VLAN tag to Service 2. Then, Service 1 and Service 2 are transmitted to Port 3. Port 3 transmits Service 1 and Service 2 to NE2. NE2 processes Service 1 and Service 2 in the same manner as NE1.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
29
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
Figure 4-5 Typical application of service model 3 Strip S-VLAN Label
Add S-VLAN L abel
C-VLAN(100)
Data( 1)
S-VLAN(300)
C-VLAN( 100)
Data(1)
C-VLAN(200)
Data(2)
S-VLAN(400)
C-VLAN(200)
Data(2)
NE 1 Service 1 VLAN ID: 100 Service 2 VLAN ID: 200
Po rt 1
Port 2
NE 2
E-Line
Port 1 Transmission Ne twork
Po rt 3
E-Lin e
Service 1 VLAN ID: 100
E-Lin e
Service 2 Port 2 VLAN ID: 2 00
Po rt 3
e E- Lin
Add S-VLAN Label S-VLAN(300)
C-VLAN( 100)
S-VLAN(400)
C-VLAN(200)
Strip S-VLAN Label
Data(1) Data(2)
C- VLAN(100)
Data( 1)
C- VLAN(200)
Data(2)
Figure 4-6 shows the typical application of service model 4. Service 1 and Service 2 carry a same S-VLAN tag. Service 1 is accessed to NE1 through Port 1, and Service 2 is accessed to NE1 through Port 2. Port 1 changes the S-VLAN tag carried in Service 1 and Port 2 changes the S-VLAN tag carried in Service 2 so that the S-VLAN tags carried in Service 1 and Service 2 are different. Port 3 transmits Service 1 and Service 2 to NE2. NE2 processes Service 1 and Service 2 in the same manner as NE1. Figure 4-6 Typical application of service model 4 Switching S- VLAN Label S- VLA N( 100)
Data( 1)
S -VLAN(300)
Data(1)
S- VLA N( 100)
Data(2)
S -VLAN(400)
Data(2)
NE 1 Port 1
NE 2
Service 1 S-VLAN ID : 100
E- Line
Service 2 S-VLAN ID : 100 Port 2
E -Lin
Port 3
Transmission Network
Port 3
E -Line E-Lin e
e
Port 1 Service 1 S-VLAN ID: 100 Service 2 Port 2 S-VLAN ID: 100
S witching S-VLAN Label S-VLAN(300)
Data( 1)
S-V LA N(100)
Data(1)
S-VLAN(400)
Data(2)
S-V LA N(100)
Data( 2)
E-LAN Services Based on the 802.1d Bridge In the case of E-LAN services, packets can be forwarded only based on the MAC address table. These E-LAN services are E-LAN services based on the 802.1d bridge.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
30
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
Model of Service Table 4-5 shows the model of E-LAN services based on the 802.1d bridge. Table 4-5 Model of E-LAN services based on the 802.1d bridge Type of Service
Encapsulation Mode of Port
Tag Attribute
Type of Logical Port
Learning Mode
Sub-Switchin g Domain
E-LAN services based on the 802.1d bridge
Null
Tag-Transparent
PORT
SVL
No division of sub-switching domains
Typical Application Figure 4-7 shows the typical application of the model of service. The transmission network needs to carry the A services accessed from NE2 and NE3. The two A services are converged at the convergence node NE1. The services need not to be isolated. Therefore, an 802.1d bridge is used at NE1 to groom services. Figure 4-7 Model of E-LAN services based on the 802.1d bridge NE 2
Port 1 A2
Port 2 NE 1
Port 1 A1
Transmission Network Port 2 Port 3
802.1d bridge
Transmission Network
NE 3
Port 2
Port 1 A3
E-LAN Services Based on 802.1q Bridge E-LAN services can be separated by setting VLANs. In this case, a bridge is divided into multiple sub-switching domains. Therefore, the E-LAN services separated by setting VLANs are E-LAN services based on 802.1q bridge.
Model of Service Table 4-6 shows the models of E-LAN services based on 802.1q bridge.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
31
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
Table 4-6 Model of E-LAN services based on 802.1q bridge Type of Service
Encapsulation Mode of Port
TAG Attribute Type of Logical Port
Learning Mode
Sub-Switchin g Domain
E-LAN services based on 802.1q bridge
802.1q
C-Awared
IVL
Sub-switching domains are divided based on VLANs.
PORT +VLAN
Typical Applications Figure 4-8 shows the typical application of the model of E-LAN services based on 802.1q bridge. The transmission network needs to carry G and H services accessed from NE2 and NE3. Both types of services are converged on NE1. G and H services adopt different VLAN planning. Therefore, 802.1q bridge is used on NEs and sub-switching domains are divided based on VLANs, differentiating and separating the two types of services. Figure 4-8 Model of E-LAN services based on 802.1q bridge NE 2 VLAN 100 Port 1 G 2 P or t 3
NE 1
Port 1
VLAN 100
VLAN 200 P ort 2 Us er H2
Transm i ss ion Network
G 1 P ort 3
802.1q bri dge
VLAN 200 P ort 4
P ort 2 Us er H1
NE 3 Transm i ss ion Network
VLAN 100 P ort 1
802.1q bri dge
G 3 P ort 3
VLAN 200 P ort 2 Us er H3
802.1q bridge
You can configure VLAN-Based E-Line Services on NE2 and NE3 for service access.
E-LAN Services Based on 802.1ad Bridge S-VLAN tags can be used to isolate E-LAN services. Therefore, a bridge is divided into multiple independent sub-switching domains. These services are E-LAN services based on 802.1ad bridge.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
32
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
Model of Service Table 4-7 shows the models of E-LAN services based on 802.1ad bridge. Table 4-7 Models of E-LAN services based on 802.1ad bridge Type of Services
Encapsulation Mode of Port
Tag Attribute
E-LAN services based on 802.1ad bridge
Null or 802.1q S-Awared (UNI port) a QinQ (NNI port)
Type of Logical Port
Learning Mode
Sub-Switchin g Domain
PORT (The encapsulation mode of the UNI port is Null.) PORT or PORT +C-VLAN (The encapsulation mode of the UNI port is 802.1q.)
IVL
Sub-switching domains are divided based on S-VLAN tags.
a
PORT +S-VLAN (NNI port)
a: When the encapsulation mode of port is 802.1q, the tag attribute must be Tag Aware.
Typical Applications Figure 4-9 shows the typical application of the model of service. The transmission network needs to carry G and H services accessed from NE2 and NE3. The two types of services are converged on NE1. Since G and H services have a same C-VLAN tag, you need to add different S-VLAN tags to G and H services for service isolation.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
33
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
Figure 4-9 Model of E-LAN services based on 802.1ad bridge NE 2 Add S-VLAN Label
Strip S-VLAN Label
S-VLAN(300)
C-VLAN(100)
Data(G)
C-VLAN(100)
Data( G)
S-VLAN(400)
C-VLAN(100)
Data(H)
C-VLAN(100)
Data(H)
NE 2 SVLAN 300 Port 1 G 2 CVLAN 100
Por t 3 SVLA N 400
NE 1
P ort 2 Us er H2 CVLAN 100
T ransm i ss ion Network
SVLAN 300
Port 1
Port 3
G 1 CVLAN 100
802.1ad bri dge SVLAN 400
NE 3
Port 2 H1 CVLAN 100
P or t 4
802.1ad bridge
SVLAN 300 Tr ans m is si on Network
P ort 1 G 3 CVLAN 100 SVLA N 400
Strip S-VLAN Label
P ort 2 Us er H3 CVLAN 100
Por t 3
NE 1 Add S -VLAN Label
C-VLAN(100)
Data( G)
S-VLAN(300)
C-VLAN(100)
Data(G)
C-VLAN(100)
Data(H)
S-VLAN(400)
C-VLAN(100)
Data(H)
802.1ad bri dge
NE 3 Add S-VLAN Label
Strip S-VLAN Label
S-VLA N(300)
C-VLA N(100)
Data(G)
C-VLA N(100)
Data( G)
S-VLA N(400)
C-VLA N(100)
Data(H)
C-VLA N(100)
Data(H)
You can configure QinQ-Based E-Line Services on NE2 and NE3 for service access.
4.2.2 ETH PWE3 Services In the topology, the E-Line services are point-to-point services. The E-Line services realize the point-to-point transmission of Ethernet services. Figure 4-10 shows the networking diagram of the E-Line services carried by PWs. The branches of Company A and Company B are located in City 1 and City 2, and need to communicate with each other. The services of Company A and Company B need to be isolated from each other. In this case, you can configure the E-Line services that are carried by PWs and from the side to the network side, to realize the communication between the branches of Company A or Company B. In addition, different services are carried by different PWs, therefore realizing the isolation of the services of Company A from the services of Company B. The services that are accessed from the side are encapsulated and transmitted to the PWs. Then, the services are transmitted through the tunnel.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
34
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
The E-Line services of different companies are carried by different PWs and then to the same port on the network side. In this manner, the port resources on the network side are saved and the bandwidth utilization is increased. In the uplink direction of the side, layered QoS configuration can be performed for data packets. Figure 4-10 E-Line services carried by PWs
PSN
NE1
NE2
Company A
Company A
Company B Company B
City 1
City2 UNI
NNI
NNI UNI
Tunnel PW
4.2.3 CES Services CES: By using the PWE3 technology, PWE3 packet headers are added to TDM traffic to create circuit emulation services (CES). PWE3 packet headers carry the frame format information, alarm information, signaling information, and synchronization and timing information of the TDM traffic. The encapsulated PW packets are transmitted over the MPLS tunnel on the PSN. After being decapsulated at the PW egress, the TDM circuit switched service traffic is re-created. On a packet switching network, the transmit and receive ends of a CES service maintain clock synchronization by means of adaptive clock recovery (ACR).
Emulation Mode The OptiX NG-SDH series equipment s two types of CES services: structure-aware TDM circuit emulation service over packet switched network (CESoPSN) CES and structure-agnostic TDM over packet (SAToP) CES. In the case of CESoPSN CES:
The equipment senses the frame format, frame alignment mode, and timeslot information in the TDM circuit. The equipment processes the overheads and extracts the payloads in TDM frames. Then, the equipment loads timeslots to the packet payload in a certain sequence. As a result, the services in each timeslot are fixed and visible in packets.
In the case of SAToP CES:
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
The equipment does not sense any format in the TDM signal. Instead, it considers TDM signals as bit flows at a constant rate, and therefore the entire bandwidth of TDM signals is emulated.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
35
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
The overheads and payloads in TDM signals are transparently transmitted.
Service Type CES services are classified into UNI-UNI CES services and UNI-UNI CES services by service implementation point.
UNI-UNI CES services As shown in Figure 4-11, a single OptiX OSN NE completes access of TDM services.
Figure 4-11 UNI-UNI CES services
PSN
NE TDM link NodeB
BSC
UNI-NNI CES services As shown in Figure 4-12, the OptiX OSN NEs set UNI-NNI CES services. In the case of a UNI-NNI CES service, the OptiX OSN NEs access customer TDM services through E1 ports; CES PWs are created between the OptiX OSN NEs to emulate end-to-end TDM services.
Figure 4-12 UNI-NNI CES services NE NodeB1
NE PSN BSC
NE TDM link PW
Nod eB2
Tun nel
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
36
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
4.2.4 ATM/IMA Services This section provides the definition of ATM PWE3 and describes its purpose.
Definition The ATM PWE3 technology emulates the basic behaviors and characteristics of ATM services on a packet switched network (PSN) by using the PWE3 mechanism, so that the emulated ATM services can be transmitted on a PSN.
Purpose Aided by the ATM PWE3 technology, conventional ATM networks can be connected by a PSN. Specifically, ATM PWE3 allows transmitting conventional ATM services over a PSN by emulating the ATM services. The networking type of ATM PWE3 can be one-to-one or N-to-one depending on the encapsulation type of ATM PWE3 packets. It is obvious that ATM PWE3 helps to transmit ATM services over the PSN, without adding ATM equipment or changing the configuration of the ATM CE equipment. Figure 4-13 Typical application of ATM PWE3 (in the one-to-one encapsulation mode) PSN PW AC
AC CE1
PE1
LSP
PE2
CE2
ATM PWE3 1-to-1 ATM PWE3 service
Packet transmission equipment
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
1-to-1 ATM PWE3 service
NodeB
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RNC
37
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
Figure 4-14 Typical application of ATM PWE3 (in the N-to-one encapsulation mode)
CE1 PSN PW AC
AC CE2
PE1
LSP
PE2
CE4
ATM PWE3
CE3
N-to-1 ATM PWE3 service
Packet transmission equipment
N-to-1 ATM PWE3 service
NodeB
RNC
The cell encapsulation modes at both ends of a P W must be the same.
4.3 Protection This section describes protection schemes including MPLS APS, PW APS, MSTP, LPT, and LAG in the packet domain. 4.3.1 MPLS APS This section provides the definition of MPLS APS and describes its purpose. 4.3.2 PW APS This section provides the definition of PW APS and describes its purpose. 4.3.3 LPT This section provides the definition of LPT and describes its purpose. 4.3.4 LAG Link aggregation allows multiple links that are attached to the same equipment to be aggregated together to form a LAG so that the bandwidth increases and the reliability of the links is improved. The aggregated links can be considered as a single logical link.
4.3.1 MPLS APS This section provides the definition of MPLS APS and describes its purpose.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
38
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
Definition MPLS APS is a function that protects MPLS tunnels based on the APS protocol. With this function, when the working tunnel is faulty, the service can be switched to the preconfigured protection tunnel. The MPLS APS function ed by the OptiX OSN 550 has the following features:
The MPLS APS provides end-to-end protection for tunnels. The working tunnel and protection tunnel have the same ingress and egress nodes. The protection tunnel in the MPLS APS protection pair does not carry extra traffic. In MPLS APS, the MPLS OAM mechanism is used to detect faults in tunnels, and the ingress and egress nodes exchange APS protocol packets to achieve protection switching.
Purpose MPLS APS improves reliability for service transmission in tunnels. As shown in Figure 4-15, when the MPLS OAM mechanism detects a fault in the working tunnel, the service is switched to the protection tunnel for transmission.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
39
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
Figure 4-15 Application example of MPLS APS Transit
Working Tun nel In gress
Egress
Protectio n Tunnel
Transit Protect swi tching Transit
Working Tunnel In gress
Egress
Protection Tunnel
Transit Service
Packet transmission equipment
4.3.2 PW APS This section provides the definition of PW APS and describes its purpose.
Definition PW APS is a function that protects PWs based on the APS protocol. With this function, when the working PW is faulty, the service can be switched to the preconfigured protection PW. The PW APS function ed by the OptiX OSN 550 has the following features:
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
The PW APS function provides end-to-end protection for PWs. The working PW and protection PW are carried in different tunnels but have the same local and remote PEs. The protection PW in the PW APS protection pair does not carry extra traffic.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
40
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
In PW APS, the PW OAM mechanism is used to detect faults in PWs, and the PEs exchange APS protocol packets to achieve protection switching.
Purpose PW APS improves reliability for service transmission in PWs. As shown in Figure 4-16, when the PW OAM mechanism detects a fault in the working PW, the service is switched to the protection PW for transmission. Figure 4-16 Application example of PW APS PE2
Working PW PE1
PE4
Protection PW
PE 3 Protect swi tching PE2
Working PW PE1
PE4
Protection P W
PE 3 Service
Packet transmission equi pment
4.3.3 LPT This section provides the definition of LPT and describes its purpose.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
41
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
Definition Link State Through (LPT) detects a fault that occurs at a service access node or on a service network, and then instructs the equipment at both ends of a service network to immediately start a backup network for communication. LPT ensures proper transmission of important data. As shown in Figure 4-17, LPT-enabled NE1 and NE2 will disconnect their access links from router A and router B if access link 1, access link 2, or the service network becomes faulty. As a result, router A and router B will immediately detect the link fault between them, and switch to backup networks for communication. Figure 4-17 Typical application of LPT
Backup network
Service network NE1 Router A
NE2
Access link 1
Access link 2 Router B
Working link Protection link
Purpose With the LPT function enabled, access equipment will immediately detect link faults and switch to backup networks timely.
4.3.4 LAG Link aggregation allows multiple links that are attached to the same equipment to be aggregated together to form a LAG so that the bandwidth increases and the reliability of the links is improved. The aggregated links can be considered as a single logical link. A LAG aggregates multiple physical links to form a logical link that is at a higher rate to transmit data. Link aggregation functions between adjacent equipment. Therefore, link aggregation is not related to the architecture of the entire network. Link aggregation is also called port aggregation because links correspond to ports one to one on an Ethernet network. As shown in Figure 4-18, the LAG provides the following functions:
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Increased bandwidth A LAG provides s with a cost-effective method for increasing the link bandwidth. s obtain data links with higher bandwidths by combining multiple physical links into one logical link without upgrading the existing equipment. The bandwidth of the logical Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
42
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
link is equal to the sum of the bandwidths of the physical links. The aggregation module distributes the traffic to different links by using the load sharing algorithm, therefore providing the load sharing function for links. Increased availability The links in a LAG dynamically back up each other. When a link fails, the other links in the LAG quickly take over. The process in which link aggregation starts the backup link is associated only with the links in the same LAG, and the links not in the LAG are not involved.
Figure 4-18 Link aggregation group Li nk 1 Li nk 2 E th ernet p ackets
Li nk 3
E th ernet p ackets
LAG
4.4 Maintenance This section describes the maintenance functions and features including MPLS OAM, ETH-OAM, ATM OAM, and RMON in the packet domain. 4.4.1 MPLS OAM The MPLS OAM mechanism ed by the equipment includes tunnel OAM and PW OAM. Tunnel OAM operates at the tunnel layer, and PW OAM operates at the PW layer. Tunnel OAM and PW OAM both provide the complete fault detection and locating mechanism. 4.4.2 ETH-OAM ETH-OAM enhances Ethernet Layer 2 maintenance functions and it strongly s service continuity verification, service deployment commissioning, and network fault locating. 4.4.3 ATM OAM This section provides the definition of ATM OAM and describes its purpose. 4.4.4
RMON
By using the remote monitoring (RMON), you can transmit network monitoring data between different network sections. 4.4.5 PRBS Certain boards provide the PRBS functional module, which is used for testing and maintaining the network. You can determine whether the working path on a tributary port, in the line direction, or in the cross-connect direction is normal, depending on whether bit errors are detected in a PRBS test. 4.4.6
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
CES Alarm Transmission
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
43
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
The OptiX OSN 550 uses the L/M and R fields in the control word to transparently transmit alarms.
4.4.1 MPLS OAM The MPLS OAM mechanism ed by the equipment includes tunnel OAM and PW OAM. Tunnel OAM operates at the tunnel layer, and PW OAM operates at the PW layer. Tunnel OAM and PW OAM both provide the complete fault detection and locating mechanism.
Tunnel OAM
Description The tunnel OAM mechanism helps to effectively detect, identify, and locate internal defects at the tunnel layer of an MPLS network. The equipment triggers the protection switching based on the OAM detection status. Therefore, quick fault detection and service protection can be achieved. Objectives and benefits As a key bearer technology for the scalable next generation network (NGN), MPLS provides multi-service capabilities with ensured QoS. In addition, MPLS introduces a unique network layer (tunnel), which may cause some faults. Therefore, an MPLS network must have the OAM capability. By providing a tunnel OAM mechanism independent of any upper layer or lower layer, the tunnel OAM s the following features: − Provides query-on-demand and consecutive detections so that at any moment you can learn whether the monitored LSP has defects. − Detects, analyzes, and locates any defect that occurs, and notifies the NMS of the relevant information. − Triggers a protection switching immediately after a defect or fault occurs on a link. − Monitors the performance events indicating packet loss ratio, delay, and jitter in real time and reports them to the NMS.
PW OAM
Description The PW OAM mechanism helps to effectively detect, identify, and locate internal defects at the PW layer of a network. The equipment triggers the protection switching based on the OAM detection status. Therefore, quick fault detection and service protection can be achieved. Objectives and benefits The equipment performs PW encapsulation on service packets, and then transmits the service packets over tunnels. The network consists of two layers: tunnel and PW. Tunnels use tunnel OAM for maintenance and management, and PWs use PW OAM for maintenance and management. Currently, the equipment can detect the connectivity of a certain PW through ping packets, and then reports the result to the NMS.
4.4.2 ETH-OAM ETH-OAM enhances Ethernet Layer 2 maintenance functions and it strongly s service continuity verification, service deployment commissioning, and network fault locating.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
44
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
Definition With the continuous development of the Ethernet, especially when LANs evolve to WANs, operators pay more attention to equipment maintainability. Solutions to operations, istration and maintenance (OAM) in the transmission network are required urgently. Therefore, ETH-OAM is developed. ITU-T and IEEE have researches on ETH-OAM. Currently, Huawei Ethernet service processing boards have realized the ETH-OAM function, which complies with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah. Wherein, IEEE 802.1ag define Ethernet service OAM standards, and IEEE 802.3ah defines Ethernet port OAM standards. As shown in Figure 4-19, the combination of IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah provides a complete Ethernet OAM solution. Figure 4-19 Application of IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah IEEE 8 02.3ah
IEEE 80 2.1ag
P
I EEE 8 02.3ah
P
CE1
Rou ter 1
PE2
PE1
CE3
Router 3
CE2
P
P
CE4
Router 2
Access layer
Acce ss layer Core layer
Custom la yer
Custom laye r OptiX NE
Ethernet service OAM focuses on the maintenance of end-to-end Ethernet links. Based on services, Ethernet service OAM implements end-to-end detection in the unit of "maintenance domain" and performs segmental management on each network segment that is involved in the same service on a network. Ethernet port OAM focuses on the maintenance of point-to-point Ethernet link between two directly-connected devices in Ethernet in the first mile (EFM). Ethernet port OAM does not focus on a specific service. It maintains the point-to-point Ethernet link by performing OAM auto-discovery, link performance monitoring, fault check, remote loopback, and selfloop check.
Purpose Based on the MAC layer, the ETH-OAM protocol performs OAM operations for the Ethernet by transmitting OAM packets. This protocol is irrelevant to the transmission medium. The OAM packets are processed only at the MAC layer, having no impact on the other layers of the Ethernet. In addition, as a low-rate protocol, the ETH-OAM protocol occupies low bandwidths. Therefore, this protocol does not affect services carried on links. A comparison of ETH-OAM and existing OAM and fault locating methods is provided as follows:
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
45
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
When a loopback is performed at a port, all packets on the port are looped back. Therefore, the loopback method cannot be used if only a specific service needs to be looped back. ETH-OAM can detect hardware faults. ETH-OAM can detect and locate faults automatically.
4.4.3 ATM OAM This section provides the definition of ATM OAM and describes its purpose.
Definition ATM OAM is used for detecting and locating ATM faults, and monitoring ATM performance. In this document, ATM OAM refers to OAM only at the ATM layer and implements various OAM functions by means of specific ATM OAM cells.
Purpose ATM OAM provides segment-based ATM OAM between the CE and the PE and end-to-end-based ATM OAM between CEs. As shown in Figure 4-20, ATM OAM cells are transmitted and detected between the CE and the PE, or between the CEs to monitor the ATM link. Figure 4-20 Typical application of ATM OAM
CE1 (NodeB)
P E2
PE1
CE2 (RNC)
Segment check End-to-end check
Pa cket tra nsmission equipment
4.4.4 RMON By using the remote monitoring (RMON), you can transmit network monitoring data between different network sections. Currently, the management of the Ethernet performance for transmission products is relevantly simple. In the case of the management of Ethernet ports, the management of the performance data of the ports is required. What's more, as the network is becoming complex, a method for managing network sections is required. Thus, the RMON emerges and the RMON should have the following features:
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
46
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
All statistics data is saved at the agent and the out-of-service operation on the manager is ed. History data is saved for the fault diagnosis. Errors are detected and reported. Detailed data is provided. Multiple management stations are ed.
Based on the preceding purposes, the RMON defines a serial of statistic formats and functions to realize the data exchange between the control stations and detection stations that complies with the RMON standards. To meet the requirements of different networks, the RMON provides flexible detection modes and control mechanism. What's more, the RMON provides error diagnosis, planning and information receiving of the performance events of the entire network.
4.4.5 PRBS Certain boards provide the PRBS functional module, which is used for testing and maintaining the network. You can determine whether the working path on a tributary port, in the line direction, or in the cross-connect direction is normal, depending on whether bit errors are detected in a PRBS test. In the case of E1 services, T1 services or T3 services, the PRBS15 is transmitted. The PRBS function of the board is available in two types: lower-order PRBS function and higher-order PRBS function. Currently, the OptiX OSN equipment s only the lower-order PRBS function. In the case of the lower-order PRBS function, the PRBS module is integrated with the tributary board. An NE that provides the PRBS function can be used as a simple instrument. You can determine whether a service path is faulty and can determine the location of the fault on fibers or relevant boards between the faulty NEs, depending on the bit errors detected on the NE. The PRBS function module can analyze the local NE and the entire network. Therefore, you can perform a test without using a real instrument during the deployment or fault locating.
4.4.6 CES Alarm Transmission The OptiX OSN 550 uses the L/M and R fields in the control word to transparently transmit alarms. CES alarm transparent transmission involves transmitting local CES alarms to the remote end, and inserting corresponding alarms to notify the remote end of faults in the local end. Depending on the position where the alarm is generated, CES alarm transparent transmission can be between AC sides, and from the NNI side to the AC side.
CES Alarm Transparent Transmission Between AC Sides Figure 4-21 shows the CES alarm transparent transmission can be between AC sides.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
47
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
Figure 4-21 CES alarm transparent transmission between AC sides
PSN AC1 NodeB
AC2
PW
PE1
LSP
RNC
PE2
Packe t transmission equip ment
The service alarms on the AC side are transparently transmitted through the PSN as follows: When receiving TDM signals carrying AIS/RAI alarms from AC1 side, PE1 uses the L or M field in the control word to respectively transmit AIS and RAI alarms to PE2. Then, PE2 inserts AIS/RAI alarms into AC2 based on the received L or M field. The SAToP encapsulation mode does not the M field, and therefore cannot transparently transmit the RAI alarm.
The fault information on the AC link or port is transmitted through the PSN as follows: When detecting an AC link fault or E1 port fault in AC1, PE1 uses the L or M field in the control word to transmit the fault information to PE2. Then, PE2 inserts alarms into AC2 based on the received L or M fields.
CES Alarm Transparent Transmission from the NNI Side to the AC Side Figure 4-22 shows the CES alarm transparent transmission from the NNI side to the AC side. Figure 4-22 CES alarm transparent transmission from the NNI side to the AC side
PSN AC1 NodeB
AC2
PW
PE1
LSP
PE2
RNC
Packe t transmission equip ment
When detecting that packet loss ratio continuously beyond the preset threshold, PE2 inserts the AIS alarm into AC2, and uses the R field in the control word to transmit the information to PE1. Then, PE1 reports the RDI alarm based on the R field, and inserts the RAI alarm into the AC1 side.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
48
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
4.5 Synchronization This section describes synchronization features including synchronous Ethernet clock, and CES ACR in the packet domain. 4.5.1
Synchronous Ethernet Clock
The synchronous Ethernet clock is a technology that extracts the clock from the serial bit stream on the Ethernet line, and transmits data through the extracted clock to realize the transfer of clocks. 4.5.2
CES ACR
This section provides the definition of CES ACR and describes its purpose.
4.5.1 Synchronous Ethernet Clock The synchronous Ethernet clock is a technology that extracts the clock from the serial bit stream on the Ethernet line, and transmits data through the extracted clock to realize the transfer of clocks.
Definition The synchronous Ethernet clock is a technology of frequency synchronization over the physical layer. The system directly extracts the clock signal from the serial bit stream on the Ethernet line, and transmits the data to each board by using the clock signal to realize the transfer of clock information.
Purpose As the network is increasingly based on the Ethernet transfer technology, the large-scale network at the carrier-class level requires the synchronous Ethernet to transmit the clock and introduces the networkwide synchronous timing transmission idea of the SDH system to the Ethernet design. Therefore, the clock signal can be transmitted from the core to the edge by using the Ethernet physical layer, to provide ensured timing for various real-time services.
4.5.2 CES ACR This section provides the definition of CES ACR and describes its purpose.
Definition CES ACR is a function that uses the adaptive clock recovery (ACR) technology to recover clock synchronization information carried by CES packets. In the standard CES ACR solution, the source end (Master) considers the local clock as the timestamp in the Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) packet header and encapsulates it in the CES packet; the sink end (Slave) recovers the clock according to the timestamp in the packet. In this manner, signal impairment during the transmission is prevented. The OptiX OSN 550 adopts the enhanced timestamp clock solution. That is, clocks can be recovered based on SN in CES packets rather than timestamps in RTP packet headers. See Figure 4-23.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
49
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
Figure 4-23 CES ACR clock solution Slave
Master SN
E1
Processing
SN
CE S
CES
Processing
E1
Primary reference clock
PSN E1
BTS
E1
CES
P E1
Packet transmissi on equipment
PE 2
BSC
SN: Sequnce Number
Purpose In the packet domain, CES ACR is mainly used to transparently transmit E1 clocks in the PSN. For details, see CES ACR Clock Transparent Transmission Solution.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
50
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
5
5 TDM Functions and Features
TDM Functions and Features
5.1 TDM-Domain Access Capacity This section provides the TDM-domain access capacities when different system control, switching, and timing boards are configured in the OptiX OSN 550. Table 5-1 lists the TDM-domain access capacities when different system control, switching, and timing boards are configured in the OptiX OSN 550. Table 5-1 TDM-domain access capacity of the OptiX OSN 550 Board
STM-1
STM-4
STM-16
E1/T1
E3/T3
PCXLX
26
14
2
252
18
PCXX
24
12
0
252
18
PCXLG
26
14
2
252
18
PCXGA
24
12
0
252
18
PCXGB
24
12
0
252
18
5.2 Service This section describes the service in the TDM domain. The OptiX OSN 550 can process SDH services and PDH services. Table 5-2 lists the ed service types. Table 5-2 Service types ed by the OptiX OSN 550 in the TDM domain Service Type
Description
SDH service
SDH standard services: ST M-1/STM-4/STM-16
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
51
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
5 TDM Functions and Features
Service Type
Description
PDH service
E1/T1, E3/T3services
5.3 Protection This section describes the protection schemes including SN and linear MSP in the TDM domain. 5.3.1
SN
The SN scheme, which requires one working subnet and one protection subnet, is to select one service from the dually transmitted services. 5.3.2
Ring MSP
Ring MSP uses the multiplex section overhead (MSOH) bytes K1 and K2 to implement automatic protection switching of services. 5.3.3 Linear MSP The linear MSP uses the K1 and K2 bytes in the multiplex section overhead to realize automatic protection switching. The OptiX OSN equipment s 1+1 and 1:N linear MSP.
5.3.1 SN The SN scheme, which requires one working subnet and one protection subnet, is to select one service from the dually transmitted services. The SN scheme, which requires one working subnet and one protection subnet, is to select one service from the dually transmitted services. If the working subnet fails to be connected or if its performance fails to meet certain requirements, the connection of the protection subnet takes over. Figure 5-1 shows the application of the SN.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
52
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
5 TDM Functions and Features
Figure 5-1 Application of the SN Worki ng SNC Sou rce end
Si nk end
NE A
NE B Pro tection SNC Protection switchin g Working SNC
Sou rce end
Sin k e nd
NE A
NE B Pro tection SNC
5.3.2 Ring MSP Ring MSP uses the multiplex section overhead (MSOH) bytes K1 and K2 to implement automatic protection switching of services.
Two-Fiber Unidirectional Ring MSP On a two-fiber unidirectional ring MSP, one of the bidirectional STM-N lines is the working line, and the other is the protection line. As shown in Figure 5-2, the services on the two-fiber unidirectional ring MSP are on diverse routes. Before the protection switching, the signal flow of the services from NE A to NE C is NE A→NE B→NE C, and the signal flow of the services from NE C to NE A is NE C→NE D→NE A. In normal cases, services are transmitted on the working line. When a fiber cut occurs and the working line becomes unavailable, the services on the two ends of the faulty point are both switched from the working line of the faulty fiber to the protection line of the reverse directional fiber for transmission. Figure 5-2 shows the application of the two-fiber unidirectional ring MSP. After the protection switching, the signal flow of the services from NE A to NE C is NE A→NE D→NE C→NE B→NE C, and the signal flow of the services from NE C to NE A continues to be NE C→NE D→NE A.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
53
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
5 TDM Functions and Features
Figure 5-2 Two-fiber unidirectional ring MSP
Before protection switching East
West
NE A
West
East
Two-fiber unidirectional MSP ring
NE B
NE D
East
West NE C
West
East
Protection switching
After protection switching East
West
NE A West
East NE B
Two-fiber unidirectional MSP ring
NE D
East
West NE C
West
East Signal flow of services
Two-Fiber Bidirectional Ring MSP On a two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP, the first half of VC-4s on each ST M-N line is allocated to the working channel, and the other half of VC-4s is allocated to the protection channel. As shown in Figure 5-3, the services on the two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP are on uniform routes. Before the protection switching, the signal flow of the services from NE A to NE C is NE A→NE B→NE C, and the signal flow of the services from NE C to NE A is NE C→NE B→NE A. In normal cases, services are transmitted on the working channel. The services transmitted on two fibers flow in inverse directions. When a fiber cut occurs and the working channel becomes unavailable, the services on the two ends of the faulty point are both switched from Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
54
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
5 TDM Functions and Features
the working channel of the faulty fiber to the protection channel of the reverse directional fiber for transmission. Figure 5-3 shows the application of the two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP. After the protection switching, the signal flow of the services from NE A to NE C is NE A→NE D→NE C→NE B→NE C, and the signal flow of the services from NE C to NE A is NE C→NE B→NE C→NE D→NE A. Figure 5-3 Two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP
Before protection switching East
West
NE A West
East Two-fiber bidirectional M SP ring
NE B
NE D
East
West NE C
West
East
Protection switching
After protection switching East
West
NE A West
East NE B
Two-fiber bidirectional M SP ring
East
NE D West
NE C
West
East Signal flow of services
5.3.3 Linear MSP The linear MSP uses the K1 and K2 bytes in the multiplex section overhead to realize automatic protection switching. The OptiX OSN equipment s 1+1 and 1:N linear MSP.
1+1 Linear MSP The 1+1 linear MSP requires one working channel and one protection channel. At the source node, the service is dually fed to the working channel and protection channel. At the sink node, the service is received from the working channel. When the working channel becomes faulty,
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
55
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
5 TDM Functions and Features
the service is received from the protection channel. Figure 5-4 shows the application of the 1+1 linear MSP. Figure 5-4 1+1 linear MSP NE B
NE A Working channel
Protection channel
Protecti on switching NE B
NE A Working channel
Protection channel
No extra traffic can be configured in the protection channel in a 1+1 linear MSP group.
1:N linear MSP The 1:N linear MSP requires N working channels and one protection channel. Common services are transmitted on the working channels, and extra traffic is transmitted on the protection channel. When a working channel becomes faulty, the service on the channel is switched to the protection channel. Therefore, the extra traffic is interrupted. Figure 5-5 shows the application of the 1:N linear MSP.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
56
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
5 TDM Functions and Features
Figure 5-5 1:N linear MSP NE A
Working channel 1
NE B Common servic e 1
Common service 1 ...
... Working channel N Common servic e N
Common service N Protection channel Extra traffic
Extra traffic
Protection s witching NE A
Working channel 1
NE B Common servic e 1
Common service 1 ...
... Working channel N Common service N
Common service N Protection channel Extra traffic
Extra traffic
Purpose The LMSP scheme uses the MSOH bytes K1 and K2 to implement automatic protection switching once the working path fails, and therefore to protect services.
5.4 Maintenance Certain boards provide the PRBS functional module, which is used for testing and maintaining the network. You can determine whether the working path on a tributary port, in the line direction, or in the cross-connect direction is normal, depending on whether bit errors are detected in a PRBS test. In the case of E1 services, T1 services or T3 services, the PRBS15 is transmitted. The PRBS function of the board is available in two types: lower-order PRBS function and higher-order PRBS function. Currently, the OptiX OSN equipment s only the lower-order PRBS function. In the case of the lower-order PRBS function, the PRBS module is integrated with the tributary board. An NE that provides the PRBS function can be used as a simple instrument. You can determine whether a service path is faulty and can determine the location of the fault on fibers or relevant boards between the faulty NEs, depending on the bit errors detected on the NE. The PRBS function module can analyze the local NE and the entire network. Therefore, you can perform a test without using a real instrument during the deployment or fault locating.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
57
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
5 TDM Functions and Features
5.5 Synchronization Clock synchronization on the entire network helps to transmit services normally.
Definition Clock: The electronic circuit in a computer that generates a steady stream of timing pulses.
Purpose Clock synchronization ensures that all the digital devices on a communications network work at the same nominal frequency, and therefore minimizes the impacts of slips, burst bit errors, phase jumps, jitters, and wanders on digital communications systems. Clock synchronization also minimizes pointer justifications on SDH devices. Therefore, clock synchronization is the precondition and basis for the normal operation of a network.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
58
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
6
6 Networking and Application Scenarios
Networking and Application Scenarios
6.1 Basic Network Topologies OptiX OSN 550s can form the following network topologies: chain, ring, tangent rings, and ring with chain. The OptiX OSN 550 s separate and combined configuration of the following types: terminal multiplexer (TM), add/drop multiplexer (), and multiple add/drop multiplexer (M). OptiX OSN 550s can form the following network topologies: chain, ring, tangent rings, and ring with chain. In addition, OptiX OSN 550s can be interconnected with other OptiX OSN equipment, OptiX DWDM equipment, and OptiX Metro equipment to provide a complete transport network solution. See Table 6-1. Table 6-1 Network topologies ed by OptiX OSN 550s and corresponding legends Network Topology
Legend
Chain
Ring
Tangent rings
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
59
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Network Topology
6 Networking and Application Scenarios
Legend
Ring with chain
6.2 Typical Application of Hybrid Networking In Hybrid networking mode, the OptiX OSN 550 receives and transmits packet services and time division multiplex (TDM) services at the same time. Figure 6-1 shows a Hybrid ring network, and Figure 6-2 shows the board configurations on each NE of the network, on which the following base station services are transmitted:
2G base station services (transmitted in Native E1 mode) 3G base station services (transmitted in ETH PWE3 or ATM/IMAPWE3 mode)
Figure 6-1 Hybrid ring network
FE TDM E1
FE
NE 2 NE 1
NE 3
FE Node B
TDM E1 NE 4
A TM/IMA E1
Packet domain
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
TDM domain
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
No de B
BTS
60
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
6 Networking and Application Scenarios
Figure 6-2 Board configurations on each NE of the Hybrid ring network PCXLG
PCXLG
NE6 EM6T SP3D NE 2 FE
E1
FE
NE 1 PCXLG
PCXLG
NE6 EM6T
SP3D
NE 3 PCXLG PCXLG NE6 EF8F
E1
FE NE 4 PCXLG PCXLG NE6 MD1 ATM/IMA E1
Packet domain
TDM domain
Node B
BTS
6.3 Typical Application of Pure Packet Networking This section describes the typical application of pure packet networking. Figure 6-3 shows a pure packet network, and Figure 6-4 shows the board configurations on each NE of the pure packet network, on which the following base station services are transmitted:
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
2G base station services (transmitted in CES mode) 3G base station services (transmitted in ETH PWE3 or ATM/IMA/CES E1 mode)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
61
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
6 Networking and Application Scenarios
Figure 6-3 Pure packet network
FE
NE 5
ATM/IMA E 1
FE GE GE
NE 2 NE 3
NE 1 GE
TDM E1
NE 4
FE
GE
TDM E 1
Nod e B
BTS
Figure 6-4 Board configurations on each NE of the pure packet network NE 5 PCXGB NE6 EF8F
FE
MD1 NE 2
A TM/IMA E1 PCXGB
PCXGB
NE6 EM 6F NE 1 P CXGB NE6 MD1 E1
FE
NE 3 PCXGB
PCXGB FE NE 4 PCXGB
PCXGB
NE6 EM 6F PCXGB GE
FE
ISU2 MD1 E1
Node B
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS
62
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
6 Networking and Application Scenarios
6.4 Typical Application of TDM Networking This section describes the typical application of time division multiplex (TDM) networking. Figure 6-5 shows a TDM network, and Figure 6-6 shows the board configurations on each NE of the TDM network, on which the following base station services are transmitted:
2G base station services (transmitted in E1/T1 mode)
Figure 6-5 TDM network
TDM E1
NE1
TDM E1
TDM E1
TDM E 1 NE4
NE 2 NE 3 TDM E1
BTS
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
63
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
6 Networking and Application Scenarios
Figure 6-6 Board configurations on each NE of the TDM network NE1 PCXLG
PCXLG
NE6 SP3D
E1 NE2
E1
PCXLG
NE4
PCXLG
PCXLG
NE6
PCXLG
NE6 SP3D
SP3D
E1
E1 NE3 PCXLG
PCXLG
NE6 SP3D
E1 BTS
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
64
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
7 Security Management
7
Security Management
7.1 Authentication Management For security concerns, only an authenticated can to an NE.
NE management: You can successfully to an NE only after entering the correct name and . NE switching: One client allows only one to operate the NE at a time. For this reason, if multiple NE s to an NE, the NE s need to be switched to ensure that the configuration data is unique. Forcibly logging other s out of the NE: To avoid errors owing to simultaneous configuration by multiple s, or to prevent other s from illegally logging in to the NE, one can forcibly log a lower-level out from the NE. NE locking: After the locking function is enabled, a whose level is lower than that of the current is not allowed to to the NE. NE configuration locking: You can lock the function of configuring certain functional modules on an NE to prevent other s from configuring the modules. You can query s that are logged in to the NE.
7.2 Authorization Management The authorization management allows different authorities for different s when they operate an NE. This effectively protects the NE against inappropriate operations.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Management of NE s − Five authority levels are available in an ascending order: monitoring level, operation level, maintenance level, system level, and debugging level. − Based on the network management system, NE s are classified into LCT NE s, EMS NE s, CMD NE s, and general NE s. − You can create a , assign an authority level for the , and specify the flag. − You can change a name, a , an authority level, and a flag. − You can delete a . Management of NE groups:
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
65
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description −
−
7 Security Management
By default, five groups are available with authorities in an ascending order: monitor group, operator group, maintenance personnel group, group, and super group. You can change the group to which a belongs.
7.3 Network Security Management The security of transmitting data between the NMS and NEs, and in the network, is the precondition for the NMS to manage the NEs. Communication between the NMS and NEs can be implemented based on Access Control List (ACL), Secure Sockets Layer (SSL), or Remote Authentication Dial-in Service (RADIUS) protocol.
ACL Protocol The ACL rules are configured to filter the received IP packets. This controls the data traffic on the network and protects against malicious attacks. You can set basic ACL rules or advanced ACL rules, based on the required system security level.
For an NE that requires a low security level, you can configure the basic ACL rules so that the NE checks only the source addresses of received IP packets. For an NE that requires a high security level, you can configure the advanced ACL rules. In this case, the NE checks the source addresses, sink addresses, source ports, sink ports, and protocol types of the received IP packets.
If both the advanced and basic ACL rules are configured, the NE uses only the advanced ACL rules to check the received IP packets. In addition, the ACL rules the following operations:
Queries of the ACL rules Modification of the ACL rules Deletion of the ACL rules
SSL Protocol The SSL protocol is used to protect the integrity and security of data.
RADIUS Protocol RADIUS provides a complete network security solution. After the RADIUS server verifies that the name and of a are valid, the server allows a certain authority for the , and provides services to the . The RADIUS server of the carrier manages all the s and attributes of the OptiX OSN 550. To to the OptiX OSN 550, you must apply for a to the carrier. When you try to to the OptiX OSN 550, the RADIUS server verifies the name and that you have entered. If the verification fails, a error is reported. The OptiX OSN 550 s the shielding function when being connected to the network port management device. That is, when being connected to the network port on an OptiX
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
66
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
7 Security Management
OSN 550, the network port management device manages only the connected OptiX OSN 550, and cannot access the other devices that are connected to the OptiX OSN 550 through the ECCs. With this function, even if an OptiX OSN 550 NE in the insecure domain is accessed illegally, the NEs that are connected to the OptiX OSN 550 will not be illegally operated.
7.4 System Security Management The system provides necessary security policies that are executed forcibly.
Querying and setting the Warning Screen information of an NE Querying and setting the Warning Screen switch of an NE to determine whether to report an alarm after a logs in to the NE Querying and setting the earliest expire time and the latest expire time of a Checking whether a is unique on an NE
7.5 Log Management Log management involves system security log management and Syslog management.
System Security Log Management The system security log of an NE records all operations and operation results on the NE. By querying the system security log, the can trace and check operations of s.
You can query the system security log of an NE. You can forward the system security log to the Syslog server.
Syslog Management The Syslog service is used for the security management of NEs. Different information is transmitted to the Syslog server in a format compliant with the Syslog protocol so that the maintenance personnel can monitor NEs easily. The OptiX OSN 550 s the following functions related to the Syslog protocol:
Enabling and disabling the Syslog protocol. Setting the transmission mode of the Syslog protocol to UDP (by default) or T . Adding or deleting Syslog servers. Configuration of multiple Syslog servers and transmission of logs to multiple servers at the same time. Reporting relevant alarms when the Syslog server fails to communicate with NEs.
Figure 7-1 illustrates the log transmission of the the Syslog protocol on a network. To ensure the security of system logs, at least two Syslog servers are required on a transmission network. NEs communicate with Syslog servers by running the IP protocol. NEs communicates with each other in many modes, such as ECC and IP over DCC.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
67
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
7 Security Management
Figure 7-1 Log transmission of the Syslog protocol NE B
NMS
NE C (clie nt)
NE A (client) ECC/ IP OVER DCC T/IP real tim e security log
Syslog Serve r A
Syslo g Server B
NE D
A Syslog server is a work station or server that stores the system logs of all NEs on a network. Forwarding gateway NEs receive system logs from other NEs, and then forward these system logs to Syslog servers. For example, NE A and NE C in Figure 7-1.
When NEs communicate in IP mode, each NE can directly communicate with two different Syslog servers by running the IP protocol. Hence, you need to configure the IP addresses and port numbers of the Syslog servers on an NE. The NE transmits the system log to two Syslog servers by using the automatic routing function of the IP protocol. You need not configure any forwarding gateway NE. When NEs communicate in ECC mode, the NEs that are not directly connected to Syslog servers cannot communicate with Syslog servers. The logs of these NEs need to be transmitted to the gateway NEs that can communicate with Syslog servers directly. Then, the gateway NEs forward the logs to Syslog servers. Therefore, you need to configure forwarding gateway NEs. For example, you can configure NE A as the forwarding NE of NE D.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
68
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
8
8 Operation and Maintenance
Operation and Maintenance
8.1 DCN Reliable network management ensures proper running of a network, and therefore transmission of network management data becomes very critical. The data communication network (DCN) is a network management data communication channel, with which s can remotely manage and maintain NEs. Table 8-1 lists the DCN solutions that the OptiX OSN 550 s. Table 8-1 DCN solutions that the OptiX OSN 550 s Item
Inband DCN
Outband DCN
Purpose and Benefit
NM information is transmitted on the service channels provided by managed equipment. Therefore, no other equipment and DCN are required. This reduces operating cost.
NM information is transmitted on non-service channels.
Feature
Networking Technology
Flexible networking: NM information is encapsulated into Ethernet frames and carries a fixed VLAN ID to get separated from the service data. The NM information is transmitted with services on service channels. Configurable VLAN priorities for inband DCN packets
Identifying FE/GE service ports with VLAN IDs
High reliability: Outband DCN uses dedicated maintenance channels. Therefore, the NMC can construct a DCN network with managed equipment in various ways, such as E1 private lines and Ethernet; in addition, you can obtain NM information in time even when faults occur on service channels.
Application Scenario
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Packet network
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HW ECC IP OSI
TDM network
69
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
8 Operation and Maintenance
Item
Inband DCN
Outband DCN
Resource Allocation Mode
N/A
Channel type: D1-D3 and D4-D12 Running mode: Mode 1: 32 channels of D1-D3 bytes Mode 2: 12 channels of D1-D3 bytes or 6 channels of D4-D12 bytes
8.2 Equipment Maintenance To ensure the proper running of a network, routine maintenance and troubleshooting for equipment are a must. The OptiX OSN 550 is of strong maintainability. Table 8-2 lists the maintenance functions that the OptiX OSN 550 s. Table 8-2 Maintenance functions that the OptiX OSN 550 s Applicati Function on Scenario Routine maintenan ce
Alarm and performance management
Description
RMON
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Provides audible and visual alarms in case of emergency, assisting the network in taking prompt measures. Provides running status indicators and alarm indicators on each board, assisting the in locating and handling faults promptly. Provides the alarm input and output function, therefore facilitating the collection of equipment alarms. Dynamically monitors the equipment operation and alarm status of all stations on the NMS. Detects alarms and performance of a standby system control board. As for the 15-minute monitoring period, the equipment can store sixteen 15-minute history performance, that is, four hours of 15-minute history performance. As for the 24-hour monitoring period, the equipment can store 6x24-hour history performance, that is, six days of history performance. Monitors the data on a transmission network located in different network segments. RMON is a supplement to simple Ethernet performance management means, and can be used for a wide range of networks.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
70
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Applicati Function on Scenario Upgrade and loading of board software and NE software
8 Operation and Maintenance
Description
Voltage check Automatic search for optical fibers Queries of port impedance Queries of information about optical modules Monitoring the outdoor cabinet Power consumption control
OAM
ETH OAM
s the fiber auto-discovery function on the NMS.
s the query of port impedance on the NMS.
ATM OAM
MPLS OAM
One-click data collection
Loopback
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Measures the input voltage and detects the undervoltage and overvoltage states.
Fault locating
s in-service upgrades and loading of board software and NE software. s remote loading of board software and field programmable gate array (FPGA). s error-loading-proof and resumable loading.
Allows information about optical modules to be queried on the NMS, including the single-mode/multi-mode, rate level, vendor, production date, and wavelength. Monitors the outdoor cabinet by means of the monitoring port on the AUX board. Computes and reports the system power consumption. Monitors the total system power consumption, and reports alarms if the total system power consumption is about to exceed or is higher than the rated NE power consumption. Detects and monitors the connectivity and performance of service trails by using outband packets. During the process, services are not affected. Complies with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah. Detects and locates ATM faults, and monitors ATM performance. Detects and locates faults within an MPLS network, and works with MPLS APS to protect services. MPLS OAM mechanisms include tunnel OAM and PW OAM. Tunnel OAM operates at the tunnel layer, and PW OAM operates at the PW layer. Provides the one-click data collection function to collect fault data, which shortens data collection time before service recovery. s can collect fault data selectively, and can stop a collection process manually. Service boards inloops and outloops on ports, which facilitates fault locating.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
71
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Applicati Function on Scenario Remote maintenance PRBS
8 Operation and Maintenance
Description
Warm/Cold resets Hot swap
If the equipment becomes faulty, the maintenance personnel can use a public telephone network to remotely maintain the OptiX OSN 550 systems. An NE enabled with the PRBS function can be used as a simple instrument that transmits and receives unframed services in order to analyze whether service paths are faulty. An NE enabled with the PRBS function can be used to analyze itself or the entire network. The PRBS function is a substitute for a test instrument during a deployment or fault localization. The system control, switching, and timing boards and service boards warm and cold resets. Warm resets do not affect services. The system control, switching, and timing boards, service boards, fan boards, and power supply boards hot swap. Pluggable optical modules can be hot-swapped. Service cables and auxiliary cables can be hot-swapped.
8.3 Upgrade Methods If the current version of the OptiX OSN 550 cannot meet customer requirements, upgrade the equipment to a higher version. The available upgrade methods are package loading, package diffusion, and hot patch loading. Table 8-3 lists the upgrade methods available for the OptiX OSN 550.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
72
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
8 Operation and Maintenance
Table 8-3 Upgrade methods available for the OptiX OSN 550 Upgrade Method
Package Loading
Package Diffusion
Hot Patch Loading
Definition
With a software package description file, the software package functions as a logical package of the required software. This logical package can be ed to upgrade the entire NE.
With a software package description file, the software package functions as a logical package of the required software. The logical package is diffused and almost synchronously loaded to all NEs on a network. This upgrade method is more efficient.
During hot patch loading, new software codes substitute for running software codes, which do not interrupt services but rectify a software defect or implement a new requirement. These new software codes are codes in a hot patch.
Application Scenario
Characteristic
One NE needs to be upgraded. The system control board and other boards must package loading. There is a CF card on the system control board. All the boards on an NE can be upgraded on a unified GUI. There is no need to care about which board to upgrade or which files to update.
Applicable Version
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Versions of V100R003C00 and later this upgrade method.
More than one NE needs to be upgraded. The system control board and other boards must package loading. There is a CF card on the system control board. All the boards on an NE can be upgraded on a unified GUI. There is no need to care about which board to upgrade or which files to update. The software package is diffused. Network load and network bandwidth are both shared.
Versions of V100R003C00 and later this upgrade method.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Services are not interrupted during the upgrade.
Services are not interrupted during the upgrade. Hot patches decrease the number of product versions, therefore avoiding frequent version upgrades. Hot patches can be loaded remotely. Version rollback is ed after a hot patch is loaded, reducing upgrade risks.
Versions of V100R005C01 and later this upgrade method.
73
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
8 Operation and Maintenance
8.4 License Control Packet features are available only if the appropriate license files have been purchased.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
74
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
9
Technical Specifications
9.1 General Specifications This section describes the chassis dimensions, weight, power consumption, heat consumption, power supply performance, electromagnetic compatibility, and reliability. Table 9-1 lists the general specifications of the OptiX OSN 550. Table 9-1 General specifications of the OptiX OSN 550 Item
Description
Dimensions 88 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (H x W x D) Weight Power Consumpti on
10 kg
Maximum power consumption: 240 W Typical power consumption: 142 W Board configuration for typical power consumption: 2 x PCXLX + 3 x EM6F + 1 x MD1 + FAN + 2 x PIU, as shown in the figure.
SL OTT SLO 10 10 S LOT (PIU) (PI U) SLOT 11 11 SL OTT (FAN) SLO (FAN) 99 (PI (PIU) U)
Heat Consumpti on Power Supply Performanc e
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
SL SLOT OT 7 (C7ST/CSH (CSH)) SL OT 5 (EX T)
SLOT SL OT88 (CSH) (C ST/CSH) SL OT 6 (EXT)
SLSLOT OT 3 (EX 3 T) (MD1
SL OT (E XT) SLOT 4 4(EM6F)
SLOT 1 (EXT ) SLOT 1 (MD1)
SLTOT (EXT ) SLO 2 2(EF6F)
Maximum heat consumption: 819 BTU/h Typical heat consumption: 485 BTU/h
DC power supply − Rated voltage: -48 V or -60 V − Voltage range: -38.4 V to -72 V AC power supply − Rated voltage: 110/220 V − Voltage range: 100 V to 240 V
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
75
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Item
9 Technical Specifications
Description
Fuse Capacity
DC power supply: 20A AC power supply: 5A
Electromag Complies with EMC Class A. netic Compatibili ty Reliability
System availability: 0.9999965 Average annual repair rate: < 1.5% Mean time to repair (MTTR): 1 hour Mean time between failures (MT BF): 33.08 years
9.2 Packet Performance Indicators This section describes the equipment's packet performance indicators. Table 9-2 lists the OptiX OSN 550's packet performance indicators. Table 9-2 OptiX OSN 550 packet functions and features Item
Description
MPLS suppo rt capab ility
The packet switching unit of the PCX board works with a service board to implement MPLS functions.
PWE3 suppo rt capab ility
Setup mode: static LSPs Protection: 1:1 MPLS tunnel APS OAM: − s MPLS OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.1711. − s LSP ping and LSP traceroute functions. The packet switching unit of the PCX board works with a service board to implement PWE3 functions. Service categories − TDM PWE3 (CES) services − ATM PWE3 services − ETH PWE3 services Setup mode: static PWs Protection: 1:1 PW APS OAM: − the ping and traceroute commands of PWs, the virtual circuit connectivity verification (VCCV) command. − s PW OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.1711.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
s MS-PWs.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
76
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
Item
Description
Servic e
Service Type
Description
Etherne s Native ETH t and ETH PWE3 service services. Format of Ethernet data frames: IEEE 802.3 and Ethernet II Jumbo frames MTU length: 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes (1620 bytes, by default) MPLS function VLAN function . The VLAN IDs range from 1 to 4094.
Maximum Re ceiving Capability
Description
Connector
FE (electrical port): 36
10/100BASETX
RJ-45
FE (optical port): 48
100Base-FX
LC
LC
10GE (optical port) PCXLX/ PCXX: 2
QinQ GE (optical Size of a MAC port) address table: 16 KB PCXLG/ (including static PCXGA/ entries) PCXGB: 14 GE (electrical port): 12
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Service Port
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10GBASELR (LAN) 10GBASELW (WAN) 10GBASEER (LAN) 10GBASEEW (WAN) 10GBASEZR (LAN) 10GBASEZW (WAN)
1000Base-L LC X 1000Base-V X 1000Base-Z X
10/100/1000B RJ-45 ASE-TX
77
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Item
Description CES service
ATM/I MA service
Protec tion
9 Technical Specifications
MPLS APS
Service type: 192xE1 point-to-point service Encapsulation types:
75/120-ohm smart E1 port
Anea 96
75/120-ohm smart E1 port
Anea 96
CESoPSN SAToP Compression of idle timeslots: ed (only for CESoPSN encapsulation) Jitter compensation buffering time: 375 us to 16000 us Packet loading time: 125 us to 5000 us CES ACR: ed Retiming: ed Number of ATM connections: 256 ATM traffic management ATM encapsulation format N-to-one VPC N-to-one VCC One-to-one VPC One-to-one VCC Maximum number of concatenated ATM cells: 31 ATM OAM: F4 (VP layer) and F5 (VC layer) Maximum number of IMA groups: 32 Maximum number of in an IMA group: 16
192xE1
Maximum number of protection groups: 64 Switching duration not more than 100 ms
NOTE MP LS AP S and P W AP S share 64 protection group resources.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
78
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Item
9 Technical Specifications
Description
PW APS
Maximum number of protection groups: 64 Switching duration not more than 100 ms
NOTE MP LS AP S and P W AP S share 64 protection group resources.
MSTP
LPT LAG
Maint enanc e
MPLS OAM
Point-point and point-multipoint LPT
Switching duration not more than 5s
Intra-board LAG and inter-board LAG A maximum of 16 LAGs. Each LAG has a maximum of 8 .
Switching duration not more than 500 ms
T unnel OAM and PW OAM Maximum number of MPLS OAM resources: 128
NOTE MP LS OAM and P W OAM share 128 OAM resources.
ETH-O AM
ATM OAM
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
s the MSTP protocol that generates only the CIST . The MSTP protocol provides functions equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.
s the following IEEE 802.1ag OAM functions: − Management of OAM maintenance points − Continuity check (CC) − Loopback (LB) − Link trace (LT) s the following IEEE 802.3ah OAM functions: − OAM auto-discovery − Link performance monitoring − Fault detection − Loopback at the remote end − Self-loop detection and self-looped port blocking Number of MD/MA/MEP: 64 Maximum number of ATM connections: 256
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
79
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Item
9 Technical Specifications
Description RMON
s port-level and service-level RMON functions, in compliance with RFC 2819. s four RMON management groups: Ethernet statistics group, Ethernet history group, Ethernet alarm group, and Ethernet history control group. Port level: Basic Ethernet performance Extended Ethernet performance Service level: L2VPN T unnel PW
Synch roniza tion
Synchr onous Etherne t clock
CES ACR
Other s
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
QoS
Synchronous Ethernet that complies with ITU-T G.8261 and ITU-T G.8262. Port receiving/transmitting synchronous Ethernet clocks: FE/GE/10GE Input/Output of SSM packets Clock frequency stability (hold-over mode): less than 50 ppb Maximum number of CES ACR clocks: 4 The clock performance complies with the ITU-T G.823 Traffic template. Tributary retiming.
DiffServ s simple traffic classification by specifying PHB service classes for service flows based on their QoS information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DS values, or MPLS EXP values) carried by the packets. Complex traffic classification s traffic classification based on C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DS values carried by packets. CAR Provides the CAR function for the traffic flows at ports. Shaping s traffic shaping for a specific port, prioritized queue, or traffic flow. Queue scheduling policies − SP − WRR − SP+WRR
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
80
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
9.3 TDM Performance Indicators This section describes the OptiX OSN 550's TDM performance indicators. Table 9-3 lists the OptiX OSN 550's TDM performance indicators. Table 9-3 OptiX OSN 550 TDM functions and features Item
Description
Service
Service Type
SDH service
PDH service
Protection
SN
MSP Ring
Linear MSP
Maintena nce Synchroni zation
PRBS
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Re ceiving Capability
Service Port Description
Connector
26xSTM-1
S-1.1, L-1.1 and L-1.2 optical ports
LC
14xSTM-4
S-4.1, L-4.1 and L-4.2 optical ports
LC
14xSTM-16
S-16.1, L-16.1 and L-16.2 optical ports
LC
252xE1/T1
E1(75/120-ohm )/T1(100-ohm) electrical port
Anea 96
SN at the VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 levels Maximum number of protection groups: 1032 Switching duration not more than 50 ms MSP Ring at the STM-1, ST M-4 and STM-16 levels Maximum number of protection groups: 13 Switching duration not more than 50 ms Linear MSP at the STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16 levels Maximum number of 1+1/1:1 Linear MSP protection groups: 13 Switching duration not more than 50 ms
ed
Physical layer clocks, including line clocks, tributary clocks, and two-input and two-output external clocks. The port impedance is 120 ohms or 75 ohms (a converter can be used to provide a 75-ohm clock port). Non-synchronization status message (SSM), standard SSM, and extended SSM protocols Tributary retiming Tracing mode, hold-over mode, and free-run mode
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
81
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
9.4 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board This section describes the power consumption and weight of each board ed by the equipment. Table 9-4 lists the power consumption and weight of the boards ed by the OptiX OSN 550. Table 9-4 Power consumption and weight of boards ed by the OptiX OSN 550 Board
Power Consumption (W)
Weight (kg)
PCX
45
0.80
MD1
12.2
0.50
EM6T
10.4
0.37
EM6F
11.3
0.40
EF8F
23
0.55
SL1D
4.12
0.30
SL4D
4.7
0.30
SL1Q
4.3
0.30
SP3D
11.5
0.85
PL3T
5.0
0.30
AUX
2.5
0.30
PIU
0.5
0.12
APIU
Room temperature (25℃):20.0 High temperature (55℃):30.0
1.93
Room temperature (25℃):12.0 High temperature (55℃):29.6
0.30
FAN
9.5 Optical Port Specifications This section describes the specifications of OptiX OSN 550's STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 optical ports and GE optical ports.
Specifications of STM-1 Optical Ports Table 9-5 lists the specifications of OptiX OSN 550's ST M-1 optical ports.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
82
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
Table 9-5 Specifications of OptiX OSN 550's STM-1 optical ports Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Optical port type
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
Transmission distance (km)
2 to 15
20 to 40
60 to 80
Operating wavelength range (nm)
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
Optical fiber type
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Launched optical power range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
-28
-34
-34
Minimum overload (dBm)
-8
-10
0
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.2
10
10
NOTE Format of optical port type is defined as follows: transmission distance-signal rate.fiber type Explanation for optical port type "S-1.1" is as follows: "S" represents short distance; the first digit "1" represents STM-1 signals; the second digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm). Explanation for optical port type "L-1.1" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first digit "1" represents STM-1 signals; the second digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm). Explanation for optical port type "L-1.2" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first digit "1" represents STM-1 signals; the second digit "2" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1550 nm)..
Specifications of STM-4 Optical Ports Table 9-6 lists the specifications of OptiX OSN 550's ST M-4 optical ports. Table 9-6 Specifications of OptiX OSN 550's STM-4 optical ports Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
622080 kbit/s
Optical port type
S-4.1
L-4.1
L-4.2
Transmission distance (km)
2 to 15
20 to 40
50 to 80
Operating wavelength range (nm)
1274 to 1356
1280 to 1335
1480 to 1580
Optical fiber type
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
83
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
Item
Value
Launched optical power range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-3 to +2
-3 to +2
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
-28
-28
-28
Minimum overload (dBm)
-8
-8
-8
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.2
10
10
NOTE Format of optical port type is defined as follows: transmission distance-signal rate.fiber type Explanation for optical port type "S-4.1" is as follows: "S" represents short distance; the first digit "4" represents STM-4 signals; the second digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm). Explanation for optical port type "L-4.1" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first digit "4" represents STM-4 signals; the second digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm). Explanation for optical port type "L-4.2" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first digit "4" represents STM-4 signals; the second digit "2" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1550 nm).
Specifications of STM-16 Optical Ports Table 9-7 lists the specifications of OptiX OSN 550's ST M-16 optical ports. Table 9-7 Specifications of OptiX OSN 550's STM-16 optical ports Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
2488320 kbit/s
Optical port type
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Transmission distance (km)
2 to 15
20 to 40
50 to 80
Operating wavelength range (nm)
1274 to 1356
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Optical fiber type
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Launched optical power range (dBm)
-5 to 0
-2 to +3
-2 to +3
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
-18
-27
-28
Minimum overload (dBm)
0
-9
-9
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.2
8.2
8.2
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
84
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Item
9 Technical Specifications
Value
NOTE Format of optical port type is defined as follows: transmission distance-signal rate.fiber type Explanation for optical port type "S-16.1" is as follows: "S" represents short distance; the first two digits "16" represent STM-16 signals; the third digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm). Explanation for optical port type "L-16.1" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first two digits "16" represent STM-16 signals; the third digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm). Explanation for optical port type "L-16.2" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first two digits "16" represent STM-16 signals; the third digit "2" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1550 nm).
Specifications of FE Optical Ports Table 9-8 lists the main specifications of FE optical ports of the OptiX OSN 550. Table 9-8 Specifications of FE optical ports of the OptiX OSN 550 Item
Value
Optical port type
100Base-FX
100Base-FX
100Base-FX
Optical fiber type
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Transmission distance (km)
15
40
80
Operating wavelength (nm)
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
Mean launched power (dBm)
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm)
-28
-34
-34
Minimum overload (dBm)
-8
-10
-10
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.2
10
10
Specifications of GE Optical Ports Table 9-9 lists the main specifications of GE optical ports of the OptiX OSN 550.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
85
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
Table 9-9 Specifications of OptiX OSN 550's GE optical ports Item
Value
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)
1000
Optical port type
1000BASE-LX
1000BASE-VX
1000BASE-ZX
Optical fiber type
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Transmission distance (km)
10
40
80
Operating wavelength (nm)
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Mean launched power (dBm)
-9 to -3
-5 to 0
-2 to +5
Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm)
-20
-23
-23
Minimum overload (dBm)
-3
-3
-3
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
9
9
9
With different SFP modules, the equipment provides GE optical ports with different types and transmission distances.
Specifications of 10GE Optical Ports Table 9-10 lists the main specifications of 10GE optical ports of the OptiX OSN 550. Table 9-10 Specifications of 10GE optical ports of the OptiX OSN 550 Item
Performance
Optical port type
10GBASE-LR (LAN) 10GBASE-LW (WAN)
10GBASE-ER (LAN) 10GBASE-EW (WAN)
10GBASE-ZR (LAN) 10GBASE-ZW (WAN)
Optical fiber type
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Transmission distance (km)
10
40
80
Operating wavelength (nm)
1260 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
86
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
Item
Performance
Mean launched power (dBm)
-6 to -1
-1 to +2
0 to 4
Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm)
-11
-15
-24
Minimum overload (dBm)
0.5
-1
-7
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
6
8.2
9
9.6 Electrical Port Specifications This section describes the equipment's electrical port specifications. The equipment's electrical ports include PDH electrical ports, CES/ATM/IMA service electrical ports, and Ethernet electrical ports.
E1/T1 Electrical Ports Table 9-11 lists the specifications of OptiX OSN 550's E1/T1 electrical ports. Table 9-11 Specifications of OptiX OSN 550's E1/T1 electrical ports Electrical Port Type
1544 kbit/s
2048 kbit/s
Code pattern
B8ZS code, AMI code
HDB3 code
Waveform at the output port
Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Signal bit rate at the output port Allowed attenuation at the input port Permitted frequency deviation at the input port
Complies with ITU-T G.823.
Input jitter tolerance
Complies with ITU-T G.824.
Complies with ITU-T G.823.
Anti-interference capability at the input port
-
Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Reflection attenuation at the input and output ports
-
Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Output jitter
Complies with ITU-T G.823 and G.824.
Mapping jitter
Complies with ITU-T G.783.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
87
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
Electrical Port Type
1544 kbit/s
2048 kbit/s
Jitter transfer function
-
Complies with ITU-T G.742.
Port type
Anea 96
Combined jitter
E3/T3 Electrical Ports Table 9-12 lists the specifications of OptiX OSN 550's E3/T3 electrical ports. Table 9-12 Specifications of OptiX OSN 550's E3/T3 electrical ports Parameter
Nominal Value
Bit rate
34368 kbit/s
Number of ports
3xE3/T3
Code pattern
HDB3
B3ZS
Connector
SMB
SMB
Impedance (ohm)
75
75
Signal bit rate at the output port
Complies with ITU-T G.703.
44736 kbit/s
Permitted frequency deviation at the input port Allowed attenuation at the input port Input jitter tolerance
Complies with ITU-T G.823.
Complies with ITU-T G.824.
CES/ATM/IMA Service Electrical Ports Table 9-13 lists the specifications of OptiX OSN 550's CES/ATM/IMA service electrical ports. Table 9-13 Specifications of OptiX OSN 550's CES/ATM/IMA service electrical ports Item
Performance
Standard compliance
ITU-T G.703/G.823
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)
2048
Code pattern
HDB3
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
88
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
Item
Performance
Impedance (ohm)
75
120
Pair in each direction
One coaxial pair
One symmetrical pair
Port type
Anea 96
Ethernet Electrical Ports Table 9-14 lists the specifications of OptiX OSN 550's Ethernet electrical ports. Table 9-14 Specifications of OptiX OSN 550's Ethernet electrical ports Service Port
Port Rate
Code Pattern
Port Type
GE/FE electrical port
10BASE-T
Manchester coding signals
RJ-45
GE/FE electrical port
100BASE-TX
MLT-3 coding signal
GE electrical port
1000BASE-T
4D-PAM5 coding signal
9.7 Auxiliary Port Specifications This section describes the specifications of auxiliary ports including synchronous data ports, asynchronous data ports, orderwire ports, and external clock.
External Clock Table 9-15 Specifications of external clock ports ed by the OptiX OSN 550 Item
Performance
External synchronous source
2048 kbit/s (in compliance with ITU-T G.703) or 2048 kHz (in compliance with ITU-T G.703)
Frequency accuracy
Complies with ITU-T G.813
Pull-in or pull-out range Noise generation Noise toleration Noise transfer Transient response and holdover performance
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
89
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
Item
Performance
Synchronization clock transfer accuracy
< 50 ppb
Synchronous Data Ports Table 9-16 Specifications of synchronous data ports ed by the OptiX OSN 550 Item
Performance
Transmission channel
Byte F1 in the SDH overhead
Bit rate (kbit/s)
64
Port type
Codirectional
Characteristics of ports
Complies with ITU-T G.703
Asynchronous Data Ports Table 9-17 Specifications of asynchronous data ports ed by the OptiX OSN 550 Item
Performance
Transmission channel
-defined byte in the SDH overhead
Bit rate (kbit/s)
≤ 19.2
Characteristics of ports
Complies with RS-232
Orderwire Ports Table 9-18 Specifications of orderwire ports ed by the OptiX OSN 550 Item
Performance
Transmission channel
Bytes E1 and E2 in the SDH overhead
Orderwire type
Addressing call
Pair in each direction
One symmetrical pair
Impedance (ohm)
600
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
90
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
Outdoor cabinet monitoring ports Table 9-19 Outdoor cabinet monitoring ports ed by the OptiX OSN 550 Item
Performance
Characteristics of ports
Complies with RS-485
9.8 Optical Module Specifications This section describes the BOMs of optical modules, as well as corresponding information and port types. Table 9-20 provides the specifications for small form-factor pluggable/enhanced small form-factor pluggable (SFP/eSFP) optical modules on the OptiX OSN 550. Table 9-20 SFP/eSFP Optical Modules That the OptiX OSN 550 s Part Number
Name
Specification
Applicable Board
34060473
1.25 Gbit/s eSFP optical module
Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, -9 dBm, -3 dBm, -20 dBm, LC, SM, 10 km
EM6F/PCXLG/PCX GA/PCXGB
34060298
1.25 Gbit/s eSFP optical module
Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 EM6F/PCXLG/PCX nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, -5 dBm, 0 dBm, GA/PCXGB -23 dBm, LC, SM, 40 km
34060360
1.25 Gbit/s eSFP optical module
Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1550 EM6F/PCXLG/PCX nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, -2 dBm, 5 dBm, GA/PCXGB -23 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km
34060470
1.25 Gbit/s single-fiber bidirectional eSFP optical module
Optical transceiver, SFP, Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1490 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, -9 dBm, -3 dBm, -19.5 dBm, LC, SM, 10 km
EM6F/PCXLG/PCX GA/PCXGB
34060475
1.25 Gbit/s single-fiber bidirectional eSFP optical module
Optical transceiver, SFP,Tx1490 nm/Rx1310 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, -3 dBm, -9 dBm, -19.5 dBm, LC, SM,10 km
EM6F/PCXLG/PCX GA/PCXGB
34060276
155 Mbit/s eSFP optical module
Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, STM-1, -15 dBm, -8 dBm, -31 dBm, LC, SM, 15 km
EF8F
Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, STM-1, -5 dBm, 0 dBm, -37 dBm, LC, SM, 40 km
EF8F
34060281
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
91
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Part Number
Name
9 Technical Specifications
Specification
Applicable Board
34060282
Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1550 nm, STM-1, -5 dBm, 0 dBm, -37 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km
EF8F
34060307
Optical transceiver, eSFP(industry), 1310 nm, ST M-1, -15 dBm, -8 dBm, -31 dBm, LC, SM, 15 km
EF8F
34060308
Optical transceiver, eSFP(industry), 1310 nm, ST M-1, -5 dBm, 0 dBm, -37 dBm, LC, SM, 40 km
EF8F
34060309
Optical transceiver, eSFP(industry), 1550 nm, ST M-1, -5 dBm, 0 dBm, -37 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km
EF8F
34060363
Optical transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1550 nm, ST M-1, -15 dBm, -8 dBm, -32 dBm, LC/PC, SM, 15 km
EF8F
34060364
Optical transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1550 nm/Rx 1310 nm, ST M-1, -15 dBm, -8 dBm, -32 dBm, LC/PC, SM, 15 km
EF8F
34060328
Optical transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1550 nm, ST M-1, -5 dBm, 0 dBm, -32 dBm, LC/PC, SM, 40 km
EF8F
34060329
Optical transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1550 nm/Rx 1310 nm, ST M-1, -5 dBm, 0 dBm, -32 dBm, LC/PC, SM, 40 km
EF8F
Table 9-21 provides the specifications for 10-Gigabit small form-factor pluggable transceiver (XFP) optical modules on the OptiX OSN 550. Table 9-21 XFP Optical Modules That the OptiX OSN 550 s Part Number
Name
34060313
9.95 Gbit/s to Optical transceiver, XFP, 1310 10.71 Gbit/s XFP nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 10.71 optical module Gbit/s, -6 dBm, -1 dBm, -14.4 dBm, LC, SM, 10 km
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Specification
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Applicable Board PCXLX/PCXX
92
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
Part Number
Name
Specification
Applicable Board
34060322
9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s XFP optical module
Optical transceiver, XFP, 1550 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -15 dBm, LC, SM, 40 km
PCXLX/PCXX
34060361
9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s XFP optical module
Optical transceiver, XFP, 1550 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 4 dBm, -24 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km
PCXLX/PCXX
9.9 Indicator Status Explanation This section describes the definitions of indicators ed by the OptiX OSN 550. There is no indicator on the OptiX OSN 550 chassis.
Table 9-22 lists the definitions of indicators ed by the boards on the OptiX OSN 550. Table 9-22 Definitions of indicators ed by the boards on the OptiX OSN 550 Indicator
State
Meaning
Applicable Board
ST AT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
PCX (PCXLX/PCXX/PC XLG/PCXGA/PCX GB)/MD1/EM6T/E M6F/EF8F/SL1D/S L4D/SL1Q/SP3D/P L3T/AUX
PROG
The board is not working or created. There is no power supplied to the system.
Blinks on (green) and off at 100 ms intervals
When the board is being powered on or reset, the software is being loaded.
Blinks on (green) and off at 300 ms intervals
When the board is being powered on or reset, the board software is in BIOS boot state.
PCX (PCXLX/PCXX/PC XLG/PCXGA/PCX GB)/EM6T/EM6F
Blinks on (red) and When the board is being off at 100 ms powered on or reset, the intervals BOOT ROM self-check fails. On (green)
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
The upper layer software is being initialized.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
93
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Indicator
9 Technical Specifications
State
Meaning
On (red)
SYNC
SRV
The software is running normally.
On (green)
The clock is normal.
On (red)
The clock source is lost or is switched.
On (green)
The system/service is working properly.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the system/services.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm occurs in the system/services.
ACT
On (green)
Off
LINK1/LIN K2
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
When the board is being powered or reset, the memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails. When the board is running, the logic file or upper layer software is lost. The pluggable storage card is faulty.
Off
Off
Applicable Board
PCX (PCXLX/PCXX/PC XLG/PCXGA/PCX GB) PCX (PCXLX/PCXX/PC XLG/PCXGA/PCX GB)/MD1/EM6T/E M6F/EF8F/SL1D/S L4D/SP3D/AUX
For the PCX board, there is no power supplied to the system. The board is standby under 1+1 protection. For the service board, no service is configured. The board is active under 1+1 protection. The board is already activated under no protection.
PCX (PCXLX/PCXX/PC XLG/PCXGA/PCX GB)
The board is standby under 1+1 protection. The board is not activated under no protection.
On (green)
The GE port is connected correctly, and is not receiving or transmitting data.
Blinking (yellow)
The GE port is receiving or transmitting data.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
EM6F
94
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Indicator
LOS/LOS1/ LOS2
L/A
PWR
FAN
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
9 Technical Specifications
State
Meaning
Off
The GE port is connected correctly or is abnormal.
On (red)
The optical port on the board reports the R_LOS alarm.
Blinking (red) three times every second
The optical port on the board receives too strong power.
Blinking (red) one time every second
The optical port on the board receives too weak power.
Blinking (red) three times every second
The optical port on the board reports the MS_RDI alarm.
Off
The optical port on the board is not reporting the R_LOS alarm.
On (green)
The port is physically connected (link up) but is not receiving or transmitting data
Blinking (red) three times every second, 300 ms on and 300 ms off
The port on the board receives too strong power.
Blinking (red) three times every second, 300 ms on and 700 ms off
The port on the board receives too weak power.
Blinking (orange)
The port is normal (link up) and is receiving and transmitting data.
Off
The optical fiber is disconnected from the port or the port is abnormal (link down/LOS).
On (green)
Power is being supplied.
Off
Power is off or power supplies are connected incorrectly.
On (green)
The fan board is working properly.
On (red)
The fan board is faulty.
Off
The fan board is not powered on or is not installed.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Applicable Board
PCX (PCXLX/PCXLG)/S L1D/SL4D
PCX (PCXLX/PCXX/PC XLG/PCXGA/PCX GB)/EF8F
PIU
FAN
95
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
Indicator
State
Meaning
Applicable Board
CRIT /MAJ/ MIN
On (red)
The NE has critical/major/minor alarms.
FAN
9.10 Safety Certification The OptiX OSN 550 has ed many safety certifications. Table 9-23 lists the safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 550 has ed. Table 9-23 Safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 550 has ed Item
Standard
Electromagnetic compatibility
CE certification ET SI EN 301 489-1 ET SI EN 301 489-4 CISPR 22
EN 55022
Surge protection
Safety
Environmental protection
ITU-T K.27 ET SI EN 300 253 CE certification ET SI EN 60215 ET SI EN 60950
IEC 60825 GB 4943
RoHS
9.11 Environmental Specifications The OptiX OSN 550 requires proper environment for storage, transportation, and operation. 9.11.1 Storage Environment This section provides the requirements on the storage environment for the OptiX OSN 550. 9.11.2 Transportation Environment This section provides the requirements on the transportation environment for the OptiX OSN 550. 9.11.3 Operation Environment
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
96
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
This section provides the requirements on the operation environment for the OptiX OSN 550.
9.11.1 Storage Environment This section provides the requirements on the storage environment for the OptiX OSN 550.
Climate Table 9-24 lists the climate requirements for the storage environment. Table 9-24 Climate requirements for the storage environment Item
Range
Altitude
≤ 4000 m
Atmospheric pressure
70-106 kPa
Temperature
-40°C to +70°C
Temperature change rate
≤ 1°C/min
Relative humidity
5% to 100%
Solar radiation
≤ 1120 W/s2
Heat radiation
≤ 600 W/s2
Wind speed
≤ 30 m/s
Waterproofing Requirements Requirements for storing equipment on site: Generally, the equipment must be stored indoors. No water should remain on the floor or leak into the equipment crate. The equipment should be placed away from areas where water leakage is possible (for example, do not place near automatic fire-fighting extinguishing and heating systems. Ensure all the following four conditions if the equipment is stored outdoors:
The crate is intact. Proper rain-proofing measures are taken to prevent water from entering the crate. No water is on the ground where the crate is placed and water is not seeped into the crate. The carton is not exposed to direct sunlight.
Biological Environment
Avoid multiplication of microbes (such as eumycete and mycete). Control and exclude rodents (such as mice).
Air Cleanliness
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive or corrosive dust. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
97
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
Table 9-25 lists the density limitations for mechanically active substances during storage.
Table 9-25 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during storage Mechanical Active Substance
Content
Suspended dust
≤ 5.00 mg/m3
Precipitable dust
≤ 20.0 mg/m ²·h
Sand particles
≤ 300 mg/m 3
Table 9-26 lists the density requirements for chemically active substances.
Table 9-26 Density requirements for chemically active substances during storage Chemically Active Substance
Content
SO2
≤ 0.30 mg/m3
H2 S
≤ 0.10 mg/m3
NO2
≤ 0.50 mg/m3
NH3
≤ 1.00 mg/m3
CL2
≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HCL
≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HF
≤ 0.01 mg/m3
O3
≤ 0.05 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress Table 9-27 lists the limitations for mechanical stress during storage. Table 9-27 Limitations for mechanical stress during storage Item
Sub-Item
Range
Sinusoidal vibration
Displacement
1.5 mm
Acceleration
5 m/s2
Frequency range
2-9 Hz
Static pressure
Static pressure = Product weight x (Maximum number of stacked layers that is specified on the product package - 1) x 5 x 9.8 (N)
Static load
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-200 Hz
98
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Item
9 Technical Specifications
Sub-Item
Range
NOTE Static load is the pressure from the upside that the packaged equipment can tolerate when equipment is stacked in the specified manner.
9.11.2 Transportation Environment This section provides the requirements on the transportation environment for the OptiX OSN 550.
Climate Table 9-28 lists the climate requirements for the transportation environment. Table 9-28 Climate requirements for the transportation environment Item
Range
Altitude
≤ 4000 m
Aire pressure
70-106 kPa
Temperature
-40°C to +70°C
Temperature change rate
≤ 1°C/min
Relative humidity
5% to 100%
Solar radiation
≤ 1120 W/s2
Heat radiation
≤ 600 W/s2
Wind speed
≤ 30 m/s
Waterproofing Requirement Ensure the following conditions are met when transporting the equipment:
The crate is intact. Proper rain-proofing measures are taken on the vehicle to prevent water from entering the crate. No water is present in the vehicle.
Biological Environment
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Avoid multiplication of microbes (such as eumycete and mycete). Keep rodents such as mice away.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
99
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
Air Cleanliness
The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive or corrosive dust. Table 9-29 lists the density limitations for mechanically active substances during transportation.
Table 9-29 Density limitations for mechanically active substances during transportation Mechanically Active Substance
Content
Suspended dust
No requirement
Precipitable dust
≤ 3.0 mg/m2 ·h
Sand particles
≤ 100 mg/m 3
Table 9-30 lists the density limitations for chemically active substances.
Table 9-30 Density limitations for chemically active substances Chemically Active Substance
Content
SO2
≤ 1.00 mg/m3
H2 S
≤ 0.50 mg/m3
NOx
≤ 1.00 mg/m3
NH3
≤ 3.00 mg/m3
CL2
-
HCL
≤ 0.50 mg/m3
HF
≤ 0.03 mg/m3
O3
≤ 0.10 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress Table 9-31 lists the mechanical stress requirements for the transportation environment. Table 9-31 Mechanical stress requirements for the transportation environment Item
Sub-Item
Range
Random vibration
Acceleration spectral density
1 m 2/s3
-3 dBA
Frequency range
5-20 Hz
20-200 Hz
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
100
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
Item
Sub-Item
Range
Impact
Response spectrum I (weight of sample > 50 kg)
100 m/s2 , 11 ms, 100 times for each
Response spectrum II (weight of sample ≤ 50 kg)
180 m/s2 , 6 ms, 100 times for each
Weight (kg)
Height (m)
< 10
1.0
< 15
1.0
< 20
0.8
< 30
0.6
< 40
0.5
< 50
0.4
< 100
0.3
> 100
0.1
Static pressure
Static pressure = Product weight x (Maximum number of stacked layers that is specified on the product package - 1) x 5 x 9.8 (N)
Drop
Static load
NOTE Impact response spectrum: maxi mum acceleration response curve that the equipment generates when struck with the stipulated impact. Static load is the pressure from the upside that the packaged equipment can tolerate when equipment is stacked in the specified manner.
9.11.3 Operation Environment This section provides the requirements on the operation environment for the OptiX OSN 550.
Climate Table 9-32 and Table 9-33 list the climate requirements for the operation environment of the OptiX OSN 550. Table 9-32 Requirements for temperature and humidity Working Temperature Long-term operating temperature: -5°C to +55°C
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Relative Humidity Extended operating temperature: -5°C to +65°C
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5% to 95%
101
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
Working Temperature
Relative Humidity
NOTE The temperature and humidity values are tested at 1.5 m above the floor and 0.4 m in front of the equipment. Extended operating indicates that the successive operating time of the equipment does not exceed 4 hours, and the accumulated operating time per year does not exceed 90 days.
Table 9-33 Other climate requirements Item
Range
Altitude
≤ 4000 m
Air pressure
70-106 kPa
Temperature change rate
≤ 30°C/h
Solar radiation
≤ 700 W/s2
Heat radiation
≤ 600 W/s2
Wind speed
≤ 5 m/s
Biological Environment
Avoid multiplication of microbes (such as eumycete and mycete). Keep rodents such as mice away.
Air Cleanliness
The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive or corrosive dust. Table 9-34 lists the density limitations for mechanically active substances during operation.
Table 9-34 Density limitations for mechanically active substances during operation Mechanically Active Substance
Content
Dust particle
≤ 3x10 5 /m3
Suspended dust
≤ 0.2 mg/m3
Precipitable dust
≤1.5 mg/m ².h
Sand particles
≤ 20 mg/m 3
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Table 9-35 lists the density limitations for chemically active substances.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
102
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
Table 9-35 Density limitations for chemically active substances Chemically Active Substance
Content
SO2
≤ 0.30 mg/m3
H2 S
≤ 0.10 mg/m3
NH3
≤ 1.00 mg/m3
CL2
≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HCL
≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HF
≤ 0.01 mg/m3
O3
≤ 0.05 mg/m3
NOx
≤ 0.50 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress Table 9-36 lists the limitations for mechanical stress during operation. Table 9-36 Limitations for mechanical stress during operation Item
Sub-Item
Range
Sinusoidal vibration
Velocity
≤ 5 mm/s
-
Acceleration
-
≤ 2 m/s²
Frequency range
5-62 Hz
62-200 Hz
Impact response spectrum
Half-sine wave, 30 m/s2 , 11 ms, three times for each
Non-steady impact
NOTE Impact response spectrum: maxi mum acceleration response curve that the equipment generates when struck with the stipulated impact.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
103
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
10
10 Energy Saving and Environmental Protection
Energy Saving and Environmental Protection
The OptiX 550 complies with RoHS directive (2002/96/CE) and WEEE directive (2002/95/CE)
Energy Conservation The OptiX OSN 550 adopts a variety of technologies to reduce equipment energy.
Uses an easy scheme for board design. Replaces ordinary chips with ASIC chips that require low power consumption. Uses highly efficient power modules.
Environmental Protection The is designed according to the requirements of environmental protection. The product complies with RoHS directive.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
The equipment is amply packaged while materials as conserved. The size of the package containing the equipment and accessories is at most three times the size of the net equipment. The product is also designed for easy unpacking. All hazardous substances contained in the packaging decompose easily. Every plastic component that weighs over 25 g is labeled according to the standards of ISO 11469 and ISO 1043-1 to ISO 1043-4. All components and packages of the equipment are provided with standard labels for recycling. Plugs and connectors are easy to find, and the associated operations can be performed by using simple tools. All the attached materials, such as labels, are easy to remove. Certain types of identifying information, such as silkscreens, are printed on the front or subrack.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
104
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
11 Standard Compliance
11
Standard Compliance
11.1 ITU-T Recommendations This section provides the ITU-T Recommendations that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with. Table 11-1 ITU-T recommendations Recommendation
Description
ITU-T G.664
Optical safety procedures and requirements for optical transport systems
ITU-T G.702
Digital hierarchy bit rates
ITU-T G.703
Physical/electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces
ITU-T G.704
Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448 and 44,736 kbit/s hierarchical levels
ITU-T G.706
Frame alignment and cyclic redundancy check(CRC) procedures relating to basic frame structures defined in Recommendation G.704
ITU-T G.707
Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH)
ITU-T G.773
Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of transmission systems
ITU-T G.774
Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) management information model for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.1
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy(SDH) performance monitoring for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.2
Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) configuration of the payload structure for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.3
Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) management of multiplex-section protection for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.4
Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) management of the sub-network connection protection for the network element view
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
105
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
11 Standard Compliance
Recommendation
Description
ITU-T G.774.5
Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) management of connection supervision functionality(HCS/LCS) for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.6
Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) unidirectional performance monitoring for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.7
Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) management of lower order path trace and interface labeling for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.9
Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) configuration of linear multiplex section protection for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.10
Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) configuration of linear multiplex section protection for the network element view
ITU-T G.775
Loss of Signal(LOS), Alarm Indication Signal(AIS) and Remote Defect Indication(RDI) defect detection and clearance criteria for PDH signals
ITU-T G.7710
Common equipment management function requirements
ITU-T G.780
Vocabulary of for synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) networks and equipment
ITU-T G.781
Synchronization layer functions
ITU-T G.783
Characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) equipment functional blocks
ITU-T G.784
Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) management
ITU-T G.803
Architecture of transport networks based on the synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH)
ITU-T G.805
Generic functional architecture of transport networks
ITU-T G.806
Characteristics of transport equipment - Description methodology and generic functionality
ITU-T G.808.1
Generic protection switching - Linear trail and sub-network protection
ITU-T G.810
Definitions and terminology for synchronization networks
ITU-T G.811
Timing characteristics of primary reference clocks
ITU-T G.812
Timing requirements of slave clocks suitable for use as node clocks in synchronization networks
ITU-T G.813
Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks(SEC)
ITU-T G.821
Error performance of an international digital connection operating at a bit rate below the primary rate and forming part of an integrated services digital network
ITU-T G.822
Controlled slip rate objectives on an international digital connection
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
106
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
11 Standard Compliance
Recommendation
Description
ITU-T G.823
The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 2048 kbit/s hierarchy
ITU-T G.825
The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH)
ITU-T G.826
Error performance parameters and objectives for international, constant bit rate digital paths at or above the primary rate
ITU-T G.828
Error performance parameters and objectives for international, constant bit rate synchronous digital paths
ITU-T G.829
Error performance events for SDH multiplex and regenerator sections
ITU-T G.831
Management capabilities of transport networks based on the synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH)
ITU-T G.832
Transport of SDH elements on PDH networks - Frame and multiplexing structures
ITU-T G.841
Types and characteristics of SDH network protection architectures
ITU-T G.842
Inter-working of SDH network protection architectures
ITU-T G.957
Optical interfaces for equipments and systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy
ITU-T G.958
Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy for use on optical fiber cables
ITU-T G.7043/Y.1343
Virtual concatenation of Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) signals
ITU-T G.8010
Architecture of Ethernet layer networks
ITU-T G.8011
Ethernet over Transport - Ethernet services framework
ITU-T G.8011.1
Ethernet private line service
ITU-T G.8011.2
Ethernet virtual private line service
ITU-T G.8012
Ethernet UNI and Ethernet over transport NNI
ITU-T G.8021
Characteristics of Ethernet transport network equipment functional blocks
ITU-T G.8110
MPLS layer network architecture
ITU-T G.8110.1
Application of MPLS in the transport network
ITU-T G.8121
Characteristics of transport MPLS equipment functional blocks
ITU-T G.8112
Interfaces for the transport MPLS (T-MPLS) hierarchy
ITU-T G.8131
Protection switching for transport MPLS (T-MPLS) networks
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
107
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
11 Standard Compliance
Recommendation
Description
ITU-T G.8261
Timing and synchronization aspects in packet networks
ITU-T G.8262
Timing characteristics of synchronous Ethernet equipment slave clock (EEC)
ITU-T G.8264
Timing distribution through packet networks
ITU-T Y.1541
Network performance objectives for IP-based services
ITU-T Y.1710
Requirements for OAM functionality for MPLS networks
ITU-T Y.1730
Requirements for OAM functions in Ethernet based networks and Ethernet services
ITU-T Y.1711
Operation & Maintenance mechanism for MPLS networks
ITU-T Y.1720
Protection switching for MPLS networks
ITU-T I.610
B-ISDN operation and maintenance principles and functions
ITU-T Y.1291
An architectural framework for of quality of service (QoS) in packet networks
11.2 IETF Standards This section provides the IETF standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with. Table 11-2 IETF standards Standard
Description
RFC 2819
Remote Network Monitoring Management Information Base
draft-ietf-l2vpn-oam -req-frmk-05
L2VPN OAM requirements and framework
RFC 4664
Framework for layer 2 virtual private networks (L2VPNs)
RFC 3031
MPLS architecture
RFC 3469
Framework for multi-protocol label switching (MPLS)-based recovery
RFC 3811
Definitions of textual conventions for multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) management
RFC 3813
Multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) label switching router (LSR) management information base
RFC 3814
Multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) forwarding equivalence class to next hop label forwarding entry (FEC-To-NHLFE) management information base
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
108
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
11 Standard Compliance
Standard
Description
RFC 4221
Multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) management overview
RFC 4377
Operations and management (OAM) requirements for multi-protocol label switched (MPLS) networks
RFC 4378
A framework for multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) operations and management (OAM)
RFC 3032
MPLS label stack encoding
RFC 3443
Time to live (TTL) processing in multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) networks
RFC 3916
Requirements for pseudo-wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3)
RFC 3985
Pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) architecture
RFC 4197
Requirements for edge-to-edge emulation of time division multiplexed (TDM) circuits over packet switching networks
RFC 4385
Pseudowire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) control word for use over an MPLS PSN
RFC 4446
IANA allocations for pseudowire edge to edge emulation (PWE3)
RFC 0826
Ethernet address resolution protocol
RFC 3270
Multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) of differentiated services
RFC 4448
Encapsulation methods for transport of Ethernet over MPLS networks
RFC 4553
Structure-agnostic time division multiplexing (TDM) over packet (SAT oP)
RFC 5085
Pseudo wire virtual circuit connectivity verification (VCCV)
RFC 5086
Structure-Aware Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) Circuit Emulation Service over Packet Switched Network (CESoPSN)
RFC 4717
Encapsulation Methods for Transport of Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) over MPLS Networks
RFC 4816
Pseudowire Emulation Edge-to-Edge (PWE3) Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) Transparent Cell Transport Service
RFC 4385
Pseudowire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) control word for use over an MPLS PSN
RFC 5254
Requirements for Multi-Segment Pseudowire Emulation Edge-to-Edge (PWE3)
draft-ietf-pwe3-seg mented-pw-03
Segmented pseudo wire
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
109
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Standard
11 Standard Compliance
Description
draft-ietf-pwe3-ms-p Requirements for inter domain pseudo-wires w-requirements-03 draft-ietf-pwe3-ms-p An architecture for multi-segment pseudo wire emulation w-arch-02 edge-to-edge RFC 3644
Policy quality of service (QoS) Information model
RFC 2212
Specification of guaranteed quality of service
RFC 2474
Definition of the differentiated services field (DS Field) in the IPv4 and IPv6 headers
RFC 2475
An architecture for differentiated services
RFC 2597
Assured forwarding PHB group
RFC 2698
A two rate three color marker
RFC 3246
An expedited forwarding PHB (Per-hop behavior)
RFC 3270
Multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) of differentiated services
11.3 IEEE Standards This section provides the IEEE standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with. Table 11-3 IEEE standards Standard
Description
IEEE 802.1D
Media Access Control (MAC) Bridges
IEEE 802.1Q
Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks
IEEE 802.1ad
Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks Amendment 4: Provider Bridges
IEEE 802.3ah
Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications Amendment: Media Access Control Parameters, Physical Layers, and Management Parameters for Subscriber Access Networks
IEEE 802.1ag
Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks - Amendment 5: Connectivity Fault Management
IEEE 802.3
Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications
IEEE 802.3u
Type 100BASE-T MAC parameters, Physical Layer, MAUs, and Repeater for 100 Mb/s Operation
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
110
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Standard
Description
IEEE 802.3x
Full Duplex Operation and Type 100BASE-T2
11 Standard Compliance
11.4 Environment Related Standards This section provides the environment related standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with. Table 11-4 Environment related standards Standard
Description
CISPR 22
Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristics of information
EN 60950-1
Information technology equipment-Safety-Part 1:General requirements
UL 1950-1
Information technology equipment-Safety-Part 1:General requirements
IEC 60825-1
Safety of laser products-Part 1:Equipment classification, requirements and 's guide
IEC 60825-2
Safety of laser products-Part 2:Safety of optical fiber communication systems(OFCS)
IEC 60950-1
Information technology equipment-Safety-Part 1:General requirements
IEC 61000-4-2
Electromagnetic compatibility(EMC) Part 2:Testing and measurement techniques Section 2:Electrostatic discharge immunity test Basic EMC Publication
IEC 61000-4-3
Electromagnetic compatibility; Part 3:Testing and measurement techniques Section 3 radio frequency electromagnetic fields; immunity test.
IEC 61000-4-4
Electromagnetic compatibility(EMC) Part 4:Testing and measurement techniques Section 4:Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test Basic EMC publication
IEC 61000-4-5
Electromagnetic compatibility(EMC) Part 5:Testing and measurement techniques Section 5:Sruge immunity test
IEC 61000-4-6
Electromagnetic compatibility: Part 6:Testing and measurement techniques: Section 6 conducted disturbances induced by radio-frequency fields; immunity test
ET SI EN 300 019-1-3
Environmental conditions and environmental tests for telecommunications equipment;
ET S 300 753
Equipment Engineering (EE);Acoustic noise emitted by telecommunications equipment
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
111
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
11 Standard Compliance
Standard
Description
IEC 60825
Safety of laser products
IEC 60297
Dimensions of mechanical structures of the 482.6 mm (19 in) series
11.5 MEF Standards This section provides the MEF standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with. Table 11-5 MEF standards Standard
Description
MEF 2
Requirements and framework for Ethernet service protection in metro Ethernet networks
MEF 4
Metro Ethernet network architecture framework - Part 1: generic framework
MEF 9
Abstract Test Suite for Ethernet Services at the UNI
MEF 10
Ethernet services attributes phase 1
MEF 14
Abstract Test Suite for Traffic Management Phase 1
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
112
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A
A Glossary and Acronyms
Glossary and Acronyms
and abbreviations are listed in an alphabetical order. A.1
Numerics
A.2
A
A.3
B
A.4
C
A.5
D
A.6 E A.7
F
A.8
G
A.9
H
A.10 I A.11
J
A.12 L A.13 M A.14 N A.15 O A.16 P A.17 Q A.18 R A.19 S A.20 T A.21 U A.22 V A.23 W
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
113
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
A.1 Numerics 1+1 prote ction
An architecture that has one normal traffic signal, one working SNC/trail, one protection SNC/trail and a permanent bridge. At the source end, the normal traffic signal is permanently bridged to both the working and protection SNC/trail. At the sink end, the normal traffic signal is selected from the better of the two SNCs/trails. Due to the permanent bridging, the 1+1 architecture does not allow an extra unprotected traffic signal to be provided.
100BASE-T
IEEE 802.3 Physical Layer specification for a 100 Mb/s CSMA/CD local area network.
100BASE-TX
IEEE 802.3 Physical Layer specification for a 100 Mb/s CSMA/CD local area network over two pairs of Category 5 unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) or shielded twisted-pair (STP) wire.
10BASE-T
An Ethernet specification that uses the twisted pair cable with the transmission speed as 10 Mbit/s and the transmission distance as 100 meters.
1:N prote ction
An architecture that has N normal service signals, N working SNCs/trails, and one protection SNC/trail. It may have one extra service signal.
1PPS
Pulse per second, which, strictly speaking, is not a time synchronization signal. This is because 1PPS provides only the "gauge" corresponding to the UTC second, but does not provide the information about the day, month, or year. Therefore, 1PPS is used as the reference for frequency synchronization. On certain occasions, 1PPS can also be used on other interfaces for high precision timing.
3R
Reshaping, Retiming, Regenerating.
ABR
Available Bit Rate
AC
Alternating Current
ACAP
A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals.
Active/Standby switching of cross-connect board
The process in which the standby cross-connect board automatically takes the place of the active one. If there are two cross-connect boards on the SDH equipment, which are in hot back-up relation of each other, the operation reliability is improved. When both the cross-connect boards are in position, the one inserted first is in the working status. Unplug the active board, the standby one will run in the working status automatically. When the active cross-connect board fails in self-test, the board is pulled out, the board power supply fails or the board hardware operation fails, the standby cross-connect board can automatically take the place of the active one.
A.2 A
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
114
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
add/drop multiplexer
Network elements that provide access to all or some subset of the constituent signals contained within an ST M-N signal. The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it ed through the .
See add/drop multiplexer
istrative Unit
The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order VC) and a AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to the multiplex section frame start.
istrative Unit Group
One or more istrative units occupying fixed, defined positions in an STM payload. An AUG consists of AU-4s.
A who has authority to access all the Management Domains of the product. He or she has access to the whole network and to all the management functionalities.
Aging time
The time to live before an object becomes invalid.
AIS
Alarm Indication Signal
Alarm
A message reported when a fault is detected by a device or by the network management system during the process of polling devices. Each alarm corresponds to a recovery alarm. After a recovery alarm is received, the status of the corresponding alarm changes to cleared.
Alarm automatic re port
A function wherein an alarm generated on the device side is immediately and automatically reported to the NMS. After an alarm is reported, an alarm prompts, and the can view the details of the alarm.
alarm cable
The cable for generation of visual or audio alarms.
alarm filte ring
An alarm management method. Alarms are detected and reported to the NMS system, and whether the alarm information is displayed and saved is decided by the alarm filtering status. An alarm with the filtering status set to "Filter" is not displayed and saved on the NMS, but is monitored on the NE.
alarm indication
A function that indicates the alarm status of an NE. On the cabinet of an NE, there are four indicators in different colors indicating the current alarm status of the NE. When the green indicator is on, the NE is powered on. When the red indicator is on, a critical alarm is generated. When the orange indicator is on, a major alarm is generated. When the yellow indicator is on, a minor alarm is generated. The ALM alarm indicator on the front of a board indicates the current status of the board.
Alarm indication signal
A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure has been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
115
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
Alarm inversion
For the port that has already been configured but has no service, this function can be used to avoid generating relevant alarm information, thus preventing alarm interference. The alarm report condition of the NE port is related to the alarm inverse mode (not inverse, automatic recovery and manual recovery) setting of the NE and the alarm inversion status (Enable and Disable) setting of the port. When the alarm inversion mode of NE is set to no inversion, alarms of the port will be reported as usual no matter whatever the inversion status of the port is. When the alarm inversion mode of the NE is set to automatic recovery, and the alarm inversion state of the port is set to Enabled, then the alarm of the port will be suppressed. The alarm inversion status of the port will automatically recover to "not inverse" after the alarm ends. For the port that has already been configured but not actually loaded with services, this function can be used to avoid generating relevant alarm information, thus preventing alarm interference. When the alarm inverse mode of the NE is set as "not automatic recovery", if the alarm inversion status of the port is set as Enable, the alarm of the port will be reported.
Alarm Masking
An alarm management method. Alarms that are set to be masked are not displayed on the NMS or the NMS does not monitor unimportant alarms.
Alarm Se verity
The significance of a change in system performance or events. According to ITU-T recommendations, an alarm can have one of the following severities: Critical, Major, Minor, Warning.
Alarm suppression
An alarm management method. Alarms that are set to be suppressed are not reported from NEs any more.
ALS
See Automatic laser shutdown
APS
See Automatic Protection Switching
asynchronous
Pertaining to, being, or characteristic of something that is not dependent on timing.
Asynchronous Transfe r Mode
A protocol for the transmission of a variety of digital signals using uniform 53 byte cells. A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous in the sense that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate. Statistical and deterministic values may also be used to qualify the transfer mode.
ATM
See Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATPC
See Automatic Transmit Power Control
attenuation
Reduction of signal magnitude or signal loss, usually expressed in decibels.
AU
See istrative Unit
AUG
See istrative Unit Group
auto-negotiation
An optional function of the IEEE 802.3u Fast Ethernet standard that enables devices to automatically exchange information over a link about speed and duplex abilities..
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
116
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
Automatic laser shutdown
A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser transmitters and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
Automatic Protection Switching
Capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switch to a standby facility to recover the traffic.
Automatic Transmit Power Control
A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detected at the receiver.
backplane
An electronic circuit board containing circuits and sockets into which additional electronic devices on other circuit boards or cards can be plugged.
backup
A periodic operation performed on the data stored in the database for the purposes of database recovery in case that the database is faulty. The backup also refers to data synchronization between active and standby boards.
bandwidth
A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate.
BDI
Backward Defect Indicator
BER
See Bit Error Rate
BER tester
Used to measure the bit error rate (BER) of signals during transmission.
Binding strap
The binding strap is 12.7 mm wide, with one hook side (made of transparent polypropylene material) and one mat side (made of black nylon material).
BIP
A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by equipment at the transmit end over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, and so on. Even parity is generated by setting the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of the signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes the BIP-X.
Bit error
An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding bit in the received digital signal.
Bit Error Rate
Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure the communications quality of a network.
BITS
See Building Integrated T iming Supply
A.3 B
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
117
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
bound path
A parallel path with several serial paths bundled together. It improves the data throughput capacity.
BPDU
See Bridge Protocol Data Unit
BPS
Board Protection Switching
bridge
A device that connects two or more networks and forwards packets among them. Bridges operate at the physical network level. Bridges differs from repeaters because bridges store and forward complete packets, while repeaters forward all electrical signals. Bridges differ from routers because bridges use physical addresses, while routers use IP addresses.
Bridge Protocol Data Unit
The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.
broadcast
The process of sending packets from a source to multiple destinations. All the ports of the nodes in the network can receive packets.
Broadcast
A means of delivering information to all in a network. The broadcast range is determined by the broadcast address.
BSC
Base Station Controller
BSS
Base Station Subsystem
Build-in WDM
A function which integrates some simple WDM systems into products that belong to the OSN series. That is, the OSN products can add or drop several wavelengths directly.
Building Integrated Timing Supply
In the situation of multiple synchronous nodes or communication devices, one can use a device to set up a clock system on the hinge of telecom network to connect the synchronous network as a whole, and provide satisfactory synchronous base signals to the building integrated device. This device is called BIT S.
BWS
Backbone WDM System
cabling
The method by which a group of insulated conductors is mechanically assembled or twisted together.
cable trough
The trough which is used for cable routing in the cabinet.
captive nut
See Floating nut
CAR
See committed access rate
CAS
Channel Associated Signaling
CBR
See Constant Bit Rate
A.4 C
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
118
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
CBS
Committed Burst Size
CCDP
Co-Channel Dual Polarization
CCM
Continuity Check Message
CDR
Clock and Data Recovery
CDVT
See Cell Delay Variation Tolerance
Cell Delay Variation Tolerance
This parameter measures the tolerance level a network interface has to aggressive sending (back-to-back or very closely spaced cells) by a connected device, and does not apply to end-systems.
Centralized alarm system
The system that gathers all the information about alarms into a certain terminal console.
CES
See circuit emulation service
CFM
Connectivity Fault Management
Chain network
One type of network that all network nodes are connected one after one to be in series.
channel
A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between two or more locations in a network. Channels can be established through wire, radio (microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmitted per second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per second. For example, b/s, kb/s, Mb/s, Gb/s, and T b/s.
CIR
Committed Information Rate
Circuit
A combination of two transmission channels permitting transmission in both directions between two points.
circuit emulation service
A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At the transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATM cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, the interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original sequence at the reception end.
CIST
Common and Internal Spanning Tree
Class of Service
CoS is a rule for queuing. It classifies the packets according to the service type field or the tag in packets, and specifies different priorities for them. All the nodes in DiffServ domain forwards the packets according to their priorities.
client
A device that sends requests, receives responses, and obtains services from the server.
Clock Synchronization
Also called frequency synchronization. The signal frequency traces the reference frequency, but the start point does not need to be consistent.
Clock tracing
The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in a network.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
119
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
CLP
Cell Loss Priority
CM
See Configuration Management
committe d access rate
A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface. CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified into Quality of Service (QoS) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate can be defined.
Concatenation
A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can be used a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence.
Configuration Data
A command file defining hardware configurations of an NE. With this file, an NE can collaborate with other NEs in an entire network. Configuration data is the key factor for normal running of an entire network.
Configuration Management
A network management function defined by the International Standards Organization (ISO). It involves installing, reinitializing & modifying hardware & software.
Configure
To set the basic parameters of an operation object.
congestion
An extra intra-network or inter-network traffic resulting in decreasing network service efficiency.
Connection point
A reference point where the output of a trail termination source or a connection is bound to the input of another connection, or where the output of a connection is bound to the input of a trail termination sink or another connection. The connection point is characterized by the information which es across it. A bidirectional connection point is formed by the association of a contradirectional pair.
Constant Bit Rate
A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise clocking to ensure undistorted transmission.
Convergence
A process in which multiple channels of low-rate signals are multiplexed into one or several channels of required signals. It refers to the speed and capability for a group of networking devices to run a specific routing protocol. It functions to keep the network topology consistent.
Convergence service
A service that provides enhancements to an underlying service in order to meet the specific requirements of s.
corrugate d tube
Used to protect optical fibers.
CoS
See Class of Service
U
Central Processing Unit
CRC
See Cyclic Redundancy Check
current alarm
An alarm not handled or not acknowledged after being handled.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
120
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
Current Pe rformance Data
Performance data stored currently in a . An NE provides two types of s, namely, 15-minute and 24-hour , to store performance parameters of a performance monitoring entity. The two types of s stores performance data only in the specified monitoring period.
Cyclic Re dundancy Check
A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
Data Communication Ne twork
A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to the data communication function.
Digital Data Ne twork
A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiber channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplex technology.
DC
Direct Current
DCC
Data Communication Channel
DCD
Data Carrier Detect
DCE
Data Circuit-terminal Equipment
DCN
See Data Communication Network
DDF
See Digital Distribution Frame
DDN
See Digital Data Network
De fect
A limited interruption in the ability of an item to perform a required function.
Delay Measurement
The time elapsed since the start of transmission of the first bit of the frame by a source node until the reception of the last bit of the loopbacked frame by the same source node, when the loopback is performed at the frame's destination node.
Demultiplexing
A process applied to a composite signal formed by multiplexing, for recovering the original independent signals, or groups of these signals.
A.5 D
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
121
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
De vice se t
A collection of multiple managed devices. By dividing managed devices into different device sets, s can manage the devices by using the U2000 in an easier way. If an operation authority over one device set is assigned to a ( group), the authority over all the devices in the device set is assigned to the ( group), thus making it unnecessary to set the operation authority over all the devices in a device set separately. It is recommended to configure device set by geographical region, network level, device type, or another criterion.
Diffe rentiate d Services Code Point
A marker in the header of each IP packet that prompts network routers to apply differentiated grades of service to various packet streams. It is specified by the DiffServ policy proposed by the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force). This allows Internet and other IP-based network service providers to offer different levels of service to customers.
DiffSe rv
A service architecture that provides the end-to-end QoS function. It consists of a series of functional units implemented at the network nodes, including a small group of per-hop forwarding behaviors, packet classification functions, and traffic conditioning functions such as metering, marking, shaping and policing.
Digital Distribution Frame
A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange with transmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection, cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals.
digital signal
A signal in which information is represented by a limited number of discrete states number of discrete states (for example, high and low voltages) rather than by fluctuating levels in a continuous stream, as in an analog signal. In the pulse code modulation (PCM) technology, the 8 kHz sampling frequency is used and a byte contains 8 bits in length. Therefore, a digital signal is also referred to as a byte-based code stream. Digital signals, with simple structures and broad bandwidth, are easy to shape or regenerate, and are not easily affected by external interference.
Distributed Link Aggregation Group
A board-level port protection technology used to detect unidirectional fiber cuts and to negotiate with the opposite end. Once a link down failure occurs on a port or a hardware failure occurs on a board, the services can automatically be switched to the slave board, achieving 1+1 protection for the inter-board ports.
DLAG
See Distributed Link Aggregation Group
DM
See Delay Measurement
DNI
See Dual Node Interconnection
domain
A logical subscriber group based on which the subscriber rights are controlled.
DS
See Differentiated Services Code Point
DSL
Digital Subscriber Line
DSLAM
Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
122
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
DSR
Data Set Ready
DTE
Data T erminal Equipments
DTR
Data T erminal Ready
Dual Node Inte rconnection
DNI provides an alternative physical interconnection point, between the rings, in case of an interconnection failure scenario.
DVB-ASI
Digital Video Broadcast- Asynchronous Serial Interface
DVMRP
Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol
DWDM
Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
E-AGGR
See Ethernet aggregation
Ear bracket
A piece of angle plate with holes in it on a rack. It is used to fix network elements or components.
ECC
See Embedded Control Channel
EFM
Ethernet in the First Mile
E-LAN
A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet virtual connection).
ElectroStatic Discharge
The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at different electrical potentials caused by direct or induced by an electrostatic field.
E-Line
A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual connection).
Embe dded Control Channel
A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer, to enable transmission of operation, istration, and maintenance (OAM) information between NEs.
EMS
Element Management System
encapsulation
A technology for layered protocols, in which a lower-level protocol accepts a message from a higher-level protocol and places it in the data portion of the lower-level frame. Protocol A's packets have complete header information, and are carried by protocol B as data. Packets that encapsulate protocol A have a B header, an A header, followed by the information that protocol A is carrying. Note that A could equal to B, as in IP inside IP.
Ente rprise System Connection
A path protocol which connects the host with various control units in a storage system. It is a serial bit stream transmission protocol. The transmission rate is 200 Mbit/s.
Entity
A part, device, subsystem, functional unit, equipment, or system that can be considered individually.
EoD
See Ethernet over Dual Domains
EPL
See Ethernet Private Line
A.6 E
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
123
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
EPLAN
See Ethernet virtual private LAN service
Equipment Serial Number
A string of characters that identify a piece of equipment and ensures correct allocation of a license file to the specified equipment. It is also called "equipment fingerprint".
ESCON
See Enterprise System Connection
ESD
See ElectroStatic Discharge
ESD jack
Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf or cabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap.
ESD wrist strap
Used to prevent the ElectroStatic Discharge (ESD) when you touch or operate a device or component.
ESN
See Equipment Serial Number
Ethe rnet
A LAN technology that uses Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s or 10000 Mbit/s. An Ethernet network features high reliability and is easy to maintain.
Ethe rnet aggregation
A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual connection).
Ethe rnet Alarm Group
The Ethernet alarm group periodically obtain the statistics value to compare with the configured threshold. If the value exceeds the threshold, an event is reported.
Ethe rnet over Dual Domains
A type of boards. EoD boards bridge the PSN and TDM networks, enabling Ethernet service transmission across PSN and TDM networks.
Ethe rnet Private LAN service
A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS networks. This service is carried over a dedicated bridge and point-to-multipoint connections.
Ethe rnet Private Line
A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-point connections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network.
Ethe rnet virtual private LAN service
A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS networks. This service is carried over a shared bridge and point-to-multipoint connections.
Ethe rnet virtual private line
A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS networks. This service is carried over a shared bridge and point-to-point connections.
ETSI
European Telecommunications Standards Institute
EVPL
See Ethernet virtual private line
EVPLAN
See Ethernet virtual private LAN service
Exe rcise Switching
An operation to check whether the protection switching protocol functions properly. The protection switching is not really performed.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
124
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
Exe rcise r - Ring
This command exercises ring protection switching of the requested channel without completing the actual bridge and switch. The command is issued and the responses are checked, but no working traffic is affected.
Extende d ID
The number of the subnet that an NE belongs to, for identifying different network segments in a WAN. The physical ID of an NE is comprised of the NE ID and extended ID.
extra traffic
The traffic that is carried over the protection channels when that capacity is not used for the protection of working traffic. Extra traffic is not protected.
Failure
If the fault persists long enough to consider the ability of an item with a required function to be terminated. The item may be considered as having failed; a fault has now been detected.
Fairness
A feature in which for any link specified in a ring network, the source node is provided with certain bandwidth capacities if the data packets transmitted by the source node are constrained by the fairness algorithm.
fairness algorithm
An algorithm designed to ensure the fair sharing of bandwidth among stations in the case of congestion or overloading.
fault
A failure to implement the function while the specified operations are performed. A fault does not involve the failure caused by preventive maintenance, insufficiency of external resources or intentional settings.
FC
See Fiber Channel
FD
See frequency diversity
FDDI
See fiber distributed data interface
FDI
Forward Defect Indicator
FDV
See Frame Delay Variation
FE
Fast Ethernet
feature code
Code used to select/activate a service feature (for example, forwarding, using two or three digit codes preceded by * or 11 or #, and which may precede subsequent digit selection).
FEC
See forwarding equivalence class
FEC
See Forward Error Correction
fibe r patch cord
A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for connections between subracks or inside a subrack.
A.7 F
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
125
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
Fiber Channel
A high-speed transport technology used to build storage area networks (SANs). Fiber channel can be on the networks carrying ATM and IP traffic. It is primarily used for transporting SCSI traffic from servers to disk arrays. Fiber channel s single-mode and multi-mode fiber connections. Fiber channel signaling can run on both twisted pair copper wires and coaxial cables. Fiber channel provides both connection-oriented and connectionless services.
Fiber Connect
A new generation connection protocol which connects the host to various control units. It carries single byte command protocol through the physical path of fiber channel, and provides higher rate and better performance than ESCON.
Fiber Connector
A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couple the optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. A connector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and a optical source (or a detector).
fibe r distribute d data interface
A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for high-speed fiber-optic local area networks (LANs). FDDI provides specifications for transmission rates of 100 megabits (100 million bits) per second on networks based on the token ring network.
fibe r/cable
General name of optical fiber and cable. It refers to the physical entities that connect the transmission equipment, carry transmission objects ( information and network management information) and perform the transmission function in the transmission network. The optical fiber transmits optical signal, while the cable transmits electrical signal. The fiber/cable between NEs represents the optical fiber connection or cable connection between NEs. The fiber/cable between SDH NEs represents the connection relationship between NEs. At this time, the fiber/cable is of optical fiber type.
FICON
See Fiber Connect
FIFO
First In First Out
Floating nut
Floating nuts (or as they are more correctly named, 't ee nuts') have a range of uses but are more commonly used in the hobby for engine fixing (securing engine mounts to the firewall), wing fixings, and undercarriage fixing.
Flow
An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics. On the network management system or NE software, flow is a group of classification rules. On boards, it is a group of packets that have the same quality of service (QoS) operation.
FLR
See Frame loss ratio
Forced switch
For normal traffic signals, switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exists on the protection section, by issuing a forced switch request for that traffic signal.
Forward Error Correction
A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during transmission are corrected at the receive end.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
126
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
forwarding e quivalence class
A class-based forwarding technology that classifies the packets with the same forwarding mode. Packets with the same FEC are processed similarly on an MPLS network. The division of FECs is flexible, and can be a combination of the source address, destination address, source port, destination port, protocol type, and VPN.
FPGA
Field Programmable Gate Array
frame
A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame length is represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle. A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words, a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements pre-specified by the sending and receiving parties.
Frame Delay Variation
A measurement of the variations in the frame delay between a pair of service frames, where the service frames belong to the same CoS instance on a point to point ETH connection.
Frame loss ratio
A ratio, is expressed as a percentage, of the number of service frames not delivered divided by the total number of service frames during time interval T, where the number of service frames not delivered is the difference between the number of service frames arriving at the ingress ETH flow point and the number of service frames delivered at the egress ETH flow point in a point-to-point ETH connection.
Free-run mode
An operating condition of a clock, the output signal of which is strongly influenced by the oscillating element and not controlled by servo phase-locking techniques. In this mode the clock has never had a network reference input, or the clock has lost external reference and has no access to stored data, that could be acquired from a previously connected external reference. Free-run begins when the clock output no longer reflects the influence of a connected external reference, or transition from it. Free-run terminates when the clock output has achieved lock to an external reference.
fre quency diversity
A diversity scheme in which two or more microwave frequencies with a certain frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading.
FTP
File Transfer Protocol
full-duplex
A full-duplex, or sometimes double-duplex system, allows communication in both directions, and, unlike half-duplex, allows this to happen simultaneously. Land-line telephone networks are full-duplex, since they allow both callers to speak and be heard at the same time. A good analogy for a full-duplex system would be a two-lane road with one lane for each direction.
Gain
The difference between the optical power from the input optical interface of the optical amplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the jumper fiber, which expressed in dB.
A.8 G
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
127
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
Gateway IP
When an NE accesses a remote network management system or NE, a router can be used to enable the T/IP communication. In this case, the IP address of the router is the gateway IP. Only the gateway NE requires the IP address. The IP address itself cannot identify the uniqueness of an NE. The same IP addresses may exist in different T/IP networks. An NE may have multiple IP addresses, for example, one IP address of the network and one IP address of the Ethernet port.
Gateway Ne twork Element
A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and the NM application layer.
GE
Gigabit Ethernet
Generic Framing Procedure
A framing and encapsulation method which can be applied to any data type. It has been standardized by ITU-T SG15.
GFP
See Generic Framing Procedure
GNE
See Gateway Network Element
GPS
Global Positioning System
GSM
Global System for Mobile Communications
GTS
Generic Traffic Shaping
GUI
Graphic Interface
half-duplex
A transmitting mode in which a half-duplex system provides for communication in both directions, but only one direction at a time (not simultaneously). Typically, once a party begins receiving a signal, it must wait for the transmitter to stop transmitting, before replying.
Hardware loopback
A connection mode in which a fiber jumper is used to connect the input optical interface to the output optical interface of a board to achieve signal loopback.
HDLC
High level Data Link Control
HD-SDI
See High Definition-Serial Digital Interface signal
HEC
Header Error Control
Hierarchical Quality of Service
A type of QoS that controls the traffic of s and performs the scheduling according to the priority of services. HQoS has an advanced traffic statistics function, and the can monitor the usage of bandwidth of each service. Hence, the bandwidth can be allocated reasonably through traffic analysis.
High De finition-Se rial Digital Inte rface signal
High definition video signal transported by serial digital interface.
A.9 H
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
128
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
History alarm
The confirmed alarm that has been saved in the memory and other external memories.
Historical performance data
The performance data that is stored in the history or that is automatically reported and stored on the NMS.
HP
Higher Order Path
HPT
Higher Order Path Termination
HQoS
See Hierarchical Quality of Service
IC
Integrated Circuit
IDU
Indoor Unit
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IETF
Internet Engineering Task Force
IF
Intermediate Frequency
IGMP
See Internet Group Management Protocol
IGMP Snooping
A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyzing Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) packets between hosts and Layer 3 devices. In this manner, the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.
IMA
See Inverse Multiplexing over ATM
IMA frame
A control unit in the IMA protocol. It is a logical frame defined as M consecutive cells, numbered 0 to M-l, transmitted on each of the N links in an IMA group.
Input jitter tolerance
The maximum amplitude of sinusoidal jitter at a given jitter frequency, which, when modulating the signal at an equipment input port, results in no more than two errored seconds cumulative, where these errored seconds are integrated over successive 30-second measurement intervals.
Intelligent powe r adjusting
A mechanism used to reduce the optical power of all the amplifiers in an adjacent regeneration section in the upstream to a safety level if the system detects the loss of optical signals on the link. If the fiber is broken, the device performance degrades, or the connector is not plugged well, the loss of optical signals may occur. With IPA, maintenance engineers will not be hurt by the laser sent out from the slice of broken fiber.
Inte rface board area
The area for the interface boards on the subrack.
Inte rnal cable
The cables and optical fibers which are used for interconnecting electrical interfaces and optical interfaces within the cabinet.
A.10 I
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
129
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
Inte rnet Group Management Protocol
One of the T/IP protocols for managing the hip of Internet Protocol multicast groups. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and maintain multicast group hips.
Inverse Multiplexing over ATM
A technique that involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates.
IP
Internet Protocol
IP address
A 32-bit (4-byte) binary digit that uniquely identifies a host (computer) connected to the Internet for communication with other hosts in the Internet by transferring packets. An IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation, consisting of decimal values of its 4 bytes, separated by periods (,), for example, 127.0.0.1. The first three bytes of an IP address identify the network to which the host is connected, and the last byte identifies the host itself.
IP ove r DCC
A technology that enables a DCC channel to carry T/IP protocol packets. The IP over DCC technology provides the T/IP protocol without using any extra overheads or service resources to ensure interconnection of management channels.
IPA
See Intelligent power adjusting
IS-IS
Intermedia System-Intermedia System
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network
ISO
International Standard Organization
ISP
Internet Service Provider
IST
Internal Spanning Tree
ITU-T
International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication Standardization
Jitter
Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system instability.
jitte r tolerance
Jitter tolerance is defined as the peak-to-peak amplitude of sinusoidal jitter applied on the input ATM-PON signal that causes a 1 dB optical power penalty at the optical equipment.
Label
A short identifier that is of fixed length and local significance. It is used to uniquely identify the FEC to which a packet belongs. It does not contain topology information. It is carried in the header of a packet and does not contain topology information.
LA
See Link Aggregation Control Protocol
A.11 J
A.12 L
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
130
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
LAG
See link aggregation group
LAN
Local Area Network
LAPS
Link Access Procedure-SDH
Lase r
A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor laser as the light source.
Layer
A concept used to allow the transport network functionality to be described hierarchically as successive levels; each layer being solely concerned with the generation and transfer of its characteristic information.
laye r 2 switch
A data forwarding method. In a LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is at the second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called Layer 2 switch.
LB
See Loopback
LBM
Loopback Message
LBR
Loopback Reply
LC
Lucent Connector
LCAS
See Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LCD
Liquid Crystal Display
LCT
Local Craft Terminal
License
A permission that the vendor provides for the with a specific function, capacity, and duration of a product. A license can be a file or a serial number. Usually the license consists of encrypted codes. The operation authority granted varies with the level of the license.
Link
In the topology view, a link is used to identify the physical or logical connection between two topological nodes. A link is used to connect signaling points (SPs) and signaling transfer points (STPs) and transmit signaling messages.
Link Aggregation Control Protocol
A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface to increase bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE 802.3ad.
link aggregation group
An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were a single link.
Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a control mechanism to hitless increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation, increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the responsibility of the network and element management systems.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
131
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
LLC
Logical Link Control
LM
See Loss Measurement
Locked switching
When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from being switched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to the working channel.
LO F
Loss of Frame
LO M
Loss of Multiframe
Loopback
A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the signal or message can be analyzed for errors. The loopback can be a inloop or outloop.
LOS
Loss of Signal
Loss Measurement
Loss measurement, a method used to collect counter values applicable for ingress and egress service frames where the counters maintain a count of transmitted and received data frames between a pair of MEPs.
Lower Threshold
A lower performance limit which when exceeded by a performance event counter will trigger a threshold-crossing event.
LP
Lower Order Path
LPT
Link State Through
LSP
Label Switched Path
LSR
Label Switching Router
LT
Link Trace
MA
See Maintenance Association
MAC
Medium Access Control
Maintenance Association
TThat portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, the connectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of Maintenance Entities.
Maintenance Domain
The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by connectivity fault management (CFM). The devices in a maintenance domain are managed by a single Internet service provider (ISP).
MAN
See Metropolitan Area Network
Manual switch
Switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless a failure condition exists on other sections (including the protection section) or an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect, by issuing a manual switch request for that normal traffic signal.
A.13 M
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
132
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
Mapping
A procedure by which tributaries are adapted into virtual containers at the boundary of an SDH network.
Marking-off template
A quadrate cardboard with four holes. It is used to mark the positions of the installation holes for the cabinet.
MBS
Maximum Burst Size
MCF
Message Communication Function
MCR
Minimum Cell Rate
MD
See Maintenance Domain
Mean launched power
The average power of a pseudo-random data sequence coupled into the fiber by the transmitter.
MEP
Maintenance End Point
Metropolitan Area Ne twork
A network that interconnects s with computer resources in a geographic area or region larger than that covered by even a large LAN but smaller than the area covered by an WAN. The term is applied to the interconnection of networks in a city into a single larger network (which may then also offer efficient connection to a wide area network). It is also used to mean the interconnection of several local area networks by bridging them with backbone lines. The latter usage is also sometimes referred to as a campus network.
MIB
Management Information Base
MIP
Maintenance Intermediate Point
MO DEM
MOdulator-DEModulator
MP
Maintenance Point
MPID
Maintenance Point Identification
MPLS
See Multiprotocol Label Switching
MS
Multiplex Section
MSA
Multiplex Section Adaptation
MSOH
See Multiplex Section Overhead
MSP
See Multiplex Section Protection
MST
Multiplex Section Termination
MSTI
Multiple Spanning Tree Instance
MSTP
See Multi-service transmission platform
MSTP
See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
MTIE
Maximum T ime Interval Error
MTU
Maximum Transmission Unit
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
133
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
Multiprotocol Label Switching
A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of networks, and is beneficial to routing.
Multi-service transmission platform
A platform based on the SDH platform, capable of accessing, processing and transmitting TDM services, ATM services, and Ethernet services, and providing unified management of these services.
Multicast
A process of transmitting data packets from one source to many destinations. The destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast group rather than a host.
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
A protocol that can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
Multiplex Se ction Ove rhead
The overhead that comprises rows 5 to 9 of the SOH of the STM-N signal. See SOH definition.
Multiplex Se ction Protection
A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and including two multiplex section termination (MST ) functions, from a "working" to a "protection" channel.
Multiplexing
A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher order path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex section.
NE
See network element
NE Explorer
The main operation interface, of the network management system, which is used to manage the telecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, the can query, manage and maintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.
network element
An NE contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One NE is at least equipped with one system control and communication(SCC) board which manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the SCC board.
network node inte rface
The interface at a network node which is used to interconnect with another network node.
network segment
A part of an Ethernet or other network, on which all message traffic is common to all nodes, that is, it is broadcast from one node on the segment and received by all others.
A.14 N
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
134
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
NLP
Normal Link Pulse
NMS
Network Management System
NNI
See network node interface
NPC
Network Parameter Control
nrt-VBR
Non Real-T ime Variable Bit Rate
NRZ
Non Return to Zero code
NSAP
Network Service Access Point
NTP
Network T ime Protocol
OA
See Optical Amplifier
O
See Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer
OAM
Operations, istration and Maintenance
OAM auto-discove ry
In the case of OAM auto-discovery, two interconnected ports, enabled with the Ethernet in the First Mile OAM (EFM OAM) function, negotiate to determine whether the mutual EFM OAM configuration match with each other by sending and responding to the OAM protocol data unit (OAMPDU). If the mutual EFM OAM configuration match, the two ports enter the EFM OAM handshake phase. In the handshake phase, the two ports regularly send the OAMPDU to maintain the neighborhood relation.
O
See Optical Channel Protection
ODF
See Optical Distribution Frame
ODU
Outdoor Unit
O FS
Out-of-frame Second
OHA
Overhead Access Function
OLT
Optical Line Terminal
Online Help
The capability of many programs and operating systems to display advice or instructions for using their features when so requested by the .
ONU
Optical Network Unit
OO F
Out of Frame
Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer
A device that can be used to add the optical signals of various wavelengths to one channel and drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel.
Optical Amplifie r
Devices or subsystems in which optical signals can be amplified by means of the stimulated emission taking place in a suitable active medium.
A.15 O
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
135
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
Optical attenuator
A ive device that increases the attenuation in a fiber link. It is used to ensure that the optical power of the signals received at the receive end is not extremely high. It is available in two types: fixed attenuator and variable attenuator.
Optical Channel Protection
In an optical transmission link that contains multiple wavelengths, when a certain wavelength goes faulty, the services at the wavelength can be protected if the optical channel protection is configured.
Optical Connector
A component normally attached to an optical cable or a piece of apparatus to provide frequent optical interconnection/disconnection of optical fibers or cables.
Optical Distribution Frame
A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.
Optical Inte rface
A component that connects several transmit or receive units.
Optical Time Domain Re flectometer
A device that sends a very short pulse of light down a fiber optic communication system and measures the time history of the pulse reflection to measure the fiber length, the light loss and locate the fiber fault.
orderwire
A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or maintenance engineers of different stations.
OSI
Open Systems Interconnection
OSN
Optical Switch Node
OSPF
Open Shortest Path First
O TDR
See Optical T ime Domain Reflectometer
O TU
See Optical transponder unit
Optical transponder unit
A device or subsystem that converts the accessed client signals into the G.694.1/G.694.2-compliant WDM wavelength.
Output optical power
The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.
Ove rhead
Extra bits in a digital stream used to carry information besides traffic signals. Orderwire, for example, would be considered overhead information.
Paire d slots
T wo slots of which the overheads can be ed through by using the bus on the backplane.
-through
The action of transmitting the same information that is being received for any given direction of transmission.
A.16 P
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
136
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
Path
A performance resource object defined in the network management system. The left end of a path is a device node whose port needs to be specified and the right end of a path is a certain IP address which can be configured by the . By defining a path in the network management system, a can test the performance of a network path between a device port and an IP address. The tested performance may be the path delay, packet loss ratio or other aspects.
PBS
Peak Burst Size
PC
Personal Computer
PCM
Pulse Code Modulation
PCR
Peak Cell Rate
PDH
See Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PDU
See Power distribution unit
PE
See provider edge
Pe rformance re gister
The memory space for performance event counts, including 15-min current performance , 24-hour current performance , 15-min historical performance , 24-hour historical performance , UAT and CSES . The object of performance event monitoring is the board functional module, so every board functional module has a performance . A performance is used to count the performance events taking place within a period of operation time, so as to evaluate the quality of operation from the angle of statistics.
performance threshold
A limit for generating an alarm for a selected entity. When the measurement result reaches or exceeds the preset alarm threshold, the performance management system generates a performance alarm.
Pe rmanent Virtual Connection
A connection between two ATM end hosts. The connection consists of PVPs between the ATM end hosts and their respective switches, and SVPs between the switches.
PGND
Protection Ground
PGND cable
A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, one half of the cable is yellow, whereas the other half is green.
PIM-SM
Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode
PIR
Peak Information Rate
plesiochronous
Qualifying two time-varying phenomena, time-scales, or signals in which corresponding significant instants occur at the same rate, any variations in rate being constrained within specified limits. Note: Corresponding significant instants are separated by time intervals having durations which may vary without limit.
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
137
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
PLL
Phase-Locked Loop
Pointer
An indicator whose value defines the frame offset of a virtual container with respect to the frame reference of the transport entity on which this pointer is ed.
POS
Packet Over SDH
Powe r box
A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies power for the subracks in the cabinet.
Powe r distribution unit
A unit that performs AC or DC power distribution.
PPP
Point-to-Point Protocol
PRBS
See Pseudo Random Binary Sequence
PRC
Primary Reference Clock
Primitive
In the hierarchy of signaling system No.7, when the upper layer applies for services from the lower layer or the lower layer transmits services to the upper layer, the data is exchanged between the and the service provider. The data transmitted between adjacent layers is called primitive.
Private Line
A line, such as a subscriber cable and trunk cable, which are leased by the telecommunication carrier and are used to meet the special requirements.
Protection path
A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.
Protection se rvice
A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.
Protection subnet
In the NMS, the protection subnet becomes a concept of network level other than multiplex section rings or path protection rings. The protection sub-network involves NEs and fiber cable connections.
Protection View
The interface, of the NMS, which is used to manage protection in the network.
provider edge
A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is responsible for managing VPN s, establishing LSPs between PEs, and exchanging routing information between sites of the same VPN. A PE performs the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network and the public channel. A PE can be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.
PS
Packet Switched
PSD
Power Spectral Density
Pseudo Random Binary Sequence
A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
138
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
Pseudo Wire
An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is established and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW is maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.
Pseudo Sire Emulation e dge-to-e dge
An end-to-end Layer 2 transmission technology. It emulates the essential attributes of a telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a packet switched network (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed time division multiplexing (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real situation.
PVC
See Permanent Virtual Connection
PW
See Pseudo Wire
PWE3
See Pseudo Sire Emulation edge-to-edge
QinQ
A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It add a public VLAN tag to a frame with a private VLAN tag to allow the frame with double VLAN tags to be transmitted over the service provider’s backbone network based on the public VLAN tag. This provides a layer 2 VPN tunnel for customers and enables transparent transmission of packets over private VLANs.
QoS
See Quality of Service
Quality of Service
A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel. Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a service provider to meet the demands of s.
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with the STP protocol.
RDI
Remote Defect Indication
Re ceiver Sensitivity
The minimum acceptable value of average received power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10 -12 BER (The FEC is open).
Re ference clock
A kind of stable and high-precision autonous clock providing frequencies for other clocks for reference.
REG
A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals.
Regeneration
The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes, waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits.
A.17 Q
A.18 R
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
139
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
Regenerator section overhead
The regenerator section overhead comprises rows 1 to 3 of the SOH of the STM-N signal.
Remote optical pumping amplifier
A remote optical amplifier subsystem designed for applications where power supply and monitoring systems are unavailable. The ROPA subsystem is a power compensation solution to the ultra-long distance long hop (LHP) transmission.
Resilient Packet Ring
A network topology being developed as a new standard for fiber optic rings.
RF
Radio Frequency
RFA
Request For Announcement
RFI
Request for Information
ring network
A type of network topology in which each node connects to exactly two other nodes, forming a circular pathway for signals.
RNC
Radio Network Controller
ROPA
See Remote optical pumping amplifier
route
The path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a T/IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically.
route r
A device on the network layer that selects routes in the network. The router selects the optimal route according to the destination address of the received packet through a network and forwards the packet to the next router. The last router is responsible for sending the packet to the destination host. Can be used to connect a LAN to a LAN, a WAN to a WAN, or a LAN to the Internet.
RP
Rendezvous Point
RPR
See Resilient Packet Ring
RS232
A asynchronous transfer mode that does not involve hand-shaking signal. It can communicate with RS232 and RS422 of other stations in point-to-point mode and the transmission is transparent. Its highest speed is 19.2kbit/s.
RS422
The specification that defines the electrical characteristics of balanced voltage digital interface circuits. The interface can change to RS232 via the hardware jumper and others are the same as RS232.
RSTP
See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RTN
Radio Transmission Node
RX
Receiver
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
140
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
A.19 S S1 byte
A byte to transmit network synchronization status information. On an SDH network, each NE traces hop by hop to the same clock reference source through a specific clock synchronization path, realizing synchronization on the entire network. If a clock reference source traced by an NE is missing, this NE will trace another clock reference source of a lower level. To implement protection switching of clocks in the whole network, the NE must learn about clock quality information of the clock reference source it traces. Therefore, ITU-T defines S1 byte to transmit network synchronization status information. It uses the lower four bits of the multiplex section overhead S1 byte to indicate 16 types of synchronization quality grades. Auto protection switching of clocks in a synchronous network can be implemented using S1 byte and a proper switching protocol.
SAN
Storage Area Network
SC
Square Connector
SCR
Sustainable Cell Rate
SD
See space diversity
SD
See Signal Degrade
SD
See Standard definition
SDH
See Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SDP
Serious Disturbance Period
SD-SDI
See Standard definition-Serial Digital Interface signal
SEC
SDH Equipment Clock
Section
The portion of a SONET transmission facility, including terminating points, between (i) a terminal network element and a regenerator or (ii) two regenerators. A terminating point is the point after signal regeneration at which performance monitoring is (or may be) done.
Self-healing
A function of establishing a replacement connection by network without the network management connection function. When a connection failure occurs, the replacement connection is found by the network elements and rerouted depending on network resources available at that time.
Serial port extended ECC
The ECC channel realized by means of serial port.
serve r
A network device that provides services to network s by managing shared resources, often used in the context of a client-server architecture for a LAN.
Service prote ction
A measure that ensures that the services can be received at the receive end.
SES
Severely Errored Second
SETS
Synchronous Equipment Timing Source
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
141
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
settings
Parameters of a system or operation that can be selected by the .
SF
See Signal Fail
Signal Fail
A signal indicating that associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect condition (non-degrade defect) is active.
SFP
See Small Form-Factor Pluggable
SHDSL
Single-line High speed Digital Subscriber Line
Side Mode Suppression Ratio
The Side Mode Suppression Ratio (SMSR) is the ratio of the largest peak of the total source spectrum to the second largest peak.
signal cable
Common signal cables cover the E1 cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber signal cable.
Signal Degrade
SD is a signal indicating the associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded defect (e.g., dDEG) condition is active.
Signal Fail
SF is a signal indicating the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect condition (not being the degraded defect) is active.
Simple Network Management Protocol
A network management protocol of T /IP. It enables remote s to view and modify the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the transmission of management information between any two points. The polling mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control information about each device is maintained by a management information block.
slide rail
Angle-bars on which shelves and chassis may slide and be ed within a cabinet or shelf.
Small Form-Factor Pluggable
A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.
SMSR
See Side Mode Suppression Ratio
SNC
SubNetwork Connection
SNCMP
See Subnetwork connection multipath protection
SN
See SubNetwork Connection Protection
SN node
Set the SNC node on the protection sub-network to sub-network connection protection that spans protection sub-networks. The SN node of the ring sub-network can electric circuit dually feed and selectively receive a timeslot out of the ring, thus implementing sub-network connection protection. The SN node is generally set on the node on the line board with the path protection type of the dual fed and selectively received.
SNCTP
See Subnetwork Connection T unnel Protection
SNMP
See Simple Network Management Protocol
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
142
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
SNR
Signal Noise Ratio
space diversity
A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a specific distance to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading. Currently, only receive SD is used.
Spanning Tree Protocol
STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundant network to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prune a loop network into a loop-free tree network.
SPI
Synchronous Physical Interface
SSM
See Synchronization Status Message
SSU
Synchronization Supply Unit
Standard definition
A video format with the resolution below 720p.
Standard definition-Serial Digital Inte rface signal
Standard definition video signal transported by serial digital interface.
Statistical multiplexing
A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can be transmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only to active input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devices to be connected than with other multiplexing techniques.
STM-4
SDH standard for transmission over optical fiber at 622.08 Mbit/s.
STP
See Spanning Tree Protocol
Sub-network numbe r
A number used to differentiate network sections in a sub-network conference. A sub-network ID consists of the first several digits (one or two) of a phone number. An order wire phone number consists of the sub-network ID and the number.
subnet
A type of smaller networks that form a larger network according to a rule, for example, according to different districts. This facilitates the management of the large network.
subnet mask
The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine, server or router matches with the IP address.
Subnetwork connection multipath prote ction
The only difference is that SN is of 1+1 protection and SNCMP is of N+1 protection. That is, several backup channels protect one active channel in SNCMP.
SubNetwork Connection Protection
A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced by a protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
143
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
Subnetwork Connection Tunnel Protection
SNCTP provides a VC-4 level channel protection. When the working channel is faulty, the services of the entire VC-4 path can be switched over to the protection channel.
A part used to and fix a cabinet on the antistatic floor. It is made of welded steel plates and is used to block up the cabinets to facilitate floor layout and cabling. Before the whole set of equipment is grounded, insulation plates must be installed under the s, and insulating coverings must be added to the expansion bolts to achieve good insulation performance.
Suppression state
An attribute set to determine whether an NE monitors the alarm. Under suppression status, NE will not monitor the corresponding alarm conditions and the alarm will not occur even when the alarm conditions are met.
SVC
Switching Virtual Connection
Switching priority
A priority of a board that is defined for protection switching. When several protected boards need to be switched, a switching priority should be set for each board. If the switching priorities of the boards are the same, services on the board that fails later cannot be switched. Services on the board with higher priority can preempt the switching resources of that with lower priority.
Switching restoration time
It refers to the period of time between the start of detecting and the moment when the line is switched back to the original status after protection switching occurs in the MSP sub-network.
Synchronization Status Message
A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link. Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clock information through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on their clocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff, and forward the synchronization information to downstream nodes.
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode, transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-ISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is used only for signals. SDH is suitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.
Synchronous source
A clock providing timing services to connected network elements. This would include clocks conforming to Recommendations G.811, G.812 and G.813.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
144
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
A.20 T Tandem Connection Monitor
In the SDH transport hierarchy, the TCM is located between the AU/TU management layer and HP/LP layer. It uses the N1/N2 byte of POH overhead to monitor the quality of the transport channels on a transmission section (TCM section).
TCM
See T andem Connection Monitor
T/IP
See T ransmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TDM
Time Division Multiplexing
TIM
Trace Identifier Mismatch
Timeslot
Continuously repeating interval of time or a time period in which two devices are able to interconnect.
Time Synchronization
Also called the moment synchronization, time synchronization means that the synchronization of the absolute time, which requires that the starting time of the signals keeps consistent with the UTC time.
TM
Terminal Multiplexer
TMN
Telecommunications Management Network
ToS
See Type of Service
TPS
See T ributary Protection Switch
Trail management function
A network level management function of the network management system. This function enables you to configure end-to-end services, view graphic interface and visual routes of a trail, query detailed information of a trail, filter, search and locate a trail quickly, manage and maintain trails in a centralized manner, manage alarms and performance data by trail, and print a trail report.
Transceive r
A transmitter and receiver housed together in a single unit and having some circuits in common, often for portable or mobile use.
Transmission Control Protocol/Inte rnet Protocol
Common name for the suite of protocols developed to the construction of worldwide internetworks.
transparent transmission
A process during which the signaling protocol or data is not processed in the content but encapsulated in the format for the processing of the next phase.
Tray
A component that can be installed in the cabinet for holding chassis or other devices.
Tributary loopback
A fault can be located for each service path by performing loopback to each path of the tributary board. There are three kinds of loopback modes: no loopback, outloop, and inloop.
Tributary Protection Switch
A function that uses a standby tributary processing board to protect N tributary processing boards.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
145
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
Tributary unit
An information structure which provides adaptation between the lower order path layer and the higher order path layer. It consists of an information payload (the lower order VC) and a TU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to the higher order VC frame start.
Tributary Unit Group
One or more Tributary Units, occupying fixed, defined positions in a higher order VC-n payload is termed a Tributary Unit Group (TUG). TUGs are defined in such a way that mixed capacity payloads made up of different size Tributary Units can be constructed to increase flexibility of the transport network.
TTL
Time To Live
TU
Tributary Unit
TUG
See T ributary Unit Group
Tunnel
A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs. In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnel ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnel is an MPLS tunnel.
Type of Service
A field in an IP packet (IP datagram) used for quality of service (QoS). The TOS field has 8 bits in length, which is divided into five subfields.
UART
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
UAS
Unavailable Second
UBR
Unspecified Bit Rate
underfloor cabling
The cables connected cabinets and other devices are routed underfloor.
UNI
See -to-Network Interface
Unprotecte d
Pertaining to the transmission of the services that are not protected. The services cannot be switched to the protection channel if the working channel is faulty or the service is interrupted, because protection mechanism is not configured.
Unprotecte d sub-network
A sub-network without any protection mechanism. The purpose of such configuration is to provide the basic data of trail protection for subsequent trail management.
An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the NMS. The configuration data then covers the configuration data stored at the NMS side.
UPM
Uninterruptible Power Module
Uppe r threshold
TThe critical value that can induce unexpected events if exceeded.
UPS
Uninterruptible Power Supply
A.21 U
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
146
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
Upward cabling
Cables or fibers connect the cabinet with other equipment from the top of the cabinet.
Any entity external to the network which utilizes connections through the network for communication. A person or other entity authorized by a subscriber to use some or all of the services subscribed to by that subscriber.
-to-Network Inte rface
The interface between equipment and private or public network equipment (for example, ATM switches).
UTC
Universal T ime Coordinated
VB
Virtual Bridge
VBR
Variable Bit Rate
VC
Virtual Concatenation
VC
See Virtual Container
VCG
Virtual Concatenation Group
VCI
Virtual Channel Identifier
Virtual Container
The information structure used to path layer connections in the SDH. It consists of information payload and path overhead (POH) information fields organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 or 500 µs.
Virtual local area network
A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated with switched Ethernet.
Virtual Private Ne twork
A system configuration, where the subscriber is able to build a private network via connections to different network switches that may include private network capabilities.
VLAN
See Virtual local area network
VP
Virtual Path
VPI
Virtual Path Identifier
VPN
See Virtual Private Network
Wait to Restore
The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line.
WAN
Wide Area Network
Wande r
The long-term variations of the significant instants of a digital signal from their ideal position in time (where long-term implies that these variations are of frequency less than 10 Hz).
A.22 V
A.23 W
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
147
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
washer
A washer is a thin flat ring of metal or rubber which is placed over a bolt before the nut is screwed on.
Wavelength Division Multiplexing
A technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fiber, uses multiple wavelengths as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in a single fiber.
Wavelength prote ction group
Data for describing the wavelength protection structure. Its function is similar to that of the protection subnet for SDH NEs. The wavelength path protection can work only with the correct configuration of the wavelength protection group.
WDM
See Wavelength Division Multiplexing
WFQ
Weighted Fair Queuing
Winding pipe
A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe.
Working path
A path allocated to transport the normal traffic.
WRED
Weighted Random Early Detection
WTR
See Wait to Restore
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
148
Product Description
Issue
01
Date
2011-06-30
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Perm issions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:
Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
[email protected]
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
About This Document
About This Document Product Version The following table lists the product versions applicable to this documentation. Product Name
Product Version
OptiX OSN 550
V100R005C01
iManager U2000
V100R005
Intended Audience This document describes the OptiX OSN 550 in of network application, function, hardware architecture, software architecture, features, and technical specifications. This document is intended for the following engineers:
Network planning engineers Data configuration engineers System maintenance engineers
Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol
Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ii
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Symbol
About This Document
Description Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
GUI Conventions Convention
Meaning
Boldface
Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK.
>
Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Change History Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 01 (2011-06-30) Initial formal release.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Contents
Contents About This Document.................................................................................................................... ii
1 Product Positioning and Features .............................................................................................. 1 1.1 Product Positioning.................................................................................................................... 1 1.2 Product Characteristics ............................................................................................................... 1
2 Quick Reference ............................................................................................................................ 3 3 Product Architecture................................................................................................................... 11
3.1 System Architecture ..................................................................................................................11 3.2 Hardware Structure ...................................................................................................................12 3.3 Software Architectu re................................................................................................................20 3.3.1 Overview of Software Architecture.......................................................................................21 3.3.2 Communication Protocols and Interfaces ...............................................................................21 3.3.3 Board Software ................................................................................................................22 3.3.4 NE Software ....................................................................................................................22 3.3.5 NMS Software .................................................................................................................23
4 Packet Functions and Features ................................................................................................. 24
4.1 Packet-Domain Access Capacity .................................................................................................24 4.2 Service ........................................................................................................................24 4.2.1 Native Ethernet Services ....................................................................................................25 4.2.2 ETH PWE3 Services .........................................................................................................34 4.2.3 CES Services ...................................................................................................................35 4.2.4 ATM/IMA Services ...........................................................................................................37 4.3 Protection ....................................................................................................................38 4.3.1 MPLS APS ......................................................................................................................38 4.3.2 PW APS..........................................................................................................................40 4.3.3 LPT................................................................................................................................41 4.3.4 LAG...............................................................................................................................42 4.4 Maintenance............................................................................................................................43 4.4.1 MPLS OAM ....................................................................................................................44 4.4.2 ETH-OAM ......................................................................................................................44 4.4.3 ATM OAM......................................................................................................................46 4.4.4 RMON ...........................................................................................................................46
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iv
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Contents
4.4.5 PRBS .............................................................................................................................47 4.4.6 CES Alarm Transmission....................................................................................................47 4.5 Synchronization .......................................................................................................................49 4.5.1 Synchronous Ethernet Clock ...............................................................................................49 4.5.2 CES ACR ........................................................................................................................49
5 TDM Functions and Features ................................................................................................... 51
5.1 TDM-Domain Access Capacity ...................................................................................................51 5.2 Service ........................................................................................................................51 5.3 Protection ....................................................................................................................52 5.3.1 SN .............................................................................................................................52 5.3.2 Ring MSP........................................................................................................................53 5.3.3 Linear MSP .....................................................................................................................55 5.4 Maintenance............................................................................................................................57 5.5 Synchronization .......................................................................................................................58
6 Networking and Application Scenarios ................................................................................. 59
6.1 Basic Network Topologies..........................................................................................................59 6.2 Typical Application of Hybrid Networking ....................................................................................60 6.3 Typical Application of Pure Packet Networking ..............................................................................61 6.4 Typical Application of TDM Networking ......................................................................................63
7 Security Management................................................................................................................. 65
7.1 Authentication Management .......................................................................................................65 7.2 Authorization Management ........................................................................................................65 7.3 Network Security Management ...................................................................................................66 7.4 System Security Management .....................................................................................................67 7.5 Log Management .....................................................................................................................67
8 Operation and Maintenance ..................................................................................................... 69
8.1 DCN......................................................................................................................................69 8.2 Equipment Maintenance ............................................................................................................70 8.3 Upgrade Methods .....................................................................................................................72 8.4 License Control........................................................................................................................74
9 Technical Specifications ............................................................................................................ 75
9.1 General Speci fications ...............................................................................................................75 9.2 Packet Performan ce Indicators ....................................................................................................76 9.3 TDM Perfo rmance Indicators ......................................................................................................81 9.4 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board ..............................................................................82 9.5 Optical Port Specifications .........................................................................................................82 9.6 Electrical Port Specifications ......................................................................................................87 9.7 Auxiliary Port Specifications ......................................................................................................89 9.8 Optical Module Specifications ....................................................................................................91 9.9 Indicator Status Explanation .......................................................................................................93
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Contents
9.10 Safety Certifi cation .................................................................................................................96 9.11 Environmental Specifications ....................................................................................................96 9.11.1 Storage Environment........................................................................................................97 9.11.2 Transportation Environment ..............................................................................................99 9.11.3 Operation Environment .................................................................................................. 101
10 Energy Saving and Environmental Protection .................................................................. 104
11 Standard Compliance ............................................................................................................. 105 11.1 ITU-T Recommendations ....................................................................................................... 105 11.2 IETF Standards..................................................................................................................... 108 11.3 IEEE Standards .................................................................................................................... 110 11.4 Environment Related Standards ............................................................................................... 111 11.5 MEF Standards..................................................................................................................... 112
A Glossary and Acronyms.......................................................................................................... 113
A.1 Numerics ............................................................................................................................. 114 A.2 A ........................................................................................................................................ 114 A.3 B ........................................................................................................................................ 117 A.4 C ........................................................................................................................................ 118 A.5 D........................................................................................................................................ 121 A.6 E ........................................................................................................................................ 123 A.7 F ........................................................................................................................................ 125 A.8 G........................................................................................................................................ 127 A.9 H........................................................................................................................................ 128 A.10 I ....................................................................................................................................... 129 A.11 J ....................................................................................................................................... 130 A.12 L....................................................................................................................................... 130 A.13 M...................................................................................................................................... 132 A.14 N ...................................................................................................................................... 134 A.15 O ...................................................................................................................................... 135 A.16 P....................................................................................................................................... 136 A.17 Q ...................................................................................................................................... 139 A.18 R ...................................................................................................................................... 139 A.19 S....................................................................................................................................... 141 A.20 T....................................................................................................................................... 145 A.21 U ...................................................................................................................................... 146 A.22 V ...................................................................................................................................... 147 A.23 W...................................................................................................................................... 147
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vi
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Figures
Figures Figure 1-1 Product positioning and typical application of the OptiX OSN 550........................................... 1 Figure 3-1 Block diagram...............................................................................................................11 Figure 3-2 Ventilation design of the OptiX OSN 550 ...........................................................................19 Figure 3-3 General architecture o f software .......................................................................................21 Figure 4-1 Typical application of service model 1 ...............................................................................26 Figure 4-2 Model of VLAN-bas ed E-Line services ..............................................................................27 Figure 4-3 Typical application of service model 1 ...............................................................................29 Figure 4-4 Typical application of service model 2 ...............................................................................29 Figure 4-5 Typical application of service model 3 ...............................................................................30 Figure 4-6 Typical application of service model 4 ...............................................................................30 Figure 4-7 Model of E-LAN services based on the 802.1d bridge...........................................................31 Figure 4-8 Model of E-LAN services based on 802.1q bridge................................................................32 Figure 4-9 Model of E-LAN services based on 802.1ad bridge ..............................................................34 Figure 4-10 E-Line services carried by PWs.......................................................................................35 Figure 4-11 UNI-UNI CES services..................................................................................................36 Figure 4-12 UNI-NNI CES services .................................................................................................36 Figure 4-13 Typical application of ATM PWE3 (in the one-to-one encapsulation mode) .............................37 Figure 4-14 Typical application of ATM PWE3 (in the N-to-one encapsulation mode)................................38 Figure 4-15 Application example of MPLS APS .................................................................................40 Figure 4-16 Application example of PW APS .....................................................................................41 Figure 4-17 Typical application of LPT .............................................................................................42 Figure 4-18 Link aggregation group .................................................................................................43 Figure 4-19 Application of IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah .................................................................45 Figure 4-20 Typical application of ATM OAM ...................................................................................46 Figure 4-21 CES alarm transparent transmission between AC sides ........................................................48 Figure 4-22 CES alarm transparent transmission from the NNI side to the AC side....................................48
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Figures
Figure 4-23 CES ACR clock solution................................................................................................50 Figure 5-1 Application of the SN .................................................................................................53 Figure 5-2 Two-fiber unidirectional ring MSP ....................................................................................54 Figure 5-3 Two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP ......................................................................................55 Figure 5-4 1+1 linear MSP .............................................................................................................56 Figure 5-5 1:N linear MSP..............................................................................................................57 Figure 6-1 Hybrid ring network .......................................................................................................60 Figure 6-2 Board configurations on each NE of the Hybrid ring network .................................................61 Figure 6-3 Pure packet network .......................................................................................................62 Figure 6-4 Board configurations on each NE of the pure packet network .................................................62 Figure 6-5 TDM network ...............................................................................................................63 Figure 6-6 Board configurations on each NE of the TDM network .........................................................64 Figure 7-1 Log transmission of the Syslog protocol .............................................................................68
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
viii
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Tables
Tables Table 2-1 Overview of the OptiX OSN 550......................................................................................... 3 Table 2-2 OptiX OSN 550 packet fun ctions and features ........................................................................ 5 Table 2-3 OptiX OSN 550 TDM functions and features ......................................................................... 9 Table 3-1 Function units of the OptiX OSN 550..................................................................................11 Table 3-2 Boards that the OptiX OSN 550 s .............................................................................13 Table 3-3 Description of labels ........................................................................................................19 Table 4-1 Packet-domain access cap acity o f the OptiX OSN 550............................................................24 Table 4-2 Point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service model ..................................................25 Table 4-3 Models of VLAN-b ased E-Line servi ces ..............................................................................26 Table 4-4 Models of QinQ-bas ed E-Line Services ...............................................................................27 Table 4-5 Model of E-LAN servi ces based on the 802.1d bridge ............................................................31 Table 4-6 Model of E-LAN servi ces based on 802.1q bridge .................................................................32 Table 4-7 Models of E-LAN servi ces based on 802.1ad bridge...............................................................33 Table 5-1 TDM-domain access capacity of the OptiX OSN 550 .............................................................51 Table 5-2 Service types ed by the OptiX OSN 550 in the TDM domain .........................................51 Table 6-1 Network topologies ed by OptiX OSN 550s and corresponding legends ...........................59 Table 8-1 DCN solutions that the OptiX OSN 550 s...................................................................69 Table 8-2 Maintenance fun ctions that the OptiX OSN 550 s ........................................................70 Table 8-3 Upgrade methods available for the OptiX OSN 550 ...............................................................73 Table 9-1 General speci fications of the OptiX OSN 550 .......................................................................75 Table 9-2 OptiX OSN 550 packet fun ctions and features .......................................................................76 Table 9-3 OptiX OSN 550 TDM functions and features ........................................................................81 Table 9-4 Power consumption and weight of boards ed by the OptiX OSN 550...............................82 Table 9-5 Specifi cations of OptiX OSN 550's STM-1 optical ports .........................................................83 Table 9-6 Specifi cations of OptiX OSN 550's STM-4 optical ports .........................................................83 Table 9-7 Specifi cations of OptiX OSN 550's STM-16 optical ports........................................................84
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ix
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Tables
Table 9-8 Specifi cations of FE optical ports of the OptiX OSN 550 ........................................................85 Table 9-9 Specifi cations of OptiX OSN 550's GE optical ports ..............................................................86 Table 9-10 Specifi cations of 10GE optical ports of the OptiX OSN 550...................................................86 Table 9-11 Specifications of OptiX OSN 550's E1/T1 electrical ports ......................................................87 Table 9-12 Specifi cations of OptiX OSN 550's E3/T3 electrical ports......................................................88 Table 9-13 Specifi cations of OptiX OSN 550's CES/ATM/IMA service electri cal ports...............................88 Table 9-14 Specifi cations of OptiX OSN 550's Ethernet electrical ports ...................................................89 Table 9-15 Specifi cations of external clock ports ed by the OptiX OSN 550 ...................................89 Table 9-16 Specifi cations of synch ronous data ports ed by the OptiX OSN 550...............................90 Table 9-17 Specifi cations of asyn chronous data ports ed by the OptiX OSN 550 .............................90 Table 9-18 Specifi cations of ord erwire ports ed by the OptiX OSN 550.........................................90 Table 9-19 Outdoor cabinet monitoring ports ed by the OptiX OSN 550........................................91 Table 9-20 SFP/eSFP Optical Modules That the OptiX OSN 550 s...............................................91 Table 9-21 XFP Optical Modules That the OptiX OSN 550 s ......................................................92 Table 9-22 Definitions of indicators ed by the boards on the OptiX OSN 550 .................................93 Table 9-23 Safety certi fications that the OptiX OSN 550 has ed .......................................................96 Table 9-24 Climate requirements for the storage envi ronment ................................................................97 Table 9-25 Density requirements for mechani cal active substances during storage .....................................98 Table 9-26 Density requirements for chemically active substances during storage......................................98 Table 9-27 Limitations for mech anical stress during storage ..................................................................98 Table 9-28 Climate requirements for the transport ation environment .......................................................99 Table 9-29 Density limitations for mechanically active substances during transportation ........................... 100 Table 9-30 Density limitations for chemically active substances ........................................................... 100 Table 9-31 Mechanical stress requirements for the transportation environment ........................................ 100 Table 9-32 Requirements for temperature and humidity...................................................................... 101 Table 9-33 Other climate requirements ............................................................................................ 102 Table 9-34 Density limitations for mechanically active substances during operation ................................. 102 Table 9-35 Density limitations for chemically active substances ........................................................... 103 Table 9-36 Limitations for mech anical stress during operation ............................................................. 103 Table 11-1 ITU-T recommendations ............................................................................................... 105 Table 11-2 IETF standards ............................................................................................................ 108 Table 11-3 IEEE standards ............................................................................................................ 110 Table 11-4 Environment related standards ........................................................................................ 111
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
x
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Tables
Table 11-5 MEF standards ............................................................................................................ 112
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xi
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
1
1 Product Positioning and Features
Product Positioning and Features
1.1 Product Positioning This section describes the product positioning and networking application. The OptiX OSN 550 is used at the access layer of a transmission network, ing MPLS-TP technology and a variety of service network topologies in the TDM and packet domains. For its product positioning and typical application, see Figure 1-1. Figure 1-1 Product positioning and typical application of the OptiX OSN 550 Access layer
Convergence node
Convergence/ Back bone layer
E1/T1 STM-1/ STM-4
E1/T1 FE E1/T1
E1/T1 TDM netw ork STM-1/ STM-4 FE/ GE
FE
ATM/IMA E1
FE/ GE
Pack et n etwo rk FE/GE
ATM/IMA E1 ATM/IMA E1 FE
OptiX OSN 550
OptiX OSN 3500
FE
NodeB
BTS
RNC
BSC
1.2 Product Characteristics This section describes the equipment characteristics in of structure, technology, and networking.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
1 Product Positioning and Features
Simple Structure and High Integration The OptiX OSN 550 is a chassis whose dimensions (H x W x D) are 88 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm. Of simple structure and high integration, the OptiX OSN 550 can be installed in the following ways:
Mounting in an European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ET SI) cabinet or a 19-inch cabinet) Mounting on the wall Mounting on the desk Mounting in an APM30 outdoor cabinet Mounting in an open rack
"CO Dual Core" Architecture and Multi-Service Transmission The OptiX OSN 550 allows service transmission in the time division multiplexing and packet domains, achieving smooth and gradual evolution from the TDM domain to the packet domain.
ATM E1/IMA E1/TDM E1 Service and Flexible Networking The OptiX OSN 550 s the circuit emulation service (CES) technology, allowing direct transmission of TDM E1 services in the packet domain. ATM is a connection-oriented, fast packet switching technology. Integrating the advantages of circuit switching with those of packet switching, ATM is a standard broadband integrated services digital network (B-ISDN) transfer mode. Inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) is a technology that implements inverse multiplexing for asynchronous transfer mode (ATM).
Various Types of Power Inputs The OptiX OSN 550 s the following types of power input:
-48 V/-60 V DC power input 110 V/220 V AC power input
High Temperature Tolerance The OptiX OSN 550 can tolerate high temperature. For example, the equipment tolerates an extended operating temperature of -5 °C to +65 °C when installed in an outdoor cabinet. Extended operating indicates that the successive operating time of the equipment does not exceed 4 hours, and the accumulated operating time per year does not exceed 90 days.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
2 Quick Referen ce
2
Quick Reference
This section describes the product overview, including product photos, hardware, software, and functions and features. Table 2-1 lists the overview of the OptiX OSN 550. Table 2-1 Overview of the OptiX OSN 550 Item
Description
Appearance
Board
PCX/MD1/EM6T /EM6F/EF8F/SL1D/SL4D/SL1Q/SP3D/PL3T/AUX/PIU /APIU/FAN
Packet Function and Feature
See T able 2-2.
TDM Function and Feature
See T able 2-3.
Switching Capacity
60/40/20 Gbit/s
Cross-connec t capacity Equipment-L evel Protection
Higher order cross-connect capacity: 20 Gbit/s
Lower order cross-connect capacity: 5 Gbit/s
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
1+1 backup for power supply 1+1 backup between active and standby system control, switching, and timing boards LAG protection of the ports on Ethernet boards Fan protection (The failure of a single fan does not affect the operation of the other fans.)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
2 Quick Referen ce
Item
Description
Intelligent fans
Intellectual adjustment of the fan speed. When the working temperature of the equipment is lower than the threshold (determined by the measured ambient temperature and the current fan speed), the fan speed automatically reduces to the lowest.
Management ports and auxiliary ports
Interface Type
Description
Connector
Clock port
120-ohm external clock port, which can work in 2048 kbit/s mode or 2048 kHz mode.
RJ-45
Power supply port
Power supply port connecting to one -48/-60 V DC power supply
2 mm HM connector
T wo 100/240 V AC power supply ports
Three-phase socket
Network management port
Ethernet NM port/NM serial port, which is connected to the network management system (NMS)
RJ-45
Alarm input/output port
Alarm input/output
RJ-45
64 kbit/s synchronous data or orderwire byte transparent transmission port/19.2 kbit/s asynchronous data or orderwire byte transparent transmission port
One 64 kbit/s synchronous serial port, and one F2 transparent data port, which transparently transmits one channel of data services.
RJ-45
Orderwire phone port
Used to provide voice communication for operation personnel or maintenance personnel at different workstations.
RJ-45
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
2 Quick Referen ce
Table 2-2 OptiX OSN 550 packet functions and features Item
Description
MPLS suppo rt capab ility
The packet switching unit of the PCX board works with a service board to implement MPLS functions. Setup mode: static LSPs
PWE3 suppo rt capab ility
The packet switching unit of the PCX board works with a service board to implement PWE3 functions. Service categories − TDM PWE3 (CES) services − ATM PWE3 services − ETH PWE3 services Setup mode: static PWs Protection: 1:1 PW APS OAM: − the ping and traceroute commands of PWs, the virtual circuit connectivity verification (VCCV) command. − s PW OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.1711. s MS-PWs.
Servic e
Service Type
Protection: 1:1 MPLS tunnel APS OAM: − s MPLS OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.1711. − s LSP ping and LSP traceroute functions.
Description
Etherne s Native ETH t and ETH PWE3 service services. Format of Ethernet data frames: IEEE
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Maximum Re ceiving Capability
Service Port Descriptio n
Connector
FE (electrical port): 36
10/100BAS RJ-45 E-TX
FE (optical port): 48
100Base-F X
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LC
5
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Item
2 Quick Referen ce
Description
802.3 and Ethernet 10GE II (optical Jumbo frames port) MTU length: 1518 PCXLX/ bytes to 9600 bytes PCXX: 2 (1620 bytes, by default) MPLS function VLAN function . The VLAN IDs range from 1 to 4094. QinQ Size of a MAC address table: 16 KB (including static entries)
GE (optical port) PCXLG/ PCXGA/ PCXGB: 14
GE (electrical port): 12 CES service
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Service type: 192xE1 point-to-point service Encapsulation types: CESoPSN SAToP Compression of idle timeslots: ed (only for CESoPSN encapsulation) Jitter compensation buffering time: 375 us to 16000 us Packet loading time: 125 us to 5000 us CES ACR: ed Retiming: ed
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10GBAS E-LR (LAN) 10GBAS E-LW (WAN) 10GBAS E-ER (LAN) 10GBAS E-EW (WAN) 10GBAS E-ZR (LAN) 10GBAS E-ZW (WAN)
LC
1000Base -LX 1000Base -VX 1000Base -ZX
LC
10/100/100 0BASE-TX
RJ-45
75/120-oh m smart E1 port
Anea 96
6
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Item
2 Quick Referen ce
Description ATM/I MA service
Number of ATM connections: 256 ATM traffic management
192xE1
75/120-oh m smart E1 port
Anea 96
ATM encapsulation format N-to-one VPC N-to-one VCC One-to-one VPC One-to-one VCC Maximum number of concatenated ATM cells: 31 ATM OAM: F4 (VP layer) and F5 (VC layer) Maximum number of IMA groups: 32 Maximum number of in an IMA group: 16 Protec tion
MPLS APS
Maximum number of protection groups: 64 Switching duration not more than 100 ms
NOTE MP LS AP S and P W AP S share 64 protection group resources.
PW APS
Maximum number of protection groups: 64 Switching duration not more than 100 ms
NOTE MP LS AP S and P W AP S share 64 protection group resources.
MSTP
s the MSTP protocol that generates only the CIST . The MSTP protocol provides functions equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.
LPT
LAG
Maint enanc e
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
MPLS OAM
Point-point and point-multipoint LPT Switching duration not more than 5s Intra-board LAG and inter-board LAG A maximum of 16 LAGs. Each LAG has a maximum of 8 . Switching duration not more than 500 ms T unnel OAM and PW OAM Maximum number of MPLS OAM resources: 128
NOTE MP LS OAM and P W OAM share 128 OAM resources.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Item
2 Quick Referen ce
Description ETH-O AM
s the following IEEE 802.1ag OAM functions: − Management of OAM maintenance points − Continuity check (CC) − Loopback (LB)
Link trace (LT) s the following IEEE 802.3ah OAM functions: − OAM auto-discovery − Link performance monitoring − Fault detection − Loopback at the remote end − Self-loop detection and self-looped port blocking Number of MD/MA/MEP: 64 −
Synch roniza tion
ATM OAM
Maximum number of ATM connections: 256
RMON
s port-level and service-level RMON functions, in compliance with RFC 2819. s four RMON management groups: Ethernet statistics group, Ethernet history group, Ethernet alarm group, and Ethernet history control group. Port level: Basic Ethernet performance Extended Ethernet performance Service level: L2VPN T unnel PW
Synchr onous Etherne t clock
CES ACR
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Synchronous Ethernet that complies with ITU-T G.8261 and ITU-T G.8262. Port receiving/transmitting synchronous Ethernet clocks: FE/GE/10GE Input/Output of SSM packets Clock frequency stability (hold-over mode): less than 50 ppb Maximum number of CES ACR clocks: 4 The clock performance complies with the ITU-T G.823 Traffic template. Tributary retiming.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
2 Quick Referen ce
Item
Description
Other s
QoS
DiffServ s simple traffic classification by specifying PHB service classes for service flows based on their QoS information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DS values, or MPLS EXP values) carried by the packets. Complex traffic classification s traffic classification based on C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DS values carried by packets. CAR Provides the CAR function for the traffic flows at ports. Shaping s traffic shaping for a specific port, prioritized queue, or traffic flow. Queue scheduling policies − SP − WRR −
SP+WRR
Table 2-3 OptiX OSN 550 TDM functions and features Item
Description
Service
Service Type
SDH service
PDH service
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Re ceiving Capability
Service Port Description
Connector
26xSTM-1
S-1.1, L-1.1 and L-1.2 optical ports
LC
14xSTM-4
S-4.1, L-4.1 and L-4.2 optical ports
LC
14xSTM-16
S-16.1, L-16.1 and L-16.2 optical ports
LC
252xE1/T1
E1(75/120-oh m)/T1(100-oh m)electrical port
Anea 96
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Item
Description
Protection
SN
2 Quick Referen ce
MSP Ring
Linear MSP
Maintena nce Synchroni zation
PRBS
MSP Ring at the STM-1, ST M-4 and STM-16 levels Maximum number of protection groups: 13 Switching duration not more than 50 ms Linear MSP at the STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16 levels Maximum number of 1+1/1:1 Linear MSP protection groups: 13 Switching duration not more than 50 ms
ed
Physical layer clocks, including line clocks, tributary clocks, and two-input and two-output external clocks. The port impedance is 120 ohms or 75 ohms (a converter can be used to provide a 75-ohm clock port). Non-synchronization status message (SSM), standard SSM, and extended SSM protocols Tributary retiming
Tracing mode, hold-over mode, and free-run mode
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
SN at the VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 levels Maximum number of protection groups: 1032 Switching duration not more than 50 ms
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
3 Product Architecture
3
Product Architecture
3.1 System Architecture The OptiX OSN 550 is a dual-domain (TDM and packet domains) device. This section describes its function units and the relationship between these units. The OptiX OSN 550 consists of the following function units: service interface unit, timeslot cross-connect unit, packet switching unit, control unit, clock unit, auxiliary interface unit, fan unit, and power supply unit. Figure 3-1 Block diagram Timeslot cro ssconnect unit
VC-4 signal FE/GE
Service interface unit
E1 (TDM/CES/ATM/IMA) STM-1/4
Ethernet signal
Orderwire External alarm Synchrono us/Asynchronous data
Auxiliary interface unit
Clo ck unit
Packet switching unit
Co ntro l unit
Fan unit
NM data
Contro l and overhead bus
Power supply unit
-48 V/-60 V DC
Table 3-1 Function units of the OptiX OSN 550 Function Unit Service interface unit
Function
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Transmits/Receives TDM E1/T1/E3/T3 signals. Transmits/Receives ATM/IMA E1 signals. Transmits/Receives STM-1/4/16 signals. Transmits/Receives Ethernet signals. Performs E1/ATM/Ethernet PWE3 emulation.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Function Unit Timeslot cross-connect unit Packet switching unit
3 Product Architecture
Function
Control unit
Clock unit
Auxiliary interface unit
Power supply unit Fan unit
Provides the cross-connect function and grooms TDM services. Processes Ethernet services and forwards packets. Processes MPLS labels and forwards packets. Processes PW labels and forwards packets. Performs system communication and control. Configures and manages the system. Collects alarms and monitors performance. Processes overhead bytes. Traces clock sources and provides clock signals for the system. Provides the input/output port for external clocks. Provides the orderwire phone port. Provides the synchronous/asynchronous data port. Provides the external alarm input/output port.
Connects to -48 V/-60 V DC power supplies. Connects to 110 to 220 V AC power supplies.
Cools the NE.
3.2 Hardware Structure This section describes the structure of the chassis, applicable boards, and equipment labels.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
3 Product Architecture
Chassis Structure and Board Installation Area
Board installation a rea
H D
W
4
1
SLOT SLOT 10 91 SLOT (PI U) SLOT (PIU) 93 11 SLOT SLOT (FAN) (FA N) 929 (PI U) (PIU)
SLOT 7 (CS T/CSH) SLOT 7 (PCX)
S LOT 88(CST/CSH) SLOT (PCX)
SLOT SLOT 5 (EX 5 (EXT) T)
SLOT SLOT6 6 (EX (EXT) T)
SLOT 3 (EX T) SLOT 3 (EXT)
SLOT 4 4 (E XT) SLOT (EXT)
SLOT 1 (EXT ) SLOT 1 ( EXT)
SLOT 2 2 (EX T) SLOT ( EXT)
2 3
1 Power supply boards 2
Fan board
3 4
Ext ended boards S ystem con trol, switching, a nd timing bo ards
Boards Table 3-2 lists the boards that the OptiX OSN 550 s. Table 3-2 Boards that the OptiX OSN 550 s Board Classif ication
Board Acron ym
System TNM1 control, PCXL switchin X g, and timing board
Board Name Cross-co nnect, timing and line board
Function
Service Type
Port Type
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
s the 60 Gbit/s packet switching function. s the 20 Gbit/s higher
Native Ethernet services Point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service VLAN-based E-Line service QinQ-based E-Line
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port) One ST M-1/STM-4/STM-1 6 SFP optical port. The optical port type can be S-1.1, L-1.1, S-4.1, L-4.1, S-16.1, L-16.1, or L-16.2.
Valid Slot Slots 7 and 8
13
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Board Classif ication
Board Acron ym
Board Name
Function
TNM1 PCXX
Cross-co nnect, timing, system control, and line board
TNM1 PCXL G
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Cross-co nnect, timing, system control, and line board
order cross-conn ect capacity, 5 Gbit/s lower order cross-conn ect capacity. Performs system communic ation and control. s the 60 Gbit/s packet switching function. s the 20 Gbit/s higher order cross-conn ect capacity, 5 Gbit/s lower order cross-conn ect capacity. Performs system communic ation and control. s the 40 Gbit/s packet switching function. s the 20
3 Product Architecture
Service Type
service E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1d bridges E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1q bridges E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges ETH PWE3 services ST M-1/STM-4/STM -16 services
Native Ethernet services
Point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service VLAN-based E-Line service QinQ-based E-Line service E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1d bridges E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
Port Type
Valid Slot
One 10GE (XFP) optical port 10GBASE-LR (LAN)/10GBASE-LW (WAN)/10GBASE-ER (LAN)/10GBASE-EW (WAN)/10GBASE-ZR (LAN)/10GBASE-ZW (WAN)
One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port) One 10GE (XFP) optical port 10GBASE-LR (LAN)/10GBASE-LW (WAN)/10GBASE-ER (LAN)/10GBASE-EW (WAN)/10GBASE-ZR (LAN)/10GBASE-ZW (WAN)
Slots 7 and 8
One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port) One ST M-1/STM-4/STM-1 6 SFP optical port. The optical port type can be S-1.1, L-1.1, S-4.1,
Slots 7 and 8
E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges ETH PWE3 services
Native Ethernet services Point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service VLAN-based E-Line service
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Board Classif ication
Board Acron ym
Board Name
Function
TNM1 PCXG A
Cross-co nnect, timing, system control, and line board
TNM1 PCXG B
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Cross-co nnect, timing, system control, and line
Gbit/s higher order cross-conn ect capacity, 5 Gbit/s lower order cross-conn ect capacity. Performs system communic ation and control. s the 40 Gbit/s packet switching function. s the 20 Gbit/s higher order cross-conn ect capacity, 5 Gbit/s lower order cross-conn ect capacity. Performs system communic ation and control. s the 20 Gbit/s packet switching function.
3 Product Architecture
Service Type
Port Type
QinQ-based E-Line service E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1d bridges E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1q bridges E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges ETH PWE3 services ST M-1/STM-4/STM -16 services
Native Ethernet services Point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service VLAN-based E-Line service QinQ-based E-Line service E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1d bridges E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1q bridges E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges ETH PWE3 services
Native Ethernet services Point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Valid Slot
L-4.1, S-16.1, L-16.1, or L-16.2. One GE (SFP) optical port 1000BASE-LX/VX/ZX
One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port) One GE (SFP) optical port 1000BASE-LX/VX/ZX
Slots 7 and 8
One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port) One GE (SFP) optical port 1000BASE-LX/VX/ZX
Slots 7 and 8
15
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Board Classif ication
Board Acron ym
Board Name board
Function
Service Type
Packet processi ng board
s the 20 Gbit/s higher order cross-conn ect capacity, 5 Gbit/s lower order cross-conn ect capacity. Performs system communic ation and control.
TNM1 MD1
32xSmar t E1 service processi ng board
Transmits/R eceives E1 signals.
TNM1 EM6T
6xRJ45 FE/GE processi ng board
Transmits/R eceives FE/GE service signals and works with the packet switching unit to process the received FE/GE service signals.
TNM1 EM6F
TNM1 EF8F
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
4xRJ45 and 2xSFP FE/GE processi ng board
8xFE Ethernet
3 Product Architecture
Transmits/R eceives FE
Port Type
Valid Slot
75/120-ohm E1 port
Slots 1 to 6
VLAN-based E-Line service QinQ-based E-Line service E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1d bridges E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1q bridges E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges ETH PWE3 services
CES E1 ATM/IMA E1
Native Ethernet services Point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service VLAN-based E-Line service QinQ-based E-Line service
E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1d bridges E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1q bridges E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges ETH PWE3 services
Native Ethernet services
Four FE electrical Slots 1 ports: 10/100BASE-TX to 6 T wo GE electrical ports (compatible with FE electrical ports): 10/100/1000BASE-TX Four FE electrical ports: 10/100BASE-TX Provides two ports through the SFP module. The types of SFP module include 1000BASE-LX/VX/ZX .
8xFE optical port: 100BASE-FX
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Slots 1 to 6
Slots 1 to 6
16
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Board Classif ication
Board Acron ym
Board Name
Function
processi ng board
service signals and works with the packet switching unit to process the received FE service signals.
3 Product Architecture
Service Type
Port Type
Valid Slot
Point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service VLAN-based E-Line service QinQ-based E-Line service E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1d bridges E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1q bridges E-LAN service based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges ETH PWE3 services
SDH board
PDH board
Auxiliar y board
TNH2S 2xSTML1D 1 interface board
Transmits/R eceives 2xSTM-1 optical signals.
ST M-1 service
2xSTM-1 optical ports
Slots 1 to 6
TNH2S 2xSTML4D 4 interface board
Transmits/R eceives 2xSTM-4 optical signals.
ST M-4 service
2xSTM-4 optical ports
Slots 1 and 6
TNH2S 4xSTML1Q 1 interface board
Transmits/R eceives 4xSTM-1 optical signals.
ST M-1 service
4xSTM-1 optical ports
Slots 1 to 6
TNH2S 42xE1/T P3D 1 tributary board
Transmits/R eceives E1/T1 signals.
E1/T1 service
42x75-/120-ohm E1 ports or 42x100-ohm T1 ports
Slots 1 to 6
TNH2P L3T
3xE3/T3 tributary board
Transmits/R eceives E3/T3 signals.
E3/T3 service
3x75-ohm E3/T3 ports
Slots 1 to 6
TNM1 AUX
Auxiliar y interface
Provides the system with one orderwire
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Orderwire phone Asynchronous data service
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
One orderwire phone port One asynchronous data
Slots 1 to 6
17
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Board Classif ication
Power supply board
Fan board
Board Acron ym
Board Name
Function
board
phone port, one synchronous data port, one asynchronou s data port, and one 6-input/2-ou tput external alarm port.
3 Product Architecture
Service Type
Port Type
port One asynchronous data port 4-input/2-output external alarm port
TND1P IU
Power supply board
Provides one N/A -48 V/-60 V DC power supply.
Provides -48 V/-60 V DC power supply ports.
TNF1A PIU
Power supply board
Connects to 110-220 V AC power supplies.
N/A
Provides 100/240 V AC power supply ports.
Cools the NE.
N/A
TNM1 FAN
Fan board
Valid Slot
Slots 91 and 92
N/A
Slots 2 and 4 Slots 4 and 6 (reco mme nded )
Slot 93
Ventilation Design The case of the OptiX OSN 550 is densely covered with small air holes. Through these holes, air is let in from the left and out from the right by fans. Ensure the smooth flow of air inside and around the equipment. Do not block the air inlet and air outlet of the subrack when cabling. Keep the top of subrack clean.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
3 Product Architecture
Figure 3-2 Ventilation design of the OptiX OSN 550
AIR OUT
AIR IN
Description of Labels Table 3-3 lists the description of the labels on the chassis and the boards in the chassis. The actual labels may be different depending on the configurations of the chassis and boards. Table 3-3 Description of labels Label
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Label Name
Description
ESD protection label
Indicates that the equipment is sensitive to static electricity.
Grounding label
Indicates the grounding position of the chassis.
Fan warning label
Indicates that the fan leaves cannot be touched when the fan is rotating.
Power port warning label
Indicates that you must read the operation instructions before connecting a power cable.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
19
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Label 合 格证/QU ALIFICA TION CA RD
3 Product Architecture
Label Name
Description
Qualification card
Indicates that the equipment is qualified.
RoHS label
Indicates that the equipment contains certain hazardous substances specified in RoHS. The equipment needs to be recycled after the environment-frien dly use period of 50 years expires.
Product nameplate label
Indicates the product name and certification.
HUAWEI 华为技术有限公司
中国制作
HUAW EI TECHNOL OGIES CO. L , TD.
MADE N I C HINA
50
DC power
AC power
3.3 Software Architecture This section describes the system's general software architecture, as well as the functions of each software module. 3.3.1 Overview of Software Architecture The software system is of a modular structure. The modules accomplish the corresponding functions and interoperate with each other. 3.3.2
Communication Protocols and Interfaces
The communication interfaces on the equipment are mainly Qx interfaces. For the description of the protocol stacks and messages on the Qx interfaces, see ITU-T G.773, ITU-T Q.811, and ITU-T Q.812. 3.3.3
Board Software
This section describes the software architecture of the OptiX OSN 550.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
20
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
3 Product Architecture
3.3.4 NE Software The NE software manages, monitors, and controls the running of boards in the NE. In addition, the NE software serves as the service unit for the communication between the NMS and boards. In this manner, the NMS can control and manage the NE. 3.3.5 NMS Software Like other optical transmission equipment, the OptiX OSN 550 is managed by the iManager series NMS.
3.3.1 Overview of Software Architecture The software system is of a modular structure. The modules accomplish the corresponding functions and interoperate with each other. The software modules fall into three types: the board software that runs on a variety of functional boards, the NE software that runs on the system control and communication board, and the network management software that runs on the network management computer. The software system is of layered design. That is, each layer performs specific functions and serves its upper layer. Figure 3-3 shows the general structure of software. All the modules except the network management system and the board software are NE software. Figure 3-3 General architecture of software Network Management System
High Level Communication Module Real-time multi-task operating system
Network side Module Equipment Management Module
Database Management Module
Communication Module NE software
Board Software
3.3.2 Communication Protocols and Interfaces The communication interfaces on the equipment are mainly Qx interfaces. For the description of the protocol stacks and messages on the Qx interfaces, see ITU-T G.773, ITU-T Q.811, and ITU-T Q.812.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
21
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
3 Product Architecture
A Qx interface mainly connects a mediation device (MD), Q adaptation (QA), or network element (NE) with an operations system (OS) through the local communication network (LCN). A QA interface is provided at the NE management layer, and an MD and OS are provided at the network management layer. As specified in the Recommendation, a Qx interface is developed in compliance with the Connectionless Network LayerService (CLNS1) based on T /IP. A Qx interface s the remote access of NMS through a modem, and the IP layer uses the Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP) accordingly.
3.3.3 Board Software This section describes the software architecture of the OptiX OSN 550.
3.3.4 NE Software The NE software manages, monitors, and controls the running of boards in the NE. In addition, the NE software serves as the service unit for the communication between the NMS and boards. In this manner, the NMS can control and manage the NE. In compliance with ITU-T M.3010, the NE software belongs to the element management layer in the telecommunications management network (TMN), and provides NE functions, some coordination functions, and operations system functions at the network element layer. The data communication function (DCF) provides communication functions between the NE and other components (including mediation devices, NMS, and other NEs).
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Real-time multi-task operating system The real-time multi-task operating system of the NE software is responsible for the management of public resources and s applications. This system provides an application execution environment that is independent of the processor hardware, to separate applications from the processor. Communication and control module The Communication and control module is the interface module between the NE software and the board software. According to the corresponding communication protocol, the communication and control module achieves the communication between the NE software and the board software. In this manner, the information can be exchanged and the equipment can be maintained. On one hand, the communication and control module issues the maintenance operation commands of the NE software to the boards. On the other hand, it reports the status, alarms, and performance events of the boards to the NE software. Network side (NS) module The network side (NS) module is between the communication module and equipment management module. It converts the data format between the operation side on the application layer and the NE equipment management layer, and provides security control for the NE layer. The NS module can be subdivided into three submodules in of function: Qx interface module, command line interface module, and security management module. Equipment management module The equipment management module (AM) is the kernel of the NE software. It implements NE management, and includes the Manager and the Agent. The Manager sends network management operation commands and receives event information. The Agent responds to the network management operation commands sent by the Manager, performs operations to managed objects, and reports events according to the status change of the managed objects. Communication module
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
22
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
3 Product Architecture
This module fulfills the message communication function (MCF) of the functional blocks of the transmission network equipment. Through the hardware interface provided by the SCB board, the communication module transmits the OAM&P information and exchanges management information between the NMS and NEs, and between NEs themselves. The communication module consists of network communication module, serial communication module, and ECC communication module. Database management module The database management module is a principal component of the NE software. It consists of the data and the programs. The data, organized by database form, consists of the network database, alarm database, performance database, and equipment database. The program manages and accesses the data in the databases.
3.3.5 NMS Software Like other optical transmission equipment, the OptiX OSN 550 is managed by the iManager series NMS. The NMS manages the optical transport network, and maintains all the OSN, SDH, Metro, and DWDM equipment on networks. The NMS, which complies with the ITU-T Recommendations, adopts a standard management information model and the object-oriented management technology. The NMS exchanges information with the NE software through the communication module to monitor and manage the network equipment. The NMS software runs on a workstation or PC. It manages the equipment and the transmission network. The NMS software provides the operation and maintenance function for the transmission equipment, and also provides the management capability for the transmission network. The NMS software has the following management functions:
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Alarm management: collects, prompts, filters, browses, acknowledges, checks, clears, counts alarms in real time, inserts alarms, analyzes alarm correlation, and diagnoses faults. Performance management: sets performance monitoring; browses, analyses and prints performance data; forecasts medium- and long-term performance; resets the performance . Configuration management: configures and manages the ports, clocks, services, trails, subnets, and time. Security management: NM management; NE management; NE management; NE lockout; NE setting lockout; and local craft terminal (LCT) access control. Maintenance management: performs loopbacks; resets boards; automatically shuts down lasers; detects fiber power; collects equipment data. In this manner, the maintenance personnel can locate and rectify equipment faults more quickly.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
23
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4
4 Packet Functions and Features
Packet Functions and Features
4.1 Packet-Domain Access Capacity This section provides the packet-domain access capacities when different system control, switching, and timing boards are configured in the OptiX OSN 550. Table 4-1 lists the packet-domain access capacities when different system control, switching, and timing boards are configured in the OptiX OSN 550. Table 4-1 Packet-domain access capacity of the OptiX OSN 550 Board
10xGE (Optical Port)
GE (Optical Port)
GE (Electrica l Port)
FE (Optical Port)
FE ATM/IM (Electrica A/E1 CES l Port)
PCXLX
2
12
12
48
36
192
PCXX
2
12
12
48
36
192
PCXLG
0
14
12
48
36
192
PCXGA
0
14
12
48
36
192
PCXGB
0
14
12
48
36
192
4.2 Service This section describes Ethernet services, CES services, and ATM/IMA services in the packet domain. 4.2.1 Native Ethernet Services Based on the packet plane, Native Ethernet services are classified into six types. 4.2.2 ETH PWE3 Services In the topology, the E-Line services are point-to-point services. The E-Line services realize the point-to-point transmission of Ethernet services.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
24
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4.2.3
4 Packet Functions and Features
CES Services
CES: By using the PWE3 technology, PWE3 packet headers are added to TDM traffic to create circuit emulation services (CES). PWE3 packet headers carry the frame format information, alarm information, signaling information, and synchronization and timing information of the TDM traffic. The encapsulated PW packets are transmitted over the MPLS tunnel on the PSN. After being decapsulated at the PW egress, the TDM circuit switched service traffic is re-created. On a packet switching network, the transmit and receive ends of a CES service maintain clock synchronization by means of adaptive clock recovery (ACR). 4.2.4 ATM/IMA Services This section provides the definition of ATM PWE3 and describes its purpose.
4.2.1 Native Ethernet Services Based on the packet plane, Native Ethernet services are classified into six types.
Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line Service The point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line services are the basic E-Line model. Point-to-point transmission does not involve service bandwidth sharing, service isolation, or service distinguishing; instead, Ethernet services are transparently transmitted between two service access points.
Service Model Table 4-2 describes the point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service model. Table 4-2 Point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service model Service Model
Encapsulation Type
Service Direction
Traffic Flow
Description
Model 1
Null (source) Null (sink)
UNI-UNI
PORT (source) PORT (sink)
The source port transparently transmits all the received Ethernet frames to the sink port.
Model 2
802.1Q (source) 802.1Q (sink)
UNI-UNI
PORT (source) PORT (sink)
The source port processes the incoming Ethernet frames based on its TAG attribute, and then sends the processed Ethernet frames to the sink port. The sink port processes the Ethernet frames based on its TAG attribute, and then exports the processed Ethernet frames.
In service model 2, ports process the received Ethernet frames according to their TAG attributes. Therefore, service model 2 is not a real transparent transmission model and is not recommended.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
25
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
Typical Application Figure 4-1 shows the typical application of service model 1. Figure 4-1 Typical application of service model 1 NE 1 Port 1 Service 1
NE 2 Port 3
E-Line E-Line
Servic e 2
Port 3 Transmission Network
Port 2
Port 4
E-Line
Port 1 Service 1
E-Line Port 4
Servic e 2 Port 2
In service model 1, Ethernet service 1 and Ethernet service 2, which carry no VLAN ID or carry unknown VLAN IDs, are accessed to NE1 through port 1 and port 2 respectively. Port 1 and port 2 transparently transmit Ethernet service 1 and Ethernet service 2 to port 3 and port 4, respectively. Port 3 and port 4 then transmit Ethernet service 1 and Ethernet service 2 to NE2. Service processing on NE2 is the same as on NE1. In service model 2, Ethernet service 1 and Ethernet service 2, which carry no VLAN ID or carry unknown VLAN IDs, are accessed to NE1 through port 1 and port 2 respectively. Port 1 and Port 2 process the incoming packets based on their TAG attributes. Then, Port 1 and Port 2 send Ethernet service 1 and Ethernet service 2 to Port 3 and Port 4 respectively. Port 3 and Port 4 process the incoming packets based on their TAG attributes. Then, Port 3 and Port 4 send Ethernet service 1 and Ethernet service 2 to NE2. Service processing on NE2 is the same as on NE1.
VLAN-based E-Line Services VLANs can be used to separate E-Line services. With the VLAN technology, multiple E-Line services can share one physical channel. These services are VLAN-based E-Line services.
Models of Services Table 4-3 shows the models of VLAN-based E-Line services. Table 4-3 Models of VLAN-based E-Line services Type of Service
Encapsulation Mode of Port
Direction of Flow of Service Description of Service Service
VLAN-based E-Line services
802.1Q (source) 802.1Q (sink)
UNI-UNI
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
PORT +VLAN (source) PORT +VLAN (sink)
The source port processes the incoming Ethernet frames based on its TAG attribute, and then sends the Ethernet frames with a specific VLAN NOTE ID to the sink port. The sink The VLAN ID of port processes the Ethernet the source and the frames based on its TAG VLAN ID of the attribute, and then exports the sink must be the processed Ethernet frames. same.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
26
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
Typical Applications Figure 4-2 shows the typical application of VLAN-based E-Line services. Service 1 and Service 2 carry different VLAN IDs. Therefore, after the two Ethernet services are accessed to NE1 through Port 1 and Port 2 respectively, they can share the same transmission channel at Port 3. On NE1, Port 1 and Port 2 process the incoming packets based on their own TAG attributes. Then, Port 1 and Port 2 send Service 1 and Service 2 to Port 3. Port 3 processes all the outgoing packets based on its TAG attribute, and then sends Service 1 and Service 2 to NE2. Due to the different VLAN IDs, Service 1 and Service 2 can be transmitted through Port 3 at the same time. NE2 processes Service 1 and Service 2 in the same manner as NE1. Figure 4-2 Model of VLAN-based E-Line services NE 1 Service 1 VLAN ID: 100 Service 2 VLAN ID: 200
Po rt 1
Port 2
E-Line
e E- Lin
NE 2 Port 1 Po rt 3
Transmission Ne twork
Service 1 VLAN ID: 100 Service 2 VLAN ID: 2 00
Po rt 3 Service 1 VLAN ID: 100 Se rvice 2 VLAN I D: 200
E- Lin e
Service 1 VLAN ID: 100
E-Lin e
Service 2 Port 2 VLAN ID: 2 00
QinQ-Based E-Line Services S-VLAN tags can be used to isolate E-Line services. Therefore, multiple E-Line services can share one physical channel. These services are QinQ-based E-Line services. E-Line Services Carried on P Ws describes QinQ-based E-Line services carried by P Ws.
Model of Service Table 4-4 shows the models of QinQ-based E-Line services. Table 4-4 Models of QinQ-based E-Line Services Model of Service
Encapsulation Mode of a Port
Direction
Flow of Service Description of Service
Model 1
Null (source) QinQ (sink)
UNI-NNI
PORT (source) QinQ link (sink)
The source port adds the S-VLAN tag that corresponds to the QinQ link to all the Ethernet frames, and then transmits the Ethernet frames to the sink port where the QinQ link is configured.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
27
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
Model of Service
Encapsulation Mode of a Port
Direction
Flow of Service Description of Service
Model 2
802.1Q (source) a QinQ (sink)
UNI-NNI
PORT (source) QinQ link (sink)
The source port accesses only the Ethernet frames that carry C-VLAN tags. It adds the S-VLAN tag that corresponds to the QinQ link to all the Ethernet frames, and then transmits the Ethernet frames to the sink port where the QinQ link is configured.
Model 3
802.1Q (source) a QinQ (sink)
UNI-NNI
PORT +C-VLAN (source) QinQ link (sink)
The source port adds the S-VLAN tag that corresponds to the QinQ link to all the Ethernet frames that carry specific C-VLAN tags, and then transmits the Ethernet frames to the sink port where the QinQ link is configured.
Model 4
QinQ (sink) QinQ (sink)
NNI-NNI
QinQ link (source) QinQ link (sink)
The source port transmits the Ethernet frames that carry the S-VLAN tag to the sink port where the sink QinQ link is configured. The S-VLAN tag carried in the Ethernet frames corresponds to the source QinQ link. If the source and sink QinQ links correspond to different S-VLAN tags, the S-VLAN tags carried in the Ethernet frames are exchanged.
a: Set TAG to Tag Aware.
Typical Applications Figure 4-3 shows the typical application of service model 1. Service 1 and Service 2 include tagged frames and untagged frames. Service 1 is accessed to NE1 through Port 1, and Service 2 is accessed to NE1 through Port 2. Port 1 adds the corresponding S-VLAN tag to Service 1, and Port 2 adds the corresponding S-VLAN tag to Service 2. Then, Service 1 and Service 2 are transmitted to Port 3. Port 3 transmits Service 1 and Service 2 to NE2. NE2 processes Service 1 and Service 2 in the same manner as NE1.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
28
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
Figure 4-3 Typical application of service model 1 NE 1 Port 1 Service 1
NE 2
E -L in e
Service 2 Port 2
Strip S-VLAN Label
Transmission Network
Port 3
Port 3
E -L in
e E- Lin
Add S-VLAN Label
Port 1
E- Lin e
Add S-VLAN Label
Service 1 Service 2
e
Port 2
Strip S-VLAN Label
D ata( 1)
S-VLAN(300)
Data(1)
S-VLAN(300)
Data(1)
Data(1)
Data (2)
S-VLAN(400)
Data(2)
S-VLAN(400)
Data(2)
D ata(2)
Figure 4-4 shows the typical application of service model 2. Service 1 and Service 2 carry different unknown C-VLAN tags. Service 1 is accessed to NE1 through Port 1, and Service 2 is accessed to NE1 through Port 2. Port 1 adds the corresponding S-VLAN tag to Service 1, and Port 2 adds the corresponding S-VLAN tag to Service 2. Then, Service 1 and Service 2 are transmitted to Port 3. Port 3 transmits Service 1 and Service 2 to NE2. NE2 processes Service 1 and Service 2 in the same manner as NE1. Figure 4-4 Typical application of service model 2 Strip S- VLAN Label
Add S-VLAN Label
C-V LAN
Data( 1)
S-V LAN(300)
C-VLAN
Data(1)
C-V LAN
Data(2)
S-V LAN(400)
C-VLAN
Data(2)
NE 1 Port 1 Service 1 Unknown CVLAN Service 2 Unknown CVLAN
Port 2
NE 2
E -Li ne
E -Lin
Port 1 Port 3
Transmission Network
E -Lin
e
Add S-V LAN Label S -VLAN(300)
C- VLA N
S -VLAN(400)
C-VLA N
Service 1 U nknown CVLAN
E -Line
Port 3
Data(1) Data(2)
e
Port 2
Service 2 Unknown CVLAN
S trip S-VLAN Label C- VLA N
Data( 1)
C- VLA N
Data(2)
Figure 4-5 shows the typical application of service model 3. Service 1 and Service 2 carry different C-VLAN tags. Service 1 is accessed to NE1 through Port 1, and Service 2 is accessed to NE1 through Port 2. Port 1 adds the corresponding S-VLAN tag to Service 1, and Port 2 adds the corresponding S-VLAN tag to Service 2. Then, Service 1 and Service 2 are transmitted to Port 3. Port 3 transmits Service 1 and Service 2 to NE2. NE2 processes Service 1 and Service 2 in the same manner as NE1.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
29
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
Figure 4-5 Typical application of service model 3 Strip S-VLAN Label
Add S-VLAN L abel
C-VLAN(100)
Data( 1)
S-VLAN(300)
C-VLAN( 100)
Data(1)
C-VLAN(200)
Data(2)
S-VLAN(400)
C-VLAN(200)
Data(2)
NE 1 Service 1 VLAN ID: 100 Service 2 VLAN ID: 200
Po rt 1
Port 2
NE 2
E-Line
Port 1 Transmission Ne twork
Po rt 3
E-Lin e
Service 1 VLAN ID: 100
E-Lin e
Service 2 Port 2 VLAN ID: 2 00
Po rt 3
e E- Lin
Add S-VLAN Label S-VLAN(300)
C-VLAN( 100)
S-VLAN(400)
C-VLAN(200)
Strip S-VLAN Label
Data(1) Data(2)
C- VLAN(100)
Data( 1)
C- VLAN(200)
Data(2)
Figure 4-6 shows the typical application of service model 4. Service 1 and Service 2 carry a same S-VLAN tag. Service 1 is accessed to NE1 through Port 1, and Service 2 is accessed to NE1 through Port 2. Port 1 changes the S-VLAN tag carried in Service 1 and Port 2 changes the S-VLAN tag carried in Service 2 so that the S-VLAN tags carried in Service 1 and Service 2 are different. Port 3 transmits Service 1 and Service 2 to NE2. NE2 processes Service 1 and Service 2 in the same manner as NE1. Figure 4-6 Typical application of service model 4 Switching S- VLAN Label S- VLA N( 100)
Data( 1)
S -VLAN(300)
Data(1)
S- VLA N( 100)
Data(2)
S -VLAN(400)
Data(2)
NE 1 Port 1
NE 2
Service 1 S-VLAN ID : 100
E- Line
Service 2 S-VLAN ID : 100 Port 2
E -Lin
Port 3
Transmission Network
Port 3
E -Line E-Lin e
e
Port 1 Service 1 S-VLAN ID: 100 Service 2 Port 2 S-VLAN ID: 100
S witching S-VLAN Label S-VLAN(300)
Data( 1)
S-V LA N(100)
Data(1)
S-VLAN(400)
Data(2)
S-V LA N(100)
Data( 2)
E-LAN Services Based on the 802.1d Bridge In the case of E-LAN services, packets can be forwarded only based on the MAC address table. These E-LAN services are E-LAN services based on the 802.1d bridge.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
30
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
Model of Service Table 4-5 shows the model of E-LAN services based on the 802.1d bridge. Table 4-5 Model of E-LAN services based on the 802.1d bridge Type of Service
Encapsulation Mode of Port
Tag Attribute
Type of Logical Port
Learning Mode
Sub-Switchin g Domain
E-LAN services based on the 802.1d bridge
Null
Tag-Transparent
PORT
SVL
No division of sub-switching domains
Typical Application Figure 4-7 shows the typical application of the model of service. The transmission network needs to carry the A services accessed from NE2 and NE3. The two A services are converged at the convergence node NE1. The services need not to be isolated. Therefore, an 802.1d bridge is used at NE1 to groom services. Figure 4-7 Model of E-LAN services based on the 802.1d bridge NE 2
Port 1 A2
Port 2 NE 1
Port 1 A1
Transmission Network Port 2 Port 3
802.1d bridge
Transmission Network
NE 3
Port 2
Port 1 A3
E-LAN Services Based on 802.1q Bridge E-LAN services can be separated by setting VLANs. In this case, a bridge is divided into multiple sub-switching domains. Therefore, the E-LAN services separated by setting VLANs are E-LAN services based on 802.1q bridge.
Model of Service Table 4-6 shows the models of E-LAN services based on 802.1q bridge.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
31
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
Table 4-6 Model of E-LAN services based on 802.1q bridge Type of Service
Encapsulation Mode of Port
TAG Attribute Type of Logical Port
Learning Mode
Sub-Switchin g Domain
E-LAN services based on 802.1q bridge
802.1q
C-Awared
IVL
Sub-switching domains are divided based on VLANs.
PORT +VLAN
Typical Applications Figure 4-8 shows the typical application of the model of E-LAN services based on 802.1q bridge. The transmission network needs to carry G and H services accessed from NE2 and NE3. Both types of services are converged on NE1. G and H services adopt different VLAN planning. Therefore, 802.1q bridge is used on NEs and sub-switching domains are divided based on VLANs, differentiating and separating the two types of services. Figure 4-8 Model of E-LAN services based on 802.1q bridge NE 2 VLAN 100 Port 1 G 2 P or t 3
NE 1
Port 1
VLAN 100
VLAN 200 P ort 2 Us er H2
Transm i ss ion Network
G 1 P ort 3
802.1q bri dge
VLAN 200 P ort 4
P ort 2 Us er H1
NE 3 Transm i ss ion Network
VLAN 100 P ort 1
802.1q bri dge
G 3 P ort 3
VLAN 200 P ort 2 Us er H3
802.1q bridge
You can configure VLAN-Based E-Line Services on NE2 and NE3 for service access.
E-LAN Services Based on 802.1ad Bridge S-VLAN tags can be used to isolate E-LAN services. Therefore, a bridge is divided into multiple independent sub-switching domains. These services are E-LAN services based on 802.1ad bridge.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
32
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
Model of Service Table 4-7 shows the models of E-LAN services based on 802.1ad bridge. Table 4-7 Models of E-LAN services based on 802.1ad bridge Type of Services
Encapsulation Mode of Port
Tag Attribute
E-LAN services based on 802.1ad bridge
Null or 802.1q S-Awared (UNI port) a QinQ (NNI port)
Type of Logical Port
Learning Mode
Sub-Switchin g Domain
PORT (The encapsulation mode of the UNI port is Null.) PORT or PORT +C-VLAN (The encapsulation mode of the UNI port is 802.1q.)
IVL
Sub-switching domains are divided based on S-VLAN tags.
a
PORT +S-VLAN (NNI port)
a: When the encapsulation mode of port is 802.1q, the tag attribute must be Tag Aware.
Typical Applications Figure 4-9 shows the typical application of the model of service. The transmission network needs to carry G and H services accessed from NE2 and NE3. The two types of services are converged on NE1. Since G and H services have a same C-VLAN tag, you need to add different S-VLAN tags to G and H services for service isolation.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
33
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
Figure 4-9 Model of E-LAN services based on 802.1ad bridge NE 2 Add S-VLAN Label
Strip S-VLAN Label
S-VLAN(300)
C-VLAN(100)
Data(G)
C-VLAN(100)
Data( G)
S-VLAN(400)
C-VLAN(100)
Data(H)
C-VLAN(100)
Data(H)
NE 2 SVLAN 300 Port 1 G 2 CVLAN 100
Por t 3 SVLA N 400
NE 1
P ort 2 Us er H2 CVLAN 100
T ransm i ss ion Network
SVLAN 300
Port 1
Port 3
G 1 CVLAN 100
802.1ad bri dge SVLAN 400
NE 3
Port 2 H1 CVLAN 100
P or t 4
802.1ad bridge
SVLAN 300 Tr ans m is si on Network
P ort 1 G 3 CVLAN 100 SVLA N 400
Strip S-VLAN Label
P ort 2 Us er H3 CVLAN 100
Por t 3
NE 1 Add S -VLAN Label
C-VLAN(100)
Data( G)
S-VLAN(300)
C-VLAN(100)
Data(G)
C-VLAN(100)
Data(H)
S-VLAN(400)
C-VLAN(100)
Data(H)
802.1ad bri dge
NE 3 Add S-VLAN Label
Strip S-VLAN Label
S-VLA N(300)
C-VLA N(100)
Data(G)
C-VLA N(100)
Data( G)
S-VLA N(400)
C-VLA N(100)
Data(H)
C-VLA N(100)
Data(H)
You can configure QinQ-Based E-Line Services on NE2 and NE3 for service access.
4.2.2 ETH PWE3 Services In the topology, the E-Line services are point-to-point services. The E-Line services realize the point-to-point transmission of Ethernet services. Figure 4-10 shows the networking diagram of the E-Line services carried by PWs. The branches of Company A and Company B are located in City 1 and City 2, and need to communicate with each other. The services of Company A and Company B need to be isolated from each other. In this case, you can configure the E-Line services that are carried by PWs and from the side to the network side, to realize the communication between the branches of Company A or Company B. In addition, different services are carried by different PWs, therefore realizing the isolation of the services of Company A from the services of Company B. The services that are accessed from the side are encapsulated and transmitted to the PWs. Then, the services are transmitted through the tunnel.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
34
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
The E-Line services of different companies are carried by different PWs and then to the same port on the network side. In this manner, the port resources on the network side are saved and the bandwidth utilization is increased. In the uplink direction of the side, layered QoS configuration can be performed for data packets. Figure 4-10 E-Line services carried by PWs
PSN
NE1
NE2
Company A
Company A
Company B Company B
City 1
City2 UNI
NNI
NNI UNI
Tunnel PW
4.2.3 CES Services CES: By using the PWE3 technology, PWE3 packet headers are added to TDM traffic to create circuit emulation services (CES). PWE3 packet headers carry the frame format information, alarm information, signaling information, and synchronization and timing information of the TDM traffic. The encapsulated PW packets are transmitted over the MPLS tunnel on the PSN. After being decapsulated at the PW egress, the TDM circuit switched service traffic is re-created. On a packet switching network, the transmit and receive ends of a CES service maintain clock synchronization by means of adaptive clock recovery (ACR).
Emulation Mode The OptiX NG-SDH series equipment s two types of CES services: structure-aware TDM circuit emulation service over packet switched network (CESoPSN) CES and structure-agnostic TDM over packet (SAToP) CES. In the case of CESoPSN CES:
The equipment senses the frame format, frame alignment mode, and timeslot information in the TDM circuit. The equipment processes the overheads and extracts the payloads in TDM frames. Then, the equipment loads timeslots to the packet payload in a certain sequence. As a result, the services in each timeslot are fixed and visible in packets.
In the case of SAToP CES:
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
The equipment does not sense any format in the TDM signal. Instead, it considers TDM signals as bit flows at a constant rate, and therefore the entire bandwidth of TDM signals is emulated.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
35
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
The overheads and payloads in TDM signals are transparently transmitted.
Service Type CES services are classified into UNI-UNI CES services and UNI-UNI CES services by service implementation point.
UNI-UNI CES services As shown in Figure 4-11, a single OptiX OSN NE completes access of TDM services.
Figure 4-11 UNI-UNI CES services
PSN
NE TDM link NodeB
BSC
UNI-NNI CES services As shown in Figure 4-12, the OptiX OSN NEs set UNI-NNI CES services. In the case of a UNI-NNI CES service, the OptiX OSN NEs access customer TDM services through E1 ports; CES PWs are created between the OptiX OSN NEs to emulate end-to-end TDM services.
Figure 4-12 UNI-NNI CES services NE NodeB1
NE PSN BSC
NE TDM link PW
Nod eB2
Tun nel
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
36
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
4.2.4 ATM/IMA Services This section provides the definition of ATM PWE3 and describes its purpose.
Definition The ATM PWE3 technology emulates the basic behaviors and characteristics of ATM services on a packet switched network (PSN) by using the PWE3 mechanism, so that the emulated ATM services can be transmitted on a PSN.
Purpose Aided by the ATM PWE3 technology, conventional ATM networks can be connected by a PSN. Specifically, ATM PWE3 allows transmitting conventional ATM services over a PSN by emulating the ATM services. The networking type of ATM PWE3 can be one-to-one or N-to-one depending on the encapsulation type of ATM PWE3 packets. It is obvious that ATM PWE3 helps to transmit ATM services over the PSN, without adding ATM equipment or changing the configuration of the ATM CE equipment. Figure 4-13 Typical application of ATM PWE3 (in the one-to-one encapsulation mode) PSN PW AC
AC CE1
PE1
LSP
PE2
CE2
ATM PWE3 1-to-1 ATM PWE3 service
Packet transmission equipment
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
1-to-1 ATM PWE3 service
NodeB
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RNC
37
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
Figure 4-14 Typical application of ATM PWE3 (in the N-to-one encapsulation mode)
CE1 PSN PW AC
AC CE2
PE1
LSP
PE2
CE4
ATM PWE3
CE3
N-to-1 ATM PWE3 service
Packet transmission equipment
N-to-1 ATM PWE3 service
NodeB
RNC
The cell encapsulation modes at both ends of a P W must be the same.
4.3 Protection This section describes protection schemes including MPLS APS, PW APS, MSTP, LPT, and LAG in the packet domain. 4.3.1 MPLS APS This section provides the definition of MPLS APS and describes its purpose. 4.3.2 PW APS This section provides the definition of PW APS and describes its purpose. 4.3.3 LPT This section provides the definition of LPT and describes its purpose. 4.3.4 LAG Link aggregation allows multiple links that are attached to the same equipment to be aggregated together to form a LAG so that the bandwidth increases and the reliability of the links is improved. The aggregated links can be considered as a single logical link.
4.3.1 MPLS APS This section provides the definition of MPLS APS and describes its purpose.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
38
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
Definition MPLS APS is a function that protects MPLS tunnels based on the APS protocol. With this function, when the working tunnel is faulty, the service can be switched to the preconfigured protection tunnel. The MPLS APS function ed by the OptiX OSN 550 has the following features:
The MPLS APS provides end-to-end protection for tunnels. The working tunnel and protection tunnel have the same ingress and egress nodes. The protection tunnel in the MPLS APS protection pair does not carry extra traffic. In MPLS APS, the MPLS OAM mechanism is used to detect faults in tunnels, and the ingress and egress nodes exchange APS protocol packets to achieve protection switching.
Purpose MPLS APS improves reliability for service transmission in tunnels. As shown in Figure 4-15, when the MPLS OAM mechanism detects a fault in the working tunnel, the service is switched to the protection tunnel for transmission.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
39
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
Figure 4-15 Application example of MPLS APS Transit
Working Tun nel In gress
Egress
Protectio n Tunnel
Transit Protect swi tching Transit
Working Tunnel In gress
Egress
Protection Tunnel
Transit Service
Packet transmission equipment
4.3.2 PW APS This section provides the definition of PW APS and describes its purpose.
Definition PW APS is a function that protects PWs based on the APS protocol. With this function, when the working PW is faulty, the service can be switched to the preconfigured protection PW. The PW APS function ed by the OptiX OSN 550 has the following features:
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
The PW APS function provides end-to-end protection for PWs. The working PW and protection PW are carried in different tunnels but have the same local and remote PEs. The protection PW in the PW APS protection pair does not carry extra traffic.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
40
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
In PW APS, the PW OAM mechanism is used to detect faults in PWs, and the PEs exchange APS protocol packets to achieve protection switching.
Purpose PW APS improves reliability for service transmission in PWs. As shown in Figure 4-16, when the PW OAM mechanism detects a fault in the working PW, the service is switched to the protection PW for transmission. Figure 4-16 Application example of PW APS PE2
Working PW PE1
PE4
Protection PW
PE 3 Protect swi tching PE2
Working PW PE1
PE4
Protection P W
PE 3 Service
Packet transmission equi pment
4.3.3 LPT This section provides the definition of LPT and describes its purpose.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
41
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
Definition Link State Through (LPT) detects a fault that occurs at a service access node or on a service network, and then instructs the equipment at both ends of a service network to immediately start a backup network for communication. LPT ensures proper transmission of important data. As shown in Figure 4-17, LPT-enabled NE1 and NE2 will disconnect their access links from router A and router B if access link 1, access link 2, or the service network becomes faulty. As a result, router A and router B will immediately detect the link fault between them, and switch to backup networks for communication. Figure 4-17 Typical application of LPT
Backup network
Service network NE1 Router A
NE2
Access link 1
Access link 2 Router B
Working link Protection link
Purpose With the LPT function enabled, access equipment will immediately detect link faults and switch to backup networks timely.
4.3.4 LAG Link aggregation allows multiple links that are attached to the same equipment to be aggregated together to form a LAG so that the bandwidth increases and the reliability of the links is improved. The aggregated links can be considered as a single logical link. A LAG aggregates multiple physical links to form a logical link that is at a higher rate to transmit data. Link aggregation functions between adjacent equipment. Therefore, link aggregation is not related to the architecture of the entire network. Link aggregation is also called port aggregation because links correspond to ports one to one on an Ethernet network. As shown in Figure 4-18, the LAG provides the following functions:
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Increased bandwidth A LAG provides s with a cost-effective method for increasing the link bandwidth. s obtain data links with higher bandwidths by combining multiple physical links into one logical link without upgrading the existing equipment. The bandwidth of the logical Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
42
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
link is equal to the sum of the bandwidths of the physical links. The aggregation module distributes the traffic to different links by using the load sharing algorithm, therefore providing the load sharing function for links. Increased availability The links in a LAG dynamically back up each other. When a link fails, the other links in the LAG quickly take over. The process in which link aggregation starts the backup link is associated only with the links in the same LAG, and the links not in the LAG are not involved.
Figure 4-18 Link aggregation group Li nk 1 Li nk 2 E th ernet p ackets
Li nk 3
E th ernet p ackets
LAG
4.4 Maintenance This section describes the maintenance functions and features including MPLS OAM, ETH-OAM, ATM OAM, and RMON in the packet domain. 4.4.1 MPLS OAM The MPLS OAM mechanism ed by the equipment includes tunnel OAM and PW OAM. Tunnel OAM operates at the tunnel layer, and PW OAM operates at the PW layer. Tunnel OAM and PW OAM both provide the complete fault detection and locating mechanism. 4.4.2 ETH-OAM ETH-OAM enhances Ethernet Layer 2 maintenance functions and it strongly s service continuity verification, service deployment commissioning, and network fault locating. 4.4.3 ATM OAM This section provides the definition of ATM OAM and describes its purpose. 4.4.4
RMON
By using the remote monitoring (RMON), you can transmit network monitoring data between different network sections. 4.4.5 PRBS Certain boards provide the PRBS functional module, which is used for testing and maintaining the network. You can determine whether the working path on a tributary port, in the line direction, or in the cross-connect direction is normal, depending on whether bit errors are detected in a PRBS test. 4.4.6
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
CES Alarm Transmission
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
43
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
The OptiX OSN 550 uses the L/M and R fields in the control word to transparently transmit alarms.
4.4.1 MPLS OAM The MPLS OAM mechanism ed by the equipment includes tunnel OAM and PW OAM. Tunnel OAM operates at the tunnel layer, and PW OAM operates at the PW layer. Tunnel OAM and PW OAM both provide the complete fault detection and locating mechanism.
Tunnel OAM
Description The tunnel OAM mechanism helps to effectively detect, identify, and locate internal defects at the tunnel layer of an MPLS network. The equipment triggers the protection switching based on the OAM detection status. Therefore, quick fault detection and service protection can be achieved. Objectives and benefits As a key bearer technology for the scalable next generation network (NGN), MPLS provides multi-service capabilities with ensured QoS. In addition, MPLS introduces a unique network layer (tunnel), which may cause some faults. Therefore, an MPLS network must have the OAM capability. By providing a tunnel OAM mechanism independent of any upper layer or lower layer, the tunnel OAM s the following features: − Provides query-on-demand and consecutive detections so that at any moment you can learn whether the monitored LSP has defects. − Detects, analyzes, and locates any defect that occurs, and notifies the NMS of the relevant information. − Triggers a protection switching immediately after a defect or fault occurs on a link. − Monitors the performance events indicating packet loss ratio, delay, and jitter in real time and reports them to the NMS.
PW OAM
Description The PW OAM mechanism helps to effectively detect, identify, and locate internal defects at the PW layer of a network. The equipment triggers the protection switching based on the OAM detection status. Therefore, quick fault detection and service protection can be achieved. Objectives and benefits The equipment performs PW encapsulation on service packets, and then transmits the service packets over tunnels. The network consists of two layers: tunnel and PW. Tunnels use tunnel OAM for maintenance and management, and PWs use PW OAM for maintenance and management. Currently, the equipment can detect the connectivity of a certain PW through ping packets, and then reports the result to the NMS.
4.4.2 ETH-OAM ETH-OAM enhances Ethernet Layer 2 maintenance functions and it strongly s service continuity verification, service deployment commissioning, and network fault locating.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
44
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
Definition With the continuous development of the Ethernet, especially when LANs evolve to WANs, operators pay more attention to equipment maintainability. Solutions to operations, istration and maintenance (OAM) in the transmission network are required urgently. Therefore, ETH-OAM is developed. ITU-T and IEEE have researches on ETH-OAM. Currently, Huawei Ethernet service processing boards have realized the ETH-OAM function, which complies with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah. Wherein, IEEE 802.1ag define Ethernet service OAM standards, and IEEE 802.3ah defines Ethernet port OAM standards. As shown in Figure 4-19, the combination of IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah provides a complete Ethernet OAM solution. Figure 4-19 Application of IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah IEEE 8 02.3ah
IEEE 80 2.1ag
P
I EEE 8 02.3ah
P
CE1
Rou ter 1
PE2
PE1
CE3
Router 3
CE2
P
P
CE4
Router 2
Access layer
Acce ss layer Core layer
Custom la yer
Custom laye r OptiX NE
Ethernet service OAM focuses on the maintenance of end-to-end Ethernet links. Based on services, Ethernet service OAM implements end-to-end detection in the unit of "maintenance domain" and performs segmental management on each network segment that is involved in the same service on a network. Ethernet port OAM focuses on the maintenance of point-to-point Ethernet link between two directly-connected devices in Ethernet in the first mile (EFM). Ethernet port OAM does not focus on a specific service. It maintains the point-to-point Ethernet link by performing OAM auto-discovery, link performance monitoring, fault check, remote loopback, and selfloop check.
Purpose Based on the MAC layer, the ETH-OAM protocol performs OAM operations for the Ethernet by transmitting OAM packets. This protocol is irrelevant to the transmission medium. The OAM packets are processed only at the MAC layer, having no impact on the other layers of the Ethernet. In addition, as a low-rate protocol, the ETH-OAM protocol occupies low bandwidths. Therefore, this protocol does not affect services carried on links. A comparison of ETH-OAM and existing OAM and fault locating methods is provided as follows:
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
45
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
When a loopback is performed at a port, all packets on the port are looped back. Therefore, the loopback method cannot be used if only a specific service needs to be looped back. ETH-OAM can detect hardware faults. ETH-OAM can detect and locate faults automatically.
4.4.3 ATM OAM This section provides the definition of ATM OAM and describes its purpose.
Definition ATM OAM is used for detecting and locating ATM faults, and monitoring ATM performance. In this document, ATM OAM refers to OAM only at the ATM layer and implements various OAM functions by means of specific ATM OAM cells.
Purpose ATM OAM provides segment-based ATM OAM between the CE and the PE and end-to-end-based ATM OAM between CEs. As shown in Figure 4-20, ATM OAM cells are transmitted and detected between the CE and the PE, or between the CEs to monitor the ATM link. Figure 4-20 Typical application of ATM OAM
CE1 (NodeB)
P E2
PE1
CE2 (RNC)
Segment check End-to-end check
Pa cket tra nsmission equipment
4.4.4 RMON By using the remote monitoring (RMON), you can transmit network monitoring data between different network sections. Currently, the management of the Ethernet performance for transmission products is relevantly simple. In the case of the management of Ethernet ports, the management of the performance data of the ports is required. What's more, as the network is becoming complex, a method for managing network sections is required. Thus, the RMON emerges and the RMON should have the following features:
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
46
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
All statistics data is saved at the agent and the out-of-service operation on the manager is ed. History data is saved for the fault diagnosis. Errors are detected and reported. Detailed data is provided. Multiple management stations are ed.
Based on the preceding purposes, the RMON defines a serial of statistic formats and functions to realize the data exchange between the control stations and detection stations that complies with the RMON standards. To meet the requirements of different networks, the RMON provides flexible detection modes and control mechanism. What's more, the RMON provides error diagnosis, planning and information receiving of the performance events of the entire network.
4.4.5 PRBS Certain boards provide the PRBS functional module, which is used for testing and maintaining the network. You can determine whether the working path on a tributary port, in the line direction, or in the cross-connect direction is normal, depending on whether bit errors are detected in a PRBS test. In the case of E1 services, T1 services or T3 services, the PRBS15 is transmitted. The PRBS function of the board is available in two types: lower-order PRBS function and higher-order PRBS function. Currently, the OptiX OSN equipment s only the lower-order PRBS function. In the case of the lower-order PRBS function, the PRBS module is integrated with the tributary board. An NE that provides the PRBS function can be used as a simple instrument. You can determine whether a service path is faulty and can determine the location of the fault on fibers or relevant boards between the faulty NEs, depending on the bit errors detected on the NE. The PRBS function module can analyze the local NE and the entire network. Therefore, you can perform a test without using a real instrument during the deployment or fault locating.
4.4.6 CES Alarm Transmission The OptiX OSN 550 uses the L/M and R fields in the control word to transparently transmit alarms. CES alarm transparent transmission involves transmitting local CES alarms to the remote end, and inserting corresponding alarms to notify the remote end of faults in the local end. Depending on the position where the alarm is generated, CES alarm transparent transmission can be between AC sides, and from the NNI side to the AC side.
CES Alarm Transparent Transmission Between AC Sides Figure 4-21 shows the CES alarm transparent transmission can be between AC sides.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
47
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
Figure 4-21 CES alarm transparent transmission between AC sides
PSN AC1 NodeB
AC2
PW
PE1
LSP
RNC
PE2
Packe t transmission equip ment
The service alarms on the AC side are transparently transmitted through the PSN as follows: When receiving TDM signals carrying AIS/RAI alarms from AC1 side, PE1 uses the L or M field in the control word to respectively transmit AIS and RAI alarms to PE2. Then, PE2 inserts AIS/RAI alarms into AC2 based on the received L or M field. The SAToP encapsulation mode does not the M field, and therefore cannot transparently transmit the RAI alarm.
The fault information on the AC link or port is transmitted through the PSN as follows: When detecting an AC link fault or E1 port fault in AC1, PE1 uses the L or M field in the control word to transmit the fault information to PE2. Then, PE2 inserts alarms into AC2 based on the received L or M fields.
CES Alarm Transparent Transmission from the NNI Side to the AC Side Figure 4-22 shows the CES alarm transparent transmission from the NNI side to the AC side. Figure 4-22 CES alarm transparent transmission from the NNI side to the AC side
PSN AC1 NodeB
AC2
PW
PE1
LSP
PE2
RNC
Packe t transmission equip ment
When detecting that packet loss ratio continuously beyond the preset threshold, PE2 inserts the AIS alarm into AC2, and uses the R field in the control word to transmit the information to PE1. Then, PE1 reports the RDI alarm based on the R field, and inserts the RAI alarm into the AC1 side.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
48
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
4.5 Synchronization This section describes synchronization features including synchronous Ethernet clock, and CES ACR in the packet domain. 4.5.1
Synchronous Ethernet Clock
The synchronous Ethernet clock is a technology that extracts the clock from the serial bit stream on the Ethernet line, and transmits data through the extracted clock to realize the transfer of clocks. 4.5.2
CES ACR
This section provides the definition of CES ACR and describes its purpose.
4.5.1 Synchronous Ethernet Clock The synchronous Ethernet clock is a technology that extracts the clock from the serial bit stream on the Ethernet line, and transmits data through the extracted clock to realize the transfer of clocks.
Definition The synchronous Ethernet clock is a technology of frequency synchronization over the physical layer. The system directly extracts the clock signal from the serial bit stream on the Ethernet line, and transmits the data to each board by using the clock signal to realize the transfer of clock information.
Purpose As the network is increasingly based on the Ethernet transfer technology, the large-scale network at the carrier-class level requires the synchronous Ethernet to transmit the clock and introduces the networkwide synchronous timing transmission idea of the SDH system to the Ethernet design. Therefore, the clock signal can be transmitted from the core to the edge by using the Ethernet physical layer, to provide ensured timing for various real-time services.
4.5.2 CES ACR This section provides the definition of CES ACR and describes its purpose.
Definition CES ACR is a function that uses the adaptive clock recovery (ACR) technology to recover clock synchronization information carried by CES packets. In the standard CES ACR solution, the source end (Master) considers the local clock as the timestamp in the Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) packet header and encapsulates it in the CES packet; the sink end (Slave) recovers the clock according to the timestamp in the packet. In this manner, signal impairment during the transmission is prevented. The OptiX OSN 550 adopts the enhanced timestamp clock solution. That is, clocks can be recovered based on SN in CES packets rather than timestamps in RTP packet headers. See Figure 4-23.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
49
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
4 Packet Functions and Features
Figure 4-23 CES ACR clock solution Slave
Master SN
E1
Processing
SN
CE S
CES
Processing
E1
Primary reference clock
PSN E1
BTS
E1
CES
P E1
Packet transmissi on equipment
PE 2
BSC
SN: Sequnce Number
Purpose In the packet domain, CES ACR is mainly used to transparently transmit E1 clocks in the PSN. For details, see CES ACR Clock Transparent Transmission Solution.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
50
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
5
5 TDM Functions and Features
TDM Functions and Features
5.1 TDM-Domain Access Capacity This section provides the TDM-domain access capacities when different system control, switching, and timing boards are configured in the OptiX OSN 550. Table 5-1 lists the TDM-domain access capacities when different system control, switching, and timing boards are configured in the OptiX OSN 550. Table 5-1 TDM-domain access capacity of the OptiX OSN 550 Board
STM-1
STM-4
STM-16
E1/T1
E3/T3
PCXLX
26
14
2
252
18
PCXX
24
12
0
252
18
PCXLG
26
14
2
252
18
PCXGA
24
12
0
252
18
PCXGB
24
12
0
252
18
5.2 Service This section describes the service in the TDM domain. The OptiX OSN 550 can process SDH services and PDH services. Table 5-2 lists the ed service types. Table 5-2 Service types ed by the OptiX OSN 550 in the TDM domain Service Type
Description
SDH service
SDH standard services: ST M-1/STM-4/STM-16
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
51
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
5 TDM Functions and Features
Service Type
Description
PDH service
E1/T1, E3/T3services
5.3 Protection This section describes the protection schemes including SN and linear MSP in the TDM domain. 5.3.1
SN
The SN scheme, which requires one working subnet and one protection subnet, is to select one service from the dually transmitted services. 5.3.2
Ring MSP
Ring MSP uses the multiplex section overhead (MSOH) bytes K1 and K2 to implement automatic protection switching of services. 5.3.3 Linear MSP The linear MSP uses the K1 and K2 bytes in the multiplex section overhead to realize automatic protection switching. The OptiX OSN equipment s 1+1 and 1:N linear MSP.
5.3.1 SN The SN scheme, which requires one working subnet and one protection subnet, is to select one service from the dually transmitted services. The SN scheme, which requires one working subnet and one protection subnet, is to select one service from the dually transmitted services. If the working subnet fails to be connected or if its performance fails to meet certain requirements, the connection of the protection subnet takes over. Figure 5-1 shows the application of the SN.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
52
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
5 TDM Functions and Features
Figure 5-1 Application of the SN Worki ng SNC Sou rce end
Si nk end
NE A
NE B Pro tection SNC Protection switchin g Working SNC
Sou rce end
Sin k e nd
NE A
NE B Pro tection SNC
5.3.2 Ring MSP Ring MSP uses the multiplex section overhead (MSOH) bytes K1 and K2 to implement automatic protection switching of services.
Two-Fiber Unidirectional Ring MSP On a two-fiber unidirectional ring MSP, one of the bidirectional STM-N lines is the working line, and the other is the protection line. As shown in Figure 5-2, the services on the two-fiber unidirectional ring MSP are on diverse routes. Before the protection switching, the signal flow of the services from NE A to NE C is NE A→NE B→NE C, and the signal flow of the services from NE C to NE A is NE C→NE D→NE A. In normal cases, services are transmitted on the working line. When a fiber cut occurs and the working line becomes unavailable, the services on the two ends of the faulty point are both switched from the working line of the faulty fiber to the protection line of the reverse directional fiber for transmission. Figure 5-2 shows the application of the two-fiber unidirectional ring MSP. After the protection switching, the signal flow of the services from NE A to NE C is NE A→NE D→NE C→NE B→NE C, and the signal flow of the services from NE C to NE A continues to be NE C→NE D→NE A.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
53
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
5 TDM Functions and Features
Figure 5-2 Two-fiber unidirectional ring MSP
Before protection switching East
West
NE A
West
East
Two-fiber unidirectional MSP ring
NE B
NE D
East
West NE C
West
East
Protection switching
After protection switching East
West
NE A West
East NE B
Two-fiber unidirectional MSP ring
NE D
East
West NE C
West
East Signal flow of services
Two-Fiber Bidirectional Ring MSP On a two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP, the first half of VC-4s on each ST M-N line is allocated to the working channel, and the other half of VC-4s is allocated to the protection channel. As shown in Figure 5-3, the services on the two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP are on uniform routes. Before the protection switching, the signal flow of the services from NE A to NE C is NE A→NE B→NE C, and the signal flow of the services from NE C to NE A is NE C→NE B→NE A. In normal cases, services are transmitted on the working channel. The services transmitted on two fibers flow in inverse directions. When a fiber cut occurs and the working channel becomes unavailable, the services on the two ends of the faulty point are both switched from Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
54
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
5 TDM Functions and Features
the working channel of the faulty fiber to the protection channel of the reverse directional fiber for transmission. Figure 5-3 shows the application of the two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP. After the protection switching, the signal flow of the services from NE A to NE C is NE A→NE D→NE C→NE B→NE C, and the signal flow of the services from NE C to NE A is NE C→NE B→NE C→NE D→NE A. Figure 5-3 Two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP
Before protection switching East
West
NE A West
East Two-fiber bidirectional M SP ring
NE B
NE D
East
West NE C
West
East
Protection switching
After protection switching East
West
NE A West
East NE B
Two-fiber bidirectional M SP ring
East
NE D West
NE C
West
East Signal flow of services
5.3.3 Linear MSP The linear MSP uses the K1 and K2 bytes in the multiplex section overhead to realize automatic protection switching. The OptiX OSN equipment s 1+1 and 1:N linear MSP.
1+1 Linear MSP The 1+1 linear MSP requires one working channel and one protection channel. At the source node, the service is dually fed to the working channel and protection channel. At the sink node, the service is received from the working channel. When the working channel becomes faulty,
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
55
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
5 TDM Functions and Features
the service is received from the protection channel. Figure 5-4 shows the application of the 1+1 linear MSP. Figure 5-4 1+1 linear MSP NE B
NE A Working channel
Protection channel
Protecti on switching NE B
NE A Working channel
Protection channel
No extra traffic can be configured in the protection channel in a 1+1 linear MSP group.
1:N linear MSP The 1:N linear MSP requires N working channels and one protection channel. Common services are transmitted on the working channels, and extra traffic is transmitted on the protection channel. When a working channel becomes faulty, the service on the channel is switched to the protection channel. Therefore, the extra traffic is interrupted. Figure 5-5 shows the application of the 1:N linear MSP.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
56
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
5 TDM Functions and Features
Figure 5-5 1:N linear MSP NE A
Working channel 1
NE B Common servic e 1
Common service 1 ...
... Working channel N Common servic e N
Common service N Protection channel Extra traffic
Extra traffic
Protection s witching NE A
Working channel 1
NE B Common servic e 1
Common service 1 ...
... Working channel N Common service N
Common service N Protection channel Extra traffic
Extra traffic
Purpose The LMSP scheme uses the MSOH bytes K1 and K2 to implement automatic protection switching once the working path fails, and therefore to protect services.
5.4 Maintenance Certain boards provide the PRBS functional module, which is used for testing and maintaining the network. You can determine whether the working path on a tributary port, in the line direction, or in the cross-connect direction is normal, depending on whether bit errors are detected in a PRBS test. In the case of E1 services, T1 services or T3 services, the PRBS15 is transmitted. The PRBS function of the board is available in two types: lower-order PRBS function and higher-order PRBS function. Currently, the OptiX OSN equipment s only the lower-order PRBS function. In the case of the lower-order PRBS function, the PRBS module is integrated with the tributary board. An NE that provides the PRBS function can be used as a simple instrument. You can determine whether a service path is faulty and can determine the location of the fault on fibers or relevant boards between the faulty NEs, depending on the bit errors detected on the NE. The PRBS function module can analyze the local NE and the entire network. Therefore, you can perform a test without using a real instrument during the deployment or fault locating.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
57
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
5 TDM Functions and Features
5.5 Synchronization Clock synchronization on the entire network helps to transmit services normally.
Definition Clock: The electronic circuit in a computer that generates a steady stream of timing pulses.
Purpose Clock synchronization ensures that all the digital devices on a communications network work at the same nominal frequency, and therefore minimizes the impacts of slips, burst bit errors, phase jumps, jitters, and wanders on digital communications systems. Clock synchronization also minimizes pointer justifications on SDH devices. Therefore, clock synchronization is the precondition and basis for the normal operation of a network.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
58
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
6
6 Networking and Application Scenarios
Networking and Application Scenarios
6.1 Basic Network Topologies OptiX OSN 550s can form the following network topologies: chain, ring, tangent rings, and ring with chain. The OptiX OSN 550 s separate and combined configuration of the following types: terminal multiplexer (TM), add/drop multiplexer (), and multiple add/drop multiplexer (M). OptiX OSN 550s can form the following network topologies: chain, ring, tangent rings, and ring with chain. In addition, OptiX OSN 550s can be interconnected with other OptiX OSN equipment, OptiX DWDM equipment, and OptiX Metro equipment to provide a complete transport network solution. See Table 6-1. Table 6-1 Network topologies ed by OptiX OSN 550s and corresponding legends Network Topology
Legend
Chain
Ring
Tangent rings
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
59
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Network Topology
6 Networking and Application Scenarios
Legend
Ring with chain
6.2 Typical Application of Hybrid Networking In Hybrid networking mode, the OptiX OSN 550 receives and transmits packet services and time division multiplex (TDM) services at the same time. Figure 6-1 shows a Hybrid ring network, and Figure 6-2 shows the board configurations on each NE of the network, on which the following base station services are transmitted:
2G base station services (transmitted in Native E1 mode) 3G base station services (transmitted in ETH PWE3 or ATM/IMAPWE3 mode)
Figure 6-1 Hybrid ring network
FE TDM E1
FE
NE 2 NE 1
NE 3
FE Node B
TDM E1 NE 4
A TM/IMA E1
Packet domain
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
TDM domain
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
No de B
BTS
60
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
6 Networking and Application Scenarios
Figure 6-2 Board configurations on each NE of the Hybrid ring network PCXLG
PCXLG
NE6 EM6T SP3D NE 2 FE
E1
FE
NE 1 PCXLG
PCXLG
NE6 EM6T
SP3D
NE 3 PCXLG PCXLG NE6 EF8F
E1
FE NE 4 PCXLG PCXLG NE6 MD1 ATM/IMA E1
Packet domain
TDM domain
Node B
BTS
6.3 Typical Application of Pure Packet Networking This section describes the typical application of pure packet networking. Figure 6-3 shows a pure packet network, and Figure 6-4 shows the board configurations on each NE of the pure packet network, on which the following base station services are transmitted:
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
2G base station services (transmitted in CES mode) 3G base station services (transmitted in ETH PWE3 or ATM/IMA/CES E1 mode)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
61
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
6 Networking and Application Scenarios
Figure 6-3 Pure packet network
FE
NE 5
ATM/IMA E 1
FE GE GE
NE 2 NE 3
NE 1 GE
TDM E1
NE 4
FE
GE
TDM E 1
Nod e B
BTS
Figure 6-4 Board configurations on each NE of the pure packet network NE 5 PCXGB NE6 EF8F
FE
MD1 NE 2
A TM/IMA E1 PCXGB
PCXGB
NE6 EM 6F NE 1 P CXGB NE6 MD1 E1
FE
NE 3 PCXGB
PCXGB FE NE 4 PCXGB
PCXGB
NE6 EM 6F PCXGB GE
FE
ISU2 MD1 E1
Node B
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS
62
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
6 Networking and Application Scenarios
6.4 Typical Application of TDM Networking This section describes the typical application of time division multiplex (TDM) networking. Figure 6-5 shows a TDM network, and Figure 6-6 shows the board configurations on each NE of the TDM network, on which the following base station services are transmitted:
2G base station services (transmitted in E1/T1 mode)
Figure 6-5 TDM network
TDM E1
NE1
TDM E1
TDM E1
TDM E 1 NE4
NE 2 NE 3 TDM E1
BTS
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
63
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
6 Networking and Application Scenarios
Figure 6-6 Board configurations on each NE of the TDM network NE1 PCXLG
PCXLG
NE6 SP3D
E1 NE2
E1
PCXLG
NE4
PCXLG
PCXLG
NE6
PCXLG
NE6 SP3D
SP3D
E1
E1 NE3 PCXLG
PCXLG
NE6 SP3D
E1 BTS
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
64
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
7 Security Management
7
Security Management
7.1 Authentication Management For security concerns, only an authenticated can to an NE.
NE management: You can successfully to an NE only after entering the correct name and . NE switching: One client allows only one to operate the NE at a time. For this reason, if multiple NE s to an NE, the NE s need to be switched to ensure that the configuration data is unique. Forcibly logging other s out of the NE: To avoid errors owing to simultaneous configuration by multiple s, or to prevent other s from illegally logging in to the NE, one can forcibly log a lower-level out from the NE. NE locking: After the locking function is enabled, a whose level is lower than that of the current is not allowed to to the NE. NE configuration locking: You can lock the function of configuring certain functional modules on an NE to prevent other s from configuring the modules. You can query s that are logged in to the NE.
7.2 Authorization Management The authorization management allows different authorities for different s when they operate an NE. This effectively protects the NE against inappropriate operations.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Management of NE s − Five authority levels are available in an ascending order: monitoring level, operation level, maintenance level, system level, and debugging level. − Based on the network management system, NE s are classified into LCT NE s, EMS NE s, CMD NE s, and general NE s. − You can create a , assign an authority level for the , and specify the flag. − You can change a name, a , an authority level, and a flag. − You can delete a . Management of NE groups:
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
65
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description −
−
7 Security Management
By default, five groups are available with authorities in an ascending order: monitor group, operator group, maintenance personnel group, group, and super group. You can change the group to which a belongs.
7.3 Network Security Management The security of transmitting data between the NMS and NEs, and in the network, is the precondition for the NMS to manage the NEs. Communication between the NMS and NEs can be implemented based on Access Control List (ACL), Secure Sockets Layer (SSL), or Remote Authentication Dial-in Service (RADIUS) protocol.
ACL Protocol The ACL rules are configured to filter the received IP packets. This controls the data traffic on the network and protects against malicious attacks. You can set basic ACL rules or advanced ACL rules, based on the required system security level.
For an NE that requires a low security level, you can configure the basic ACL rules so that the NE checks only the source addresses of received IP packets. For an NE that requires a high security level, you can configure the advanced ACL rules. In this case, the NE checks the source addresses, sink addresses, source ports, sink ports, and protocol types of the received IP packets.
If both the advanced and basic ACL rules are configured, the NE uses only the advanced ACL rules to check the received IP packets. In addition, the ACL rules the following operations:
Queries of the ACL rules Modification of the ACL rules Deletion of the ACL rules
SSL Protocol The SSL protocol is used to protect the integrity and security of data.
RADIUS Protocol RADIUS provides a complete network security solution. After the RADIUS server verifies that the name and of a are valid, the server allows a certain authority for the , and provides services to the . The RADIUS server of the carrier manages all the s and attributes of the OptiX OSN 550. To to the OptiX OSN 550, you must apply for a to the carrier. When you try to to the OptiX OSN 550, the RADIUS server verifies the name and that you have entered. If the verification fails, a error is reported. The OptiX OSN 550 s the shielding function when being connected to the network port management device. That is, when being connected to the network port on an OptiX
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
66
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
7 Security Management
OSN 550, the network port management device manages only the connected OptiX OSN 550, and cannot access the other devices that are connected to the OptiX OSN 550 through the ECCs. With this function, even if an OptiX OSN 550 NE in the insecure domain is accessed illegally, the NEs that are connected to the OptiX OSN 550 will not be illegally operated.
7.4 System Security Management The system provides necessary security policies that are executed forcibly.
Querying and setting the Warning Screen information of an NE Querying and setting the Warning Screen switch of an NE to determine whether to report an alarm after a logs in to the NE Querying and setting the earliest expire time and the latest expire time of a Checking whether a is unique on an NE
7.5 Log Management Log management involves system security log management and Syslog management.
System Security Log Management The system security log of an NE records all operations and operation results on the NE. By querying the system security log, the can trace and check operations of s.
You can query the system security log of an NE. You can forward the system security log to the Syslog server.
Syslog Management The Syslog service is used for the security management of NEs. Different information is transmitted to the Syslog server in a format compliant with the Syslog protocol so that the maintenance personnel can monitor NEs easily. The OptiX OSN 550 s the following functions related to the Syslog protocol:
Enabling and disabling the Syslog protocol. Setting the transmission mode of the Syslog protocol to UDP (by default) or T . Adding or deleting Syslog servers. Configuration of multiple Syslog servers and transmission of logs to multiple servers at the same time. Reporting relevant alarms when the Syslog server fails to communicate with NEs.
Figure 7-1 illustrates the log transmission of the the Syslog protocol on a network. To ensure the security of system logs, at least two Syslog servers are required on a transmission network. NEs communicate with Syslog servers by running the IP protocol. NEs communicates with each other in many modes, such as ECC and IP over DCC.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
67
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
7 Security Management
Figure 7-1 Log transmission of the Syslog protocol NE B
NMS
NE C (clie nt)
NE A (client) ECC/ IP OVER DCC T/IP real tim e security log
Syslog Serve r A
Syslo g Server B
NE D
A Syslog server is a work station or server that stores the system logs of all NEs on a network. Forwarding gateway NEs receive system logs from other NEs, and then forward these system logs to Syslog servers. For example, NE A and NE C in Figure 7-1.
When NEs communicate in IP mode, each NE can directly communicate with two different Syslog servers by running the IP protocol. Hence, you need to configure the IP addresses and port numbers of the Syslog servers on an NE. The NE transmits the system log to two Syslog servers by using the automatic routing function of the IP protocol. You need not configure any forwarding gateway NE. When NEs communicate in ECC mode, the NEs that are not directly connected to Syslog servers cannot communicate with Syslog servers. The logs of these NEs need to be transmitted to the gateway NEs that can communicate with Syslog servers directly. Then, the gateway NEs forward the logs to Syslog servers. Therefore, you need to configure forwarding gateway NEs. For example, you can configure NE A as the forwarding NE of NE D.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
68
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
8
8 Operation and Maintenance
Operation and Maintenance
8.1 DCN Reliable network management ensures proper running of a network, and therefore transmission of network management data becomes very critical. The data communication network (DCN) is a network management data communication channel, with which s can remotely manage and maintain NEs. Table 8-1 lists the DCN solutions that the OptiX OSN 550 s. Table 8-1 DCN solutions that the OptiX OSN 550 s Item
Inband DCN
Outband DCN
Purpose and Benefit
NM information is transmitted on the service channels provided by managed equipment. Therefore, no other equipment and DCN are required. This reduces operating cost.
NM information is transmitted on non-service channels.
Feature
Networking Technology
Flexible networking: NM information is encapsulated into Ethernet frames and carries a fixed VLAN ID to get separated from the service data. The NM information is transmitted with services on service channels. Configurable VLAN priorities for inband DCN packets
Identifying FE/GE service ports with VLAN IDs
High reliability: Outband DCN uses dedicated maintenance channels. Therefore, the NMC can construct a DCN network with managed equipment in various ways, such as E1 private lines and Ethernet; in addition, you can obtain NM information in time even when faults occur on service channels.
Application Scenario
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Packet network
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HW ECC IP OSI
TDM network
69
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
8 Operation and Maintenance
Item
Inband DCN
Outband DCN
Resource Allocation Mode
N/A
Channel type: D1-D3 and D4-D12 Running mode: Mode 1: 32 channels of D1-D3 bytes Mode 2: 12 channels of D1-D3 bytes or 6 channels of D4-D12 bytes
8.2 Equipment Maintenance To ensure the proper running of a network, routine maintenance and troubleshooting for equipment are a must. The OptiX OSN 550 is of strong maintainability. Table 8-2 lists the maintenance functions that the OptiX OSN 550 s. Table 8-2 Maintenance functions that the OptiX OSN 550 s Applicati Function on Scenario Routine maintenan ce
Alarm and performance management
Description
RMON
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Provides audible and visual alarms in case of emergency, assisting the network in taking prompt measures. Provides running status indicators and alarm indicators on each board, assisting the in locating and handling faults promptly. Provides the alarm input and output function, therefore facilitating the collection of equipment alarms. Dynamically monitors the equipment operation and alarm status of all stations on the NMS. Detects alarms and performance of a standby system control board. As for the 15-minute monitoring period, the equipment can store sixteen 15-minute history performance, that is, four hours of 15-minute history performance. As for the 24-hour monitoring period, the equipment can store 6x24-hour history performance, that is, six days of history performance. Monitors the data on a transmission network located in different network segments. RMON is a supplement to simple Ethernet performance management means, and can be used for a wide range of networks.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
70
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Applicati Function on Scenario Upgrade and loading of board software and NE software
8 Operation and Maintenance
Description
Voltage check Automatic search for optical fibers Queries of port impedance Queries of information about optical modules Monitoring the outdoor cabinet Power consumption control
OAM
ETH OAM
s the fiber auto-discovery function on the NMS.
s the query of port impedance on the NMS.
ATM OAM
MPLS OAM
One-click data collection
Loopback
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Measures the input voltage and detects the undervoltage and overvoltage states.
Fault locating
s in-service upgrades and loading of board software and NE software. s remote loading of board software and field programmable gate array (FPGA). s error-loading-proof and resumable loading.
Allows information about optical modules to be queried on the NMS, including the single-mode/multi-mode, rate level, vendor, production date, and wavelength. Monitors the outdoor cabinet by means of the monitoring port on the AUX board. Computes and reports the system power consumption. Monitors the total system power consumption, and reports alarms if the total system power consumption is about to exceed or is higher than the rated NE power consumption. Detects and monitors the connectivity and performance of service trails by using outband packets. During the process, services are not affected. Complies with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah. Detects and locates ATM faults, and monitors ATM performance. Detects and locates faults within an MPLS network, and works with MPLS APS to protect services. MPLS OAM mechanisms include tunnel OAM and PW OAM. Tunnel OAM operates at the tunnel layer, and PW OAM operates at the PW layer. Provides the one-click data collection function to collect fault data, which shortens data collection time before service recovery. s can collect fault data selectively, and can stop a collection process manually. Service boards inloops and outloops on ports, which facilitates fault locating.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
71
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Applicati Function on Scenario Remote maintenance PRBS
8 Operation and Maintenance
Description
Warm/Cold resets Hot swap
If the equipment becomes faulty, the maintenance personnel can use a public telephone network to remotely maintain the OptiX OSN 550 systems. An NE enabled with the PRBS function can be used as a simple instrument that transmits and receives unframed services in order to analyze whether service paths are faulty. An NE enabled with the PRBS function can be used to analyze itself or the entire network. The PRBS function is a substitute for a test instrument during a deployment or fault localization. The system control, switching, and timing boards and service boards warm and cold resets. Warm resets do not affect services. The system control, switching, and timing boards, service boards, fan boards, and power supply boards hot swap. Pluggable optical modules can be hot-swapped. Service cables and auxiliary cables can be hot-swapped.
8.3 Upgrade Methods If the current version of the OptiX OSN 550 cannot meet customer requirements, upgrade the equipment to a higher version. The available upgrade methods are package loading, package diffusion, and hot patch loading. Table 8-3 lists the upgrade methods available for the OptiX OSN 550.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
72
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
8 Operation and Maintenance
Table 8-3 Upgrade methods available for the OptiX OSN 550 Upgrade Method
Package Loading
Package Diffusion
Hot Patch Loading
Definition
With a software package description file, the software package functions as a logical package of the required software. This logical package can be ed to upgrade the entire NE.
With a software package description file, the software package functions as a logical package of the required software. The logical package is diffused and almost synchronously loaded to all NEs on a network. This upgrade method is more efficient.
During hot patch loading, new software codes substitute for running software codes, which do not interrupt services but rectify a software defect or implement a new requirement. These new software codes are codes in a hot patch.
Application Scenario
Characteristic
One NE needs to be upgraded. The system control board and other boards must package loading. There is a CF card on the system control board. All the boards on an NE can be upgraded on a unified GUI. There is no need to care about which board to upgrade or which files to update.
Applicable Version
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Versions of V100R003C00 and later this upgrade method.
More than one NE needs to be upgraded. The system control board and other boards must package loading. There is a CF card on the system control board. All the boards on an NE can be upgraded on a unified GUI. There is no need to care about which board to upgrade or which files to update. The software package is diffused. Network load and network bandwidth are both shared.
Versions of V100R003C00 and later this upgrade method.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Services are not interrupted during the upgrade.
Services are not interrupted during the upgrade. Hot patches decrease the number of product versions, therefore avoiding frequent version upgrades. Hot patches can be loaded remotely. Version rollback is ed after a hot patch is loaded, reducing upgrade risks.
Versions of V100R005C01 and later this upgrade method.
73
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
8 Operation and Maintenance
8.4 License Control Packet features are available only if the appropriate license files have been purchased.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
74
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
9
Technical Specifications
9.1 General Specifications This section describes the chassis dimensions, weight, power consumption, heat consumption, power supply performance, electromagnetic compatibility, and reliability. Table 9-1 lists the general specifications of the OptiX OSN 550. Table 9-1 General specifications of the OptiX OSN 550 Item
Description
Dimensions 88 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (H x W x D) Weight Power Consumpti on
10 kg
Maximum power consumption: 240 W Typical power consumption: 142 W Board configuration for typical power consumption: 2 x PCXLX + 3 x EM6F + 1 x MD1 + FAN + 2 x PIU, as shown in the figure.
SL OTT SLO 10 10 S LOT (PIU) (PI U) SLOT 11 11 SL OTT (FAN) SLO (FAN) 99 (PI (PIU) U)
Heat Consumpti on Power Supply Performanc e
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
SL SLOT OT 7 (C7ST/CSH (CSH)) SL OT 5 (EX T)
SLOT SL OT88 (CSH) (C ST/CSH) SL OT 6 (EXT)
SLSLOT OT 3 (EX 3 T) (MD1
SL OT (E XT) SLOT 4 4(EM6F)
SLOT 1 (EXT ) SLOT 1 (MD1)
SLTOT (EXT ) SLO 2 2(EF6F)
Maximum heat consumption: 819 BTU/h Typical heat consumption: 485 BTU/h
DC power supply − Rated voltage: -48 V or -60 V − Voltage range: -38.4 V to -72 V AC power supply − Rated voltage: 110/220 V − Voltage range: 100 V to 240 V
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
75
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Item
9 Technical Specifications
Description
Fuse Capacity
DC power supply: 20A AC power supply: 5A
Electromag Complies with EMC Class A. netic Compatibili ty Reliability
System availability: 0.9999965 Average annual repair rate: < 1.5% Mean time to repair (MTTR): 1 hour Mean time between failures (MT BF): 33.08 years
9.2 Packet Performance Indicators This section describes the equipment's packet performance indicators. Table 9-2 lists the OptiX OSN 550's packet performance indicators. Table 9-2 OptiX OSN 550 packet functions and features Item
Description
MPLS suppo rt capab ility
The packet switching unit of the PCX board works with a service board to implement MPLS functions.
PWE3 suppo rt capab ility
Setup mode: static LSPs Protection: 1:1 MPLS tunnel APS OAM: − s MPLS OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.1711. − s LSP ping and LSP traceroute functions. The packet switching unit of the PCX board works with a service board to implement PWE3 functions. Service categories − TDM PWE3 (CES) services − ATM PWE3 services − ETH PWE3 services Setup mode: static PWs Protection: 1:1 PW APS OAM: − the ping and traceroute commands of PWs, the virtual circuit connectivity verification (VCCV) command. − s PW OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.1711.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
s MS-PWs.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
76
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
Item
Description
Servic e
Service Type
Description
Etherne s Native ETH t and ETH PWE3 service services. Format of Ethernet data frames: IEEE 802.3 and Ethernet II Jumbo frames MTU length: 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes (1620 bytes, by default) MPLS function VLAN function . The VLAN IDs range from 1 to 4094.
Maximum Re ceiving Capability
Description
Connector
FE (electrical port): 36
10/100BASETX
RJ-45
FE (optical port): 48
100Base-FX
LC
LC
10GE (optical port) PCXLX/ PCXX: 2
QinQ GE (optical Size of a MAC port) address table: 16 KB PCXLG/ (including static PCXGA/ entries) PCXGB: 14 GE (electrical port): 12
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Service Port
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10GBASELR (LAN) 10GBASELW (WAN) 10GBASEER (LAN) 10GBASEEW (WAN) 10GBASEZR (LAN) 10GBASEZW (WAN)
1000Base-L LC X 1000Base-V X 1000Base-Z X
10/100/1000B RJ-45 ASE-TX
77
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Item
Description CES service
ATM/I MA service
Protec tion
9 Technical Specifications
MPLS APS
Service type: 192xE1 point-to-point service Encapsulation types:
75/120-ohm smart E1 port
Anea 96
75/120-ohm smart E1 port
Anea 96
CESoPSN SAToP Compression of idle timeslots: ed (only for CESoPSN encapsulation) Jitter compensation buffering time: 375 us to 16000 us Packet loading time: 125 us to 5000 us CES ACR: ed Retiming: ed Number of ATM connections: 256 ATM traffic management ATM encapsulation format N-to-one VPC N-to-one VCC One-to-one VPC One-to-one VCC Maximum number of concatenated ATM cells: 31 ATM OAM: F4 (VP layer) and F5 (VC layer) Maximum number of IMA groups: 32 Maximum number of in an IMA group: 16
192xE1
Maximum number of protection groups: 64 Switching duration not more than 100 ms
NOTE MP LS AP S and P W AP S share 64 protection group resources.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
78
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Item
9 Technical Specifications
Description
PW APS
Maximum number of protection groups: 64 Switching duration not more than 100 ms
NOTE MP LS AP S and P W AP S share 64 protection group resources.
MSTP
LPT LAG
Maint enanc e
MPLS OAM
Point-point and point-multipoint LPT
Switching duration not more than 5s
Intra-board LAG and inter-board LAG A maximum of 16 LAGs. Each LAG has a maximum of 8 .
Switching duration not more than 500 ms
T unnel OAM and PW OAM Maximum number of MPLS OAM resources: 128
NOTE MP LS OAM and P W OAM share 128 OAM resources.
ETH-O AM
ATM OAM
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
s the MSTP protocol that generates only the CIST . The MSTP protocol provides functions equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.
s the following IEEE 802.1ag OAM functions: − Management of OAM maintenance points − Continuity check (CC) − Loopback (LB) − Link trace (LT) s the following IEEE 802.3ah OAM functions: − OAM auto-discovery − Link performance monitoring − Fault detection − Loopback at the remote end − Self-loop detection and self-looped port blocking Number of MD/MA/MEP: 64 Maximum number of ATM connections: 256
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
79
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Item
9 Technical Specifications
Description RMON
s port-level and service-level RMON functions, in compliance with RFC 2819. s four RMON management groups: Ethernet statistics group, Ethernet history group, Ethernet alarm group, and Ethernet history control group. Port level: Basic Ethernet performance Extended Ethernet performance Service level: L2VPN T unnel PW
Synch roniza tion
Synchr onous Etherne t clock
CES ACR
Other s
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
QoS
Synchronous Ethernet that complies with ITU-T G.8261 and ITU-T G.8262. Port receiving/transmitting synchronous Ethernet clocks: FE/GE/10GE Input/Output of SSM packets Clock frequency stability (hold-over mode): less than 50 ppb Maximum number of CES ACR clocks: 4 The clock performance complies with the ITU-T G.823 Traffic template. Tributary retiming.
DiffServ s simple traffic classification by specifying PHB service classes for service flows based on their QoS information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DS values, or MPLS EXP values) carried by the packets. Complex traffic classification s traffic classification based on C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DS values carried by packets. CAR Provides the CAR function for the traffic flows at ports. Shaping s traffic shaping for a specific port, prioritized queue, or traffic flow. Queue scheduling policies − SP − WRR − SP+WRR
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
80
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
9.3 TDM Performance Indicators This section describes the OptiX OSN 550's TDM performance indicators. Table 9-3 lists the OptiX OSN 550's TDM performance indicators. Table 9-3 OptiX OSN 550 TDM functions and features Item
Description
Service
Service Type
SDH service
PDH service
Protection
SN
MSP Ring
Linear MSP
Maintena nce Synchroni zation
PRBS
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Re ceiving Capability
Service Port Description
Connector
26xSTM-1
S-1.1, L-1.1 and L-1.2 optical ports
LC
14xSTM-4
S-4.1, L-4.1 and L-4.2 optical ports
LC
14xSTM-16
S-16.1, L-16.1 and L-16.2 optical ports
LC
252xE1/T1
E1(75/120-ohm )/T1(100-ohm) electrical port
Anea 96
SN at the VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 levels Maximum number of protection groups: 1032 Switching duration not more than 50 ms MSP Ring at the STM-1, ST M-4 and STM-16 levels Maximum number of protection groups: 13 Switching duration not more than 50 ms Linear MSP at the STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16 levels Maximum number of 1+1/1:1 Linear MSP protection groups: 13 Switching duration not more than 50 ms
ed
Physical layer clocks, including line clocks, tributary clocks, and two-input and two-output external clocks. The port impedance is 120 ohms or 75 ohms (a converter can be used to provide a 75-ohm clock port). Non-synchronization status message (SSM), standard SSM, and extended SSM protocols Tributary retiming Tracing mode, hold-over mode, and free-run mode
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
81
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
9.4 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board This section describes the power consumption and weight of each board ed by the equipment. Table 9-4 lists the power consumption and weight of the boards ed by the OptiX OSN 550. Table 9-4 Power consumption and weight of boards ed by the OptiX OSN 550 Board
Power Consumption (W)
Weight (kg)
PCX
45
0.80
MD1
12.2
0.50
EM6T
10.4
0.37
EM6F
11.3
0.40
EF8F
23
0.55
SL1D
4.12
0.30
SL4D
4.7
0.30
SL1Q
4.3
0.30
SP3D
11.5
0.85
PL3T
5.0
0.30
AUX
2.5
0.30
PIU
0.5
0.12
APIU
Room temperature (25℃):20.0 High temperature (55℃):30.0
1.93
Room temperature (25℃):12.0 High temperature (55℃):29.6
0.30
FAN
9.5 Optical Port Specifications This section describes the specifications of OptiX OSN 550's STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 optical ports and GE optical ports.
Specifications of STM-1 Optical Ports Table 9-5 lists the specifications of OptiX OSN 550's ST M-1 optical ports.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
82
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
Table 9-5 Specifications of OptiX OSN 550's STM-1 optical ports Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Optical port type
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
Transmission distance (km)
2 to 15
20 to 40
60 to 80
Operating wavelength range (nm)
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
Optical fiber type
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Launched optical power range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
-28
-34
-34
Minimum overload (dBm)
-8
-10
0
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.2
10
10
NOTE Format of optical port type is defined as follows: transmission distance-signal rate.fiber type Explanation for optical port type "S-1.1" is as follows: "S" represents short distance; the first digit "1" represents STM-1 signals; the second digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm). Explanation for optical port type "L-1.1" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first digit "1" represents STM-1 signals; the second digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm). Explanation for optical port type "L-1.2" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first digit "1" represents STM-1 signals; the second digit "2" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1550 nm)..
Specifications of STM-4 Optical Ports Table 9-6 lists the specifications of OptiX OSN 550's ST M-4 optical ports. Table 9-6 Specifications of OptiX OSN 550's STM-4 optical ports Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
622080 kbit/s
Optical port type
S-4.1
L-4.1
L-4.2
Transmission distance (km)
2 to 15
20 to 40
50 to 80
Operating wavelength range (nm)
1274 to 1356
1280 to 1335
1480 to 1580
Optical fiber type
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
83
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
Item
Value
Launched optical power range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-3 to +2
-3 to +2
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
-28
-28
-28
Minimum overload (dBm)
-8
-8
-8
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.2
10
10
NOTE Format of optical port type is defined as follows: transmission distance-signal rate.fiber type Explanation for optical port type "S-4.1" is as follows: "S" represents short distance; the first digit "4" represents STM-4 signals; the second digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm). Explanation for optical port type "L-4.1" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first digit "4" represents STM-4 signals; the second digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm). Explanation for optical port type "L-4.2" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first digit "4" represents STM-4 signals; the second digit "2" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1550 nm).
Specifications of STM-16 Optical Ports Table 9-7 lists the specifications of OptiX OSN 550's ST M-16 optical ports. Table 9-7 Specifications of OptiX OSN 550's STM-16 optical ports Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
2488320 kbit/s
Optical port type
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Transmission distance (km)
2 to 15
20 to 40
50 to 80
Operating wavelength range (nm)
1274 to 1356
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Optical fiber type
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Launched optical power range (dBm)
-5 to 0
-2 to +3
-2 to +3
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
-18
-27
-28
Minimum overload (dBm)
0
-9
-9
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.2
8.2
8.2
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
84
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Item
9 Technical Specifications
Value
NOTE Format of optical port type is defined as follows: transmission distance-signal rate.fiber type Explanation for optical port type "S-16.1" is as follows: "S" represents short distance; the first two digits "16" represent STM-16 signals; the third digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm). Explanation for optical port type "L-16.1" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first two digits "16" represent STM-16 signals; the third digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm). Explanation for optical port type "L-16.2" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first two digits "16" represent STM-16 signals; the third digit "2" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1550 nm).
Specifications of FE Optical Ports Table 9-8 lists the main specifications of FE optical ports of the OptiX OSN 550. Table 9-8 Specifications of FE optical ports of the OptiX OSN 550 Item
Value
Optical port type
100Base-FX
100Base-FX
100Base-FX
Optical fiber type
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Transmission distance (km)
15
40
80
Operating wavelength (nm)
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
Mean launched power (dBm)
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm)
-28
-34
-34
Minimum overload (dBm)
-8
-10
-10
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.2
10
10
Specifications of GE Optical Ports Table 9-9 lists the main specifications of GE optical ports of the OptiX OSN 550.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
85
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
Table 9-9 Specifications of OptiX OSN 550's GE optical ports Item
Value
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)
1000
Optical port type
1000BASE-LX
1000BASE-VX
1000BASE-ZX
Optical fiber type
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Transmission distance (km)
10
40
80
Operating wavelength (nm)
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Mean launched power (dBm)
-9 to -3
-5 to 0
-2 to +5
Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm)
-20
-23
-23
Minimum overload (dBm)
-3
-3
-3
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
9
9
9
With different SFP modules, the equipment provides GE optical ports with different types and transmission distances.
Specifications of 10GE Optical Ports Table 9-10 lists the main specifications of 10GE optical ports of the OptiX OSN 550. Table 9-10 Specifications of 10GE optical ports of the OptiX OSN 550 Item
Performance
Optical port type
10GBASE-LR (LAN) 10GBASE-LW (WAN)
10GBASE-ER (LAN) 10GBASE-EW (WAN)
10GBASE-ZR (LAN) 10GBASE-ZW (WAN)
Optical fiber type
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Transmission distance (km)
10
40
80
Operating wavelength (nm)
1260 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
86
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
Item
Performance
Mean launched power (dBm)
-6 to -1
-1 to +2
0 to 4
Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm)
-11
-15
-24
Minimum overload (dBm)
0.5
-1
-7
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
6
8.2
9
9.6 Electrical Port Specifications This section describes the equipment's electrical port specifications. The equipment's electrical ports include PDH electrical ports, CES/ATM/IMA service electrical ports, and Ethernet electrical ports.
E1/T1 Electrical Ports Table 9-11 lists the specifications of OptiX OSN 550's E1/T1 electrical ports. Table 9-11 Specifications of OptiX OSN 550's E1/T1 electrical ports Electrical Port Type
1544 kbit/s
2048 kbit/s
Code pattern
B8ZS code, AMI code
HDB3 code
Waveform at the output port
Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Signal bit rate at the output port Allowed attenuation at the input port Permitted frequency deviation at the input port
Complies with ITU-T G.823.
Input jitter tolerance
Complies with ITU-T G.824.
Complies with ITU-T G.823.
Anti-interference capability at the input port
-
Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Reflection attenuation at the input and output ports
-
Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Output jitter
Complies with ITU-T G.823 and G.824.
Mapping jitter
Complies with ITU-T G.783.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
87
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
Electrical Port Type
1544 kbit/s
2048 kbit/s
Jitter transfer function
-
Complies with ITU-T G.742.
Port type
Anea 96
Combined jitter
E3/T3 Electrical Ports Table 9-12 lists the specifications of OptiX OSN 550's E3/T3 electrical ports. Table 9-12 Specifications of OptiX OSN 550's E3/T3 electrical ports Parameter
Nominal Value
Bit rate
34368 kbit/s
Number of ports
3xE3/T3
Code pattern
HDB3
B3ZS
Connector
SMB
SMB
Impedance (ohm)
75
75
Signal bit rate at the output port
Complies with ITU-T G.703.
44736 kbit/s
Permitted frequency deviation at the input port Allowed attenuation at the input port Input jitter tolerance
Complies with ITU-T G.823.
Complies with ITU-T G.824.
CES/ATM/IMA Service Electrical Ports Table 9-13 lists the specifications of OptiX OSN 550's CES/ATM/IMA service electrical ports. Table 9-13 Specifications of OptiX OSN 550's CES/ATM/IMA service electrical ports Item
Performance
Standard compliance
ITU-T G.703/G.823
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)
2048
Code pattern
HDB3
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
88
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
Item
Performance
Impedance (ohm)
75
120
Pair in each direction
One coaxial pair
One symmetrical pair
Port type
Anea 96
Ethernet Electrical Ports Table 9-14 lists the specifications of OptiX OSN 550's Ethernet electrical ports. Table 9-14 Specifications of OptiX OSN 550's Ethernet electrical ports Service Port
Port Rate
Code Pattern
Port Type
GE/FE electrical port
10BASE-T
Manchester coding signals
RJ-45
GE/FE electrical port
100BASE-TX
MLT-3 coding signal
GE electrical port
1000BASE-T
4D-PAM5 coding signal
9.7 Auxiliary Port Specifications This section describes the specifications of auxiliary ports including synchronous data ports, asynchronous data ports, orderwire ports, and external clock.
External Clock Table 9-15 Specifications of external clock ports ed by the OptiX OSN 550 Item
Performance
External synchronous source
2048 kbit/s (in compliance with ITU-T G.703) or 2048 kHz (in compliance with ITU-T G.703)
Frequency accuracy
Complies with ITU-T G.813
Pull-in or pull-out range Noise generation Noise toleration Noise transfer Transient response and holdover performance
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
89
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
Item
Performance
Synchronization clock transfer accuracy
< 50 ppb
Synchronous Data Ports Table 9-16 Specifications of synchronous data ports ed by the OptiX OSN 550 Item
Performance
Transmission channel
Byte F1 in the SDH overhead
Bit rate (kbit/s)
64
Port type
Codirectional
Characteristics of ports
Complies with ITU-T G.703
Asynchronous Data Ports Table 9-17 Specifications of asynchronous data ports ed by the OptiX OSN 550 Item
Performance
Transmission channel
-defined byte in the SDH overhead
Bit rate (kbit/s)
≤ 19.2
Characteristics of ports
Complies with RS-232
Orderwire Ports Table 9-18 Specifications of orderwire ports ed by the OptiX OSN 550 Item
Performance
Transmission channel
Bytes E1 and E2 in the SDH overhead
Orderwire type
Addressing call
Pair in each direction
One symmetrical pair
Impedance (ohm)
600
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
90
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
Outdoor cabinet monitoring ports Table 9-19 Outdoor cabinet monitoring ports ed by the OptiX OSN 550 Item
Performance
Characteristics of ports
Complies with RS-485
9.8 Optical Module Specifications This section describes the BOMs of optical modules, as well as corresponding information and port types. Table 9-20 provides the specifications for small form-factor pluggable/enhanced small form-factor pluggable (SFP/eSFP) optical modules on the OptiX OSN 550. Table 9-20 SFP/eSFP Optical Modules That the OptiX OSN 550 s Part Number
Name
Specification
Applicable Board
34060473
1.25 Gbit/s eSFP optical module
Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, -9 dBm, -3 dBm, -20 dBm, LC, SM, 10 km
EM6F/PCXLG/PCX GA/PCXGB
34060298
1.25 Gbit/s eSFP optical module
Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 EM6F/PCXLG/PCX nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, -5 dBm, 0 dBm, GA/PCXGB -23 dBm, LC, SM, 40 km
34060360
1.25 Gbit/s eSFP optical module
Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1550 EM6F/PCXLG/PCX nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, -2 dBm, 5 dBm, GA/PCXGB -23 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km
34060470
1.25 Gbit/s single-fiber bidirectional eSFP optical module
Optical transceiver, SFP, Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1490 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, -9 dBm, -3 dBm, -19.5 dBm, LC, SM, 10 km
EM6F/PCXLG/PCX GA/PCXGB
34060475
1.25 Gbit/s single-fiber bidirectional eSFP optical module
Optical transceiver, SFP,Tx1490 nm/Rx1310 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, -3 dBm, -9 dBm, -19.5 dBm, LC, SM,10 km
EM6F/PCXLG/PCX GA/PCXGB
34060276
155 Mbit/s eSFP optical module
Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, STM-1, -15 dBm, -8 dBm, -31 dBm, LC, SM, 15 km
EF8F
Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, STM-1, -5 dBm, 0 dBm, -37 dBm, LC, SM, 40 km
EF8F
34060281
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
91
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Part Number
Name
9 Technical Specifications
Specification
Applicable Board
34060282
Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1550 nm, STM-1, -5 dBm, 0 dBm, -37 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km
EF8F
34060307
Optical transceiver, eSFP(industry), 1310 nm, ST M-1, -15 dBm, -8 dBm, -31 dBm, LC, SM, 15 km
EF8F
34060308
Optical transceiver, eSFP(industry), 1310 nm, ST M-1, -5 dBm, 0 dBm, -37 dBm, LC, SM, 40 km
EF8F
34060309
Optical transceiver, eSFP(industry), 1550 nm, ST M-1, -5 dBm, 0 dBm, -37 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km
EF8F
34060363
Optical transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1550 nm, ST M-1, -15 dBm, -8 dBm, -32 dBm, LC/PC, SM, 15 km
EF8F
34060364
Optical transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1550 nm/Rx 1310 nm, ST M-1, -15 dBm, -8 dBm, -32 dBm, LC/PC, SM, 15 km
EF8F
34060328
Optical transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1550 nm, ST M-1, -5 dBm, 0 dBm, -32 dBm, LC/PC, SM, 40 km
EF8F
34060329
Optical transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1550 nm/Rx 1310 nm, ST M-1, -5 dBm, 0 dBm, -32 dBm, LC/PC, SM, 40 km
EF8F
Table 9-21 provides the specifications for 10-Gigabit small form-factor pluggable transceiver (XFP) optical modules on the OptiX OSN 550. Table 9-21 XFP Optical Modules That the OptiX OSN 550 s Part Number
Name
34060313
9.95 Gbit/s to Optical transceiver, XFP, 1310 10.71 Gbit/s XFP nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 10.71 optical module Gbit/s, -6 dBm, -1 dBm, -14.4 dBm, LC, SM, 10 km
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Specification
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Applicable Board PCXLX/PCXX
92
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
Part Number
Name
Specification
Applicable Board
34060322
9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s XFP optical module
Optical transceiver, XFP, 1550 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -15 dBm, LC, SM, 40 km
PCXLX/PCXX
34060361
9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s XFP optical module
Optical transceiver, XFP, 1550 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 4 dBm, -24 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km
PCXLX/PCXX
9.9 Indicator Status Explanation This section describes the definitions of indicators ed by the OptiX OSN 550. There is no indicator on the OptiX OSN 550 chassis.
Table 9-22 lists the definitions of indicators ed by the boards on the OptiX OSN 550. Table 9-22 Definitions of indicators ed by the boards on the OptiX OSN 550 Indicator
State
Meaning
Applicable Board
ST AT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
PCX (PCXLX/PCXX/PC XLG/PCXGA/PCX GB)/MD1/EM6T/E M6F/EF8F/SL1D/S L4D/SL1Q/SP3D/P L3T/AUX
PROG
The board is not working or created. There is no power supplied to the system.
Blinks on (green) and off at 100 ms intervals
When the board is being powered on or reset, the software is being loaded.
Blinks on (green) and off at 300 ms intervals
When the board is being powered on or reset, the board software is in BIOS boot state.
PCX (PCXLX/PCXX/PC XLG/PCXGA/PCX GB)/EM6T/EM6F
Blinks on (red) and When the board is being off at 100 ms powered on or reset, the intervals BOOT ROM self-check fails. On (green)
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
The upper layer software is being initialized.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
93
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Indicator
9 Technical Specifications
State
Meaning
On (red)
SYNC
SRV
The software is running normally.
On (green)
The clock is normal.
On (red)
The clock source is lost or is switched.
On (green)
The system/service is working properly.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the system/services.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm occurs in the system/services.
ACT
On (green)
Off
LINK1/LIN K2
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
When the board is being powered or reset, the memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails. When the board is running, the logic file or upper layer software is lost. The pluggable storage card is faulty.
Off
Off
Applicable Board
PCX (PCXLX/PCXX/PC XLG/PCXGA/PCX GB) PCX (PCXLX/PCXX/PC XLG/PCXGA/PCX GB)/MD1/EM6T/E M6F/EF8F/SL1D/S L4D/SP3D/AUX
For the PCX board, there is no power supplied to the system. The board is standby under 1+1 protection. For the service board, no service is configured. The board is active under 1+1 protection. The board is already activated under no protection.
PCX (PCXLX/PCXX/PC XLG/PCXGA/PCX GB)
The board is standby under 1+1 protection. The board is not activated under no protection.
On (green)
The GE port is connected correctly, and is not receiving or transmitting data.
Blinking (yellow)
The GE port is receiving or transmitting data.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
EM6F
94
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Indicator
LOS/LOS1/ LOS2
L/A
PWR
FAN
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
9 Technical Specifications
State
Meaning
Off
The GE port is connected correctly or is abnormal.
On (red)
The optical port on the board reports the R_LOS alarm.
Blinking (red) three times every second
The optical port on the board receives too strong power.
Blinking (red) one time every second
The optical port on the board receives too weak power.
Blinking (red) three times every second
The optical port on the board reports the MS_RDI alarm.
Off
The optical port on the board is not reporting the R_LOS alarm.
On (green)
The port is physically connected (link up) but is not receiving or transmitting data
Blinking (red) three times every second, 300 ms on and 300 ms off
The port on the board receives too strong power.
Blinking (red) three times every second, 300 ms on and 700 ms off
The port on the board receives too weak power.
Blinking (orange)
The port is normal (link up) and is receiving and transmitting data.
Off
The optical fiber is disconnected from the port or the port is abnormal (link down/LOS).
On (green)
Power is being supplied.
Off
Power is off or power supplies are connected incorrectly.
On (green)
The fan board is working properly.
On (red)
The fan board is faulty.
Off
The fan board is not powered on or is not installed.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Applicable Board
PCX (PCXLX/PCXLG)/S L1D/SL4D
PCX (PCXLX/PCXX/PC XLG/PCXGA/PCX GB)/EF8F
PIU
FAN
95
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
Indicator
State
Meaning
Applicable Board
CRIT /MAJ/ MIN
On (red)
The NE has critical/major/minor alarms.
FAN
9.10 Safety Certification The OptiX OSN 550 has ed many safety certifications. Table 9-23 lists the safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 550 has ed. Table 9-23 Safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 550 has ed Item
Standard
Electromagnetic compatibility
CE certification ET SI EN 301 489-1 ET SI EN 301 489-4 CISPR 22
EN 55022
Surge protection
Safety
Environmental protection
ITU-T K.27 ET SI EN 300 253 CE certification ET SI EN 60215 ET SI EN 60950
IEC 60825 GB 4943
RoHS
9.11 Environmental Specifications The OptiX OSN 550 requires proper environment for storage, transportation, and operation. 9.11.1 Storage Environment This section provides the requirements on the storage environment for the OptiX OSN 550. 9.11.2 Transportation Environment This section provides the requirements on the transportation environment for the OptiX OSN 550. 9.11.3 Operation Environment
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
96
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
This section provides the requirements on the operation environment for the OptiX OSN 550.
9.11.1 Storage Environment This section provides the requirements on the storage environment for the OptiX OSN 550.
Climate Table 9-24 lists the climate requirements for the storage environment. Table 9-24 Climate requirements for the storage environment Item
Range
Altitude
≤ 4000 m
Atmospheric pressure
70-106 kPa
Temperature
-40°C to +70°C
Temperature change rate
≤ 1°C/min
Relative humidity
5% to 100%
Solar radiation
≤ 1120 W/s2
Heat radiation
≤ 600 W/s2
Wind speed
≤ 30 m/s
Waterproofing Requirements Requirements for storing equipment on site: Generally, the equipment must be stored indoors. No water should remain on the floor or leak into the equipment crate. The equipment should be placed away from areas where water leakage is possible (for example, do not place near automatic fire-fighting extinguishing and heating systems. Ensure all the following four conditions if the equipment is stored outdoors:
The crate is intact. Proper rain-proofing measures are taken to prevent water from entering the crate. No water is on the ground where the crate is placed and water is not seeped into the crate. The carton is not exposed to direct sunlight.
Biological Environment
Avoid multiplication of microbes (such as eumycete and mycete). Control and exclude rodents (such as mice).
Air Cleanliness
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive or corrosive dust. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
97
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
Table 9-25 lists the density limitations for mechanically active substances during storage.
Table 9-25 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during storage Mechanical Active Substance
Content
Suspended dust
≤ 5.00 mg/m3
Precipitable dust
≤ 20.0 mg/m ²·h
Sand particles
≤ 300 mg/m 3
Table 9-26 lists the density requirements for chemically active substances.
Table 9-26 Density requirements for chemically active substances during storage Chemically Active Substance
Content
SO2
≤ 0.30 mg/m3
H2 S
≤ 0.10 mg/m3
NO2
≤ 0.50 mg/m3
NH3
≤ 1.00 mg/m3
CL2
≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HCL
≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HF
≤ 0.01 mg/m3
O3
≤ 0.05 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress Table 9-27 lists the limitations for mechanical stress during storage. Table 9-27 Limitations for mechanical stress during storage Item
Sub-Item
Range
Sinusoidal vibration
Displacement
1.5 mm
Acceleration
5 m/s2
Frequency range
2-9 Hz
Static pressure
Static pressure = Product weight x (Maximum number of stacked layers that is specified on the product package - 1) x 5 x 9.8 (N)
Static load
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-200 Hz
98
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Item
9 Technical Specifications
Sub-Item
Range
NOTE Static load is the pressure from the upside that the packaged equipment can tolerate when equipment is stacked in the specified manner.
9.11.2 Transportation Environment This section provides the requirements on the transportation environment for the OptiX OSN 550.
Climate Table 9-28 lists the climate requirements for the transportation environment. Table 9-28 Climate requirements for the transportation environment Item
Range
Altitude
≤ 4000 m
Aire pressure
70-106 kPa
Temperature
-40°C to +70°C
Temperature change rate
≤ 1°C/min
Relative humidity
5% to 100%
Solar radiation
≤ 1120 W/s2
Heat radiation
≤ 600 W/s2
Wind speed
≤ 30 m/s
Waterproofing Requirement Ensure the following conditions are met when transporting the equipment:
The crate is intact. Proper rain-proofing measures are taken on the vehicle to prevent water from entering the crate. No water is present in the vehicle.
Biological Environment
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Avoid multiplication of microbes (such as eumycete and mycete). Keep rodents such as mice away.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
99
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
Air Cleanliness
The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive or corrosive dust. Table 9-29 lists the density limitations for mechanically active substances during transportation.
Table 9-29 Density limitations for mechanically active substances during transportation Mechanically Active Substance
Content
Suspended dust
No requirement
Precipitable dust
≤ 3.0 mg/m2 ·h
Sand particles
≤ 100 mg/m 3
Table 9-30 lists the density limitations for chemically active substances.
Table 9-30 Density limitations for chemically active substances Chemically Active Substance
Content
SO2
≤ 1.00 mg/m3
H2 S
≤ 0.50 mg/m3
NOx
≤ 1.00 mg/m3
NH3
≤ 3.00 mg/m3
CL2
-
HCL
≤ 0.50 mg/m3
HF
≤ 0.03 mg/m3
O3
≤ 0.10 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress Table 9-31 lists the mechanical stress requirements for the transportation environment. Table 9-31 Mechanical stress requirements for the transportation environment Item
Sub-Item
Range
Random vibration
Acceleration spectral density
1 m 2/s3
-3 dBA
Frequency range
5-20 Hz
20-200 Hz
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
100
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
Item
Sub-Item
Range
Impact
Response spectrum I (weight of sample > 50 kg)
100 m/s2 , 11 ms, 100 times for each
Response spectrum II (weight of sample ≤ 50 kg)
180 m/s2 , 6 ms, 100 times for each
Weight (kg)
Height (m)
< 10
1.0
< 15
1.0
< 20
0.8
< 30
0.6
< 40
0.5
< 50
0.4
< 100
0.3
> 100
0.1
Static pressure
Static pressure = Product weight x (Maximum number of stacked layers that is specified on the product package - 1) x 5 x 9.8 (N)
Drop
Static load
NOTE Impact response spectrum: maxi mum acceleration response curve that the equipment generates when struck with the stipulated impact. Static load is the pressure from the upside that the packaged equipment can tolerate when equipment is stacked in the specified manner.
9.11.3 Operation Environment This section provides the requirements on the operation environment for the OptiX OSN 550.
Climate Table 9-32 and Table 9-33 list the climate requirements for the operation environment of the OptiX OSN 550. Table 9-32 Requirements for temperature and humidity Working Temperature Long-term operating temperature: -5°C to +55°C
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Relative Humidity Extended operating temperature: -5°C to +65°C
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5% to 95%
101
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
Working Temperature
Relative Humidity
NOTE The temperature and humidity values are tested at 1.5 m above the floor and 0.4 m in front of the equipment. Extended operating indicates that the successive operating time of the equipment does not exceed 4 hours, and the accumulated operating time per year does not exceed 90 days.
Table 9-33 Other climate requirements Item
Range
Altitude
≤ 4000 m
Air pressure
70-106 kPa
Temperature change rate
≤ 30°C/h
Solar radiation
≤ 700 W/s2
Heat radiation
≤ 600 W/s2
Wind speed
≤ 5 m/s
Biological Environment
Avoid multiplication of microbes (such as eumycete and mycete). Keep rodents such as mice away.
Air Cleanliness
The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive or corrosive dust. Table 9-34 lists the density limitations for mechanically active substances during operation.
Table 9-34 Density limitations for mechanically active substances during operation Mechanically Active Substance
Content
Dust particle
≤ 3x10 5 /m3
Suspended dust
≤ 0.2 mg/m3
Precipitable dust
≤1.5 mg/m ².h
Sand particles
≤ 20 mg/m 3
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Table 9-35 lists the density limitations for chemically active substances.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
102
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
9 Technical Specifications
Table 9-35 Density limitations for chemically active substances Chemically Active Substance
Content
SO2
≤ 0.30 mg/m3
H2 S
≤ 0.10 mg/m3
NH3
≤ 1.00 mg/m3
CL2
≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HCL
≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HF
≤ 0.01 mg/m3
O3
≤ 0.05 mg/m3
NOx
≤ 0.50 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress Table 9-36 lists the limitations for mechanical stress during operation. Table 9-36 Limitations for mechanical stress during operation Item
Sub-Item
Range
Sinusoidal vibration
Velocity
≤ 5 mm/s
-
Acceleration
-
≤ 2 m/s²
Frequency range
5-62 Hz
62-200 Hz
Impact response spectrum
Half-sine wave, 30 m/s2 , 11 ms, three times for each
Non-steady impact
NOTE Impact response spectrum: maxi mum acceleration response curve that the equipment generates when struck with the stipulated impact.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
103
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
10
10 Energy Saving and Environmental Protection
Energy Saving and Environmental Protection
The OptiX 550 complies with RoHS directive (2002/96/CE) and WEEE directive (2002/95/CE)
Energy Conservation The OptiX OSN 550 adopts a variety of technologies to reduce equipment energy.
Uses an easy scheme for board design. Replaces ordinary chips with ASIC chips that require low power consumption. Uses highly efficient power modules.
Environmental Protection The is designed according to the requirements of environmental protection. The product complies with RoHS directive.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
The equipment is amply packaged while materials as conserved. The size of the package containing the equipment and accessories is at most three times the size of the net equipment. The product is also designed for easy unpacking. All hazardous substances contained in the packaging decompose easily. Every plastic component that weighs over 25 g is labeled according to the standards of ISO 11469 and ISO 1043-1 to ISO 1043-4. All components and packages of the equipment are provided with standard labels for recycling. Plugs and connectors are easy to find, and the associated operations can be performed by using simple tools. All the attached materials, such as labels, are easy to remove. Certain types of identifying information, such as silkscreens, are printed on the front or subrack.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
104
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
11 Standard Compliance
11
Standard Compliance
11.1 ITU-T Recommendations This section provides the ITU-T Recommendations that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with. Table 11-1 ITU-T recommendations Recommendation
Description
ITU-T G.664
Optical safety procedures and requirements for optical transport systems
ITU-T G.702
Digital hierarchy bit rates
ITU-T G.703
Physical/electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces
ITU-T G.704
Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448 and 44,736 kbit/s hierarchical levels
ITU-T G.706
Frame alignment and cyclic redundancy check(CRC) procedures relating to basic frame structures defined in Recommendation G.704
ITU-T G.707
Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH)
ITU-T G.773
Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of transmission systems
ITU-T G.774
Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) management information model for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.1
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy(SDH) performance monitoring for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.2
Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) configuration of the payload structure for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.3
Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) management of multiplex-section protection for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.4
Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) management of the sub-network connection protection for the network element view
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
105
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
11 Standard Compliance
Recommendation
Description
ITU-T G.774.5
Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) management of connection supervision functionality(HCS/LCS) for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.6
Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) unidirectional performance monitoring for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.7
Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) management of lower order path trace and interface labeling for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.9
Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) configuration of linear multiplex section protection for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.10
Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) configuration of linear multiplex section protection for the network element view
ITU-T G.775
Loss of Signal(LOS), Alarm Indication Signal(AIS) and Remote Defect Indication(RDI) defect detection and clearance criteria for PDH signals
ITU-T G.7710
Common equipment management function requirements
ITU-T G.780
Vocabulary of for synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) networks and equipment
ITU-T G.781
Synchronization layer functions
ITU-T G.783
Characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) equipment functional blocks
ITU-T G.784
Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) management
ITU-T G.803
Architecture of transport networks based on the synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH)
ITU-T G.805
Generic functional architecture of transport networks
ITU-T G.806
Characteristics of transport equipment - Description methodology and generic functionality
ITU-T G.808.1
Generic protection switching - Linear trail and sub-network protection
ITU-T G.810
Definitions and terminology for synchronization networks
ITU-T G.811
Timing characteristics of primary reference clocks
ITU-T G.812
Timing requirements of slave clocks suitable for use as node clocks in synchronization networks
ITU-T G.813
Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks(SEC)
ITU-T G.821
Error performance of an international digital connection operating at a bit rate below the primary rate and forming part of an integrated services digital network
ITU-T G.822
Controlled slip rate objectives on an international digital connection
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
106
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
11 Standard Compliance
Recommendation
Description
ITU-T G.823
The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 2048 kbit/s hierarchy
ITU-T G.825
The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH)
ITU-T G.826
Error performance parameters and objectives for international, constant bit rate digital paths at or above the primary rate
ITU-T G.828
Error performance parameters and objectives for international, constant bit rate synchronous digital paths
ITU-T G.829
Error performance events for SDH multiplex and regenerator sections
ITU-T G.831
Management capabilities of transport networks based on the synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH)
ITU-T G.832
Transport of SDH elements on PDH networks - Frame and multiplexing structures
ITU-T G.841
Types and characteristics of SDH network protection architectures
ITU-T G.842
Inter-working of SDH network protection architectures
ITU-T G.957
Optical interfaces for equipments and systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy
ITU-T G.958
Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy for use on optical fiber cables
ITU-T G.7043/Y.1343
Virtual concatenation of Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) signals
ITU-T G.8010
Architecture of Ethernet layer networks
ITU-T G.8011
Ethernet over Transport - Ethernet services framework
ITU-T G.8011.1
Ethernet private line service
ITU-T G.8011.2
Ethernet virtual private line service
ITU-T G.8012
Ethernet UNI and Ethernet over transport NNI
ITU-T G.8021
Characteristics of Ethernet transport network equipment functional blocks
ITU-T G.8110
MPLS layer network architecture
ITU-T G.8110.1
Application of MPLS in the transport network
ITU-T G.8121
Characteristics of transport MPLS equipment functional blocks
ITU-T G.8112
Interfaces for the transport MPLS (T-MPLS) hierarchy
ITU-T G.8131
Protection switching for transport MPLS (T-MPLS) networks
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
107
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
11 Standard Compliance
Recommendation
Description
ITU-T G.8261
Timing and synchronization aspects in packet networks
ITU-T G.8262
Timing characteristics of synchronous Ethernet equipment slave clock (EEC)
ITU-T G.8264
Timing distribution through packet networks
ITU-T Y.1541
Network performance objectives for IP-based services
ITU-T Y.1710
Requirements for OAM functionality for MPLS networks
ITU-T Y.1730
Requirements for OAM functions in Ethernet based networks and Ethernet services
ITU-T Y.1711
Operation & Maintenance mechanism for MPLS networks
ITU-T Y.1720
Protection switching for MPLS networks
ITU-T I.610
B-ISDN operation and maintenance principles and functions
ITU-T Y.1291
An architectural framework for of quality of service (QoS) in packet networks
11.2 IETF Standards This section provides the IETF standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with. Table 11-2 IETF standards Standard
Description
RFC 2819
Remote Network Monitoring Management Information Base
draft-ietf-l2vpn-oam -req-frmk-05
L2VPN OAM requirements and framework
RFC 4664
Framework for layer 2 virtual private networks (L2VPNs)
RFC 3031
MPLS architecture
RFC 3469
Framework for multi-protocol label switching (MPLS)-based recovery
RFC 3811
Definitions of textual conventions for multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) management
RFC 3813
Multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) label switching router (LSR) management information base
RFC 3814
Multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) forwarding equivalence class to next hop label forwarding entry (FEC-To-NHLFE) management information base
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
108
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
11 Standard Compliance
Standard
Description
RFC 4221
Multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) management overview
RFC 4377
Operations and management (OAM) requirements for multi-protocol label switched (MPLS) networks
RFC 4378
A framework for multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) operations and management (OAM)
RFC 3032
MPLS label stack encoding
RFC 3443
Time to live (TTL) processing in multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) networks
RFC 3916
Requirements for pseudo-wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3)
RFC 3985
Pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) architecture
RFC 4197
Requirements for edge-to-edge emulation of time division multiplexed (TDM) circuits over packet switching networks
RFC 4385
Pseudowire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) control word for use over an MPLS PSN
RFC 4446
IANA allocations for pseudowire edge to edge emulation (PWE3)
RFC 0826
Ethernet address resolution protocol
RFC 3270
Multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) of differentiated services
RFC 4448
Encapsulation methods for transport of Ethernet over MPLS networks
RFC 4553
Structure-agnostic time division multiplexing (TDM) over packet (SAT oP)
RFC 5085
Pseudo wire virtual circuit connectivity verification (VCCV)
RFC 5086
Structure-Aware Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) Circuit Emulation Service over Packet Switched Network (CESoPSN)
RFC 4717
Encapsulation Methods for Transport of Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) over MPLS Networks
RFC 4816
Pseudowire Emulation Edge-to-Edge (PWE3) Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) Transparent Cell Transport Service
RFC 4385
Pseudowire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) control word for use over an MPLS PSN
RFC 5254
Requirements for Multi-Segment Pseudowire Emulation Edge-to-Edge (PWE3)
draft-ietf-pwe3-seg mented-pw-03
Segmented pseudo wire
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
109
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Standard
11 Standard Compliance
Description
draft-ietf-pwe3-ms-p Requirements for inter domain pseudo-wires w-requirements-03 draft-ietf-pwe3-ms-p An architecture for multi-segment pseudo wire emulation w-arch-02 edge-to-edge RFC 3644
Policy quality of service (QoS) Information model
RFC 2212
Specification of guaranteed quality of service
RFC 2474
Definition of the differentiated services field (DS Field) in the IPv4 and IPv6 headers
RFC 2475
An architecture for differentiated services
RFC 2597
Assured forwarding PHB group
RFC 2698
A two rate three color marker
RFC 3246
An expedited forwarding PHB (Per-hop behavior)
RFC 3270
Multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) of differentiated services
11.3 IEEE Standards This section provides the IEEE standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with. Table 11-3 IEEE standards Standard
Description
IEEE 802.1D
Media Access Control (MAC) Bridges
IEEE 802.1Q
Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks
IEEE 802.1ad
Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks Amendment 4: Provider Bridges
IEEE 802.3ah
Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications Amendment: Media Access Control Parameters, Physical Layers, and Management Parameters for Subscriber Access Networks
IEEE 802.1ag
Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks - Amendment 5: Connectivity Fault Management
IEEE 802.3
Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications
IEEE 802.3u
Type 100BASE-T MAC parameters, Physical Layer, MAUs, and Repeater for 100 Mb/s Operation
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
110
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
Standard
Description
IEEE 802.3x
Full Duplex Operation and Type 100BASE-T2
11 Standard Compliance
11.4 Environment Related Standards This section provides the environment related standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with. Table 11-4 Environment related standards Standard
Description
CISPR 22
Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristics of information
EN 60950-1
Information technology equipment-Safety-Part 1:General requirements
UL 1950-1
Information technology equipment-Safety-Part 1:General requirements
IEC 60825-1
Safety of laser products-Part 1:Equipment classification, requirements and 's guide
IEC 60825-2
Safety of laser products-Part 2:Safety of optical fiber communication systems(OFCS)
IEC 60950-1
Information technology equipment-Safety-Part 1:General requirements
IEC 61000-4-2
Electromagnetic compatibility(EMC) Part 2:Testing and measurement techniques Section 2:Electrostatic discharge immunity test Basic EMC Publication
IEC 61000-4-3
Electromagnetic compatibility; Part 3:Testing and measurement techniques Section 3 radio frequency electromagnetic fields; immunity test.
IEC 61000-4-4
Electromagnetic compatibility(EMC) Part 4:Testing and measurement techniques Section 4:Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test Basic EMC publication
IEC 61000-4-5
Electromagnetic compatibility(EMC) Part 5:Testing and measurement techniques Section 5:Sruge immunity test
IEC 61000-4-6
Electromagnetic compatibility: Part 6:Testing and measurement techniques: Section 6 conducted disturbances induced by radio-frequency fields; immunity test
ET SI EN 300 019-1-3
Environmental conditions and environmental tests for telecommunications equipment;
ET S 300 753
Equipment Engineering (EE);Acoustic noise emitted by telecommunications equipment
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
111
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
11 Standard Compliance
Standard
Description
IEC 60825
Safety of laser products
IEC 60297
Dimensions of mechanical structures of the 482.6 mm (19 in) series
11.5 MEF Standards This section provides the MEF standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with. Table 11-5 MEF standards Standard
Description
MEF 2
Requirements and framework for Ethernet service protection in metro Ethernet networks
MEF 4
Metro Ethernet network architecture framework - Part 1: generic framework
MEF 9
Abstract Test Suite for Ethernet Services at the UNI
MEF 10
Ethernet services attributes phase 1
MEF 14
Abstract Test Suite for Traffic Management Phase 1
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
112
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A
A Glossary and Acronyms
Glossary and Acronyms
and abbreviations are listed in an alphabetical order. A.1
Numerics
A.2
A
A.3
B
A.4
C
A.5
D
A.6 E A.7
F
A.8
G
A.9
H
A.10 I A.11
J
A.12 L A.13 M A.14 N A.15 O A.16 P A.17 Q A.18 R A.19 S A.20 T A.21 U A.22 V A.23 W
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
113
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
A.1 Numerics 1+1 prote ction
An architecture that has one normal traffic signal, one working SNC/trail, one protection SNC/trail and a permanent bridge. At the source end, the normal traffic signal is permanently bridged to both the working and protection SNC/trail. At the sink end, the normal traffic signal is selected from the better of the two SNCs/trails. Due to the permanent bridging, the 1+1 architecture does not allow an extra unprotected traffic signal to be provided.
100BASE-T
IEEE 802.3 Physical Layer specification for a 100 Mb/s CSMA/CD local area network.
100BASE-TX
IEEE 802.3 Physical Layer specification for a 100 Mb/s CSMA/CD local area network over two pairs of Category 5 unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) or shielded twisted-pair (STP) wire.
10BASE-T
An Ethernet specification that uses the twisted pair cable with the transmission speed as 10 Mbit/s and the transmission distance as 100 meters.
1:N prote ction
An architecture that has N normal service signals, N working SNCs/trails, and one protection SNC/trail. It may have one extra service signal.
1PPS
Pulse per second, which, strictly speaking, is not a time synchronization signal. This is because 1PPS provides only the "gauge" corresponding to the UTC second, but does not provide the information about the day, month, or year. Therefore, 1PPS is used as the reference for frequency synchronization. On certain occasions, 1PPS can also be used on other interfaces for high precision timing.
3R
Reshaping, Retiming, Regenerating.
ABR
Available Bit Rate
AC
Alternating Current
ACAP
A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals.
Active/Standby switching of cross-connect board
The process in which the standby cross-connect board automatically takes the place of the active one. If there are two cross-connect boards on the SDH equipment, which are in hot back-up relation of each other, the operation reliability is improved. When both the cross-connect boards are in position, the one inserted first is in the working status. Unplug the active board, the standby one will run in the working status automatically. When the active cross-connect board fails in self-test, the board is pulled out, the board power supply fails or the board hardware operation fails, the standby cross-connect board can automatically take the place of the active one.
A.2 A
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
114
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
add/drop multiplexer
Network elements that provide access to all or some subset of the constituent signals contained within an ST M-N signal. The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it ed through the .
See add/drop multiplexer
istrative Unit
The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order VC) and a AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to the multiplex section frame start.
istrative Unit Group
One or more istrative units occupying fixed, defined positions in an STM payload. An AUG consists of AU-4s.
A who has authority to access all the Management Domains of the product. He or she has access to the whole network and to all the management functionalities.
Aging time
The time to live before an object becomes invalid.
AIS
Alarm Indication Signal
Alarm
A message reported when a fault is detected by a device or by the network management system during the process of polling devices. Each alarm corresponds to a recovery alarm. After a recovery alarm is received, the status of the corresponding alarm changes to cleared.
Alarm automatic re port
A function wherein an alarm generated on the device side is immediately and automatically reported to the NMS. After an alarm is reported, an alarm prompts, and the can view the details of the alarm.
alarm cable
The cable for generation of visual or audio alarms.
alarm filte ring
An alarm management method. Alarms are detected and reported to the NMS system, and whether the alarm information is displayed and saved is decided by the alarm filtering status. An alarm with the filtering status set to "Filter" is not displayed and saved on the NMS, but is monitored on the NE.
alarm indication
A function that indicates the alarm status of an NE. On the cabinet of an NE, there are four indicators in different colors indicating the current alarm status of the NE. When the green indicator is on, the NE is powered on. When the red indicator is on, a critical alarm is generated. When the orange indicator is on, a major alarm is generated. When the yellow indicator is on, a minor alarm is generated. The ALM alarm indicator on the front of a board indicates the current status of the board.
Alarm indication signal
A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure has been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
115
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
Alarm inversion
For the port that has already been configured but has no service, this function can be used to avoid generating relevant alarm information, thus preventing alarm interference. The alarm report condition of the NE port is related to the alarm inverse mode (not inverse, automatic recovery and manual recovery) setting of the NE and the alarm inversion status (Enable and Disable) setting of the port. When the alarm inversion mode of NE is set to no inversion, alarms of the port will be reported as usual no matter whatever the inversion status of the port is. When the alarm inversion mode of the NE is set to automatic recovery, and the alarm inversion state of the port is set to Enabled, then the alarm of the port will be suppressed. The alarm inversion status of the port will automatically recover to "not inverse" after the alarm ends. For the port that has already been configured but not actually loaded with services, this function can be used to avoid generating relevant alarm information, thus preventing alarm interference. When the alarm inverse mode of the NE is set as "not automatic recovery", if the alarm inversion status of the port is set as Enable, the alarm of the port will be reported.
Alarm Masking
An alarm management method. Alarms that are set to be masked are not displayed on the NMS or the NMS does not monitor unimportant alarms.
Alarm Se verity
The significance of a change in system performance or events. According to ITU-T recommendations, an alarm can have one of the following severities: Critical, Major, Minor, Warning.
Alarm suppression
An alarm management method. Alarms that are set to be suppressed are not reported from NEs any more.
ALS
See Automatic laser shutdown
APS
See Automatic Protection Switching
asynchronous
Pertaining to, being, or characteristic of something that is not dependent on timing.
Asynchronous Transfe r Mode
A protocol for the transmission of a variety of digital signals using uniform 53 byte cells. A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous in the sense that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate. Statistical and deterministic values may also be used to qualify the transfer mode.
ATM
See Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATPC
See Automatic Transmit Power Control
attenuation
Reduction of signal magnitude or signal loss, usually expressed in decibels.
AU
See istrative Unit
AUG
See istrative Unit Group
auto-negotiation
An optional function of the IEEE 802.3u Fast Ethernet standard that enables devices to automatically exchange information over a link about speed and duplex abilities..
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
116
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
Automatic laser shutdown
A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser transmitters and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
Automatic Protection Switching
Capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switch to a standby facility to recover the traffic.
Automatic Transmit Power Control
A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detected at the receiver.
backplane
An electronic circuit board containing circuits and sockets into which additional electronic devices on other circuit boards or cards can be plugged.
backup
A periodic operation performed on the data stored in the database for the purposes of database recovery in case that the database is faulty. The backup also refers to data synchronization between active and standby boards.
bandwidth
A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate.
BDI
Backward Defect Indicator
BER
See Bit Error Rate
BER tester
Used to measure the bit error rate (BER) of signals during transmission.
Binding strap
The binding strap is 12.7 mm wide, with one hook side (made of transparent polypropylene material) and one mat side (made of black nylon material).
BIP
A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by equipment at the transmit end over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, and so on. Even parity is generated by setting the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of the signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes the BIP-X.
Bit error
An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding bit in the received digital signal.
Bit Error Rate
Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure the communications quality of a network.
BITS
See Building Integrated T iming Supply
A.3 B
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
117
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
bound path
A parallel path with several serial paths bundled together. It improves the data throughput capacity.
BPDU
See Bridge Protocol Data Unit
BPS
Board Protection Switching
bridge
A device that connects two or more networks and forwards packets among them. Bridges operate at the physical network level. Bridges differs from repeaters because bridges store and forward complete packets, while repeaters forward all electrical signals. Bridges differ from routers because bridges use physical addresses, while routers use IP addresses.
Bridge Protocol Data Unit
The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.
broadcast
The process of sending packets from a source to multiple destinations. All the ports of the nodes in the network can receive packets.
Broadcast
A means of delivering information to all in a network. The broadcast range is determined by the broadcast address.
BSC
Base Station Controller
BSS
Base Station Subsystem
Build-in WDM
A function which integrates some simple WDM systems into products that belong to the OSN series. That is, the OSN products can add or drop several wavelengths directly.
Building Integrated Timing Supply
In the situation of multiple synchronous nodes or communication devices, one can use a device to set up a clock system on the hinge of telecom network to connect the synchronous network as a whole, and provide satisfactory synchronous base signals to the building integrated device. This device is called BIT S.
BWS
Backbone WDM System
cabling
The method by which a group of insulated conductors is mechanically assembled or twisted together.
cable trough
The trough which is used for cable routing in the cabinet.
captive nut
See Floating nut
CAR
See committed access rate
CAS
Channel Associated Signaling
CBR
See Constant Bit Rate
A.4 C
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
118
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
CBS
Committed Burst Size
CCDP
Co-Channel Dual Polarization
CCM
Continuity Check Message
CDR
Clock and Data Recovery
CDVT
See Cell Delay Variation Tolerance
Cell Delay Variation Tolerance
This parameter measures the tolerance level a network interface has to aggressive sending (back-to-back or very closely spaced cells) by a connected device, and does not apply to end-systems.
Centralized alarm system
The system that gathers all the information about alarms into a certain terminal console.
CES
See circuit emulation service
CFM
Connectivity Fault Management
Chain network
One type of network that all network nodes are connected one after one to be in series.
channel
A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between two or more locations in a network. Channels can be established through wire, radio (microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmitted per second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per second. For example, b/s, kb/s, Mb/s, Gb/s, and T b/s.
CIR
Committed Information Rate
Circuit
A combination of two transmission channels permitting transmission in both directions between two points.
circuit emulation service
A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At the transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATM cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, the interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original sequence at the reception end.
CIST
Common and Internal Spanning Tree
Class of Service
CoS is a rule for queuing. It classifies the packets according to the service type field or the tag in packets, and specifies different priorities for them. All the nodes in DiffServ domain forwards the packets according to their priorities.
client
A device that sends requests, receives responses, and obtains services from the server.
Clock Synchronization
Also called frequency synchronization. The signal frequency traces the reference frequency, but the start point does not need to be consistent.
Clock tracing
The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in a network.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
119
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
CLP
Cell Loss Priority
CM
See Configuration Management
committe d access rate
A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface. CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified into Quality of Service (QoS) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate can be defined.
Concatenation
A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can be used a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence.
Configuration Data
A command file defining hardware configurations of an NE. With this file, an NE can collaborate with other NEs in an entire network. Configuration data is the key factor for normal running of an entire network.
Configuration Management
A network management function defined by the International Standards Organization (ISO). It involves installing, reinitializing & modifying hardware & software.
Configure
To set the basic parameters of an operation object.
congestion
An extra intra-network or inter-network traffic resulting in decreasing network service efficiency.
Connection point
A reference point where the output of a trail termination source or a connection is bound to the input of another connection, or where the output of a connection is bound to the input of a trail termination sink or another connection. The connection point is characterized by the information which es across it. A bidirectional connection point is formed by the association of a contradirectional pair.
Constant Bit Rate
A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise clocking to ensure undistorted transmission.
Convergence
A process in which multiple channels of low-rate signals are multiplexed into one or several channels of required signals. It refers to the speed and capability for a group of networking devices to run a specific routing protocol. It functions to keep the network topology consistent.
Convergence service
A service that provides enhancements to an underlying service in order to meet the specific requirements of s.
corrugate d tube
Used to protect optical fibers.
CoS
See Class of Service
U
Central Processing Unit
CRC
See Cyclic Redundancy Check
current alarm
An alarm not handled or not acknowledged after being handled.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
120
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
Current Pe rformance Data
Performance data stored currently in a . An NE provides two types of s, namely, 15-minute and 24-hour , to store performance parameters of a performance monitoring entity. The two types of s stores performance data only in the specified monitoring period.
Cyclic Re dundancy Check
A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
Data Communication Ne twork
A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to the data communication function.
Digital Data Ne twork
A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiber channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplex technology.
DC
Direct Current
DCC
Data Communication Channel
DCD
Data Carrier Detect
DCE
Data Circuit-terminal Equipment
DCN
See Data Communication Network
DDF
See Digital Distribution Frame
DDN
See Digital Data Network
De fect
A limited interruption in the ability of an item to perform a required function.
Delay Measurement
The time elapsed since the start of transmission of the first bit of the frame by a source node until the reception of the last bit of the loopbacked frame by the same source node, when the loopback is performed at the frame's destination node.
Demultiplexing
A process applied to a composite signal formed by multiplexing, for recovering the original independent signals, or groups of these signals.
A.5 D
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
121
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
De vice se t
A collection of multiple managed devices. By dividing managed devices into different device sets, s can manage the devices by using the U2000 in an easier way. If an operation authority over one device set is assigned to a ( group), the authority over all the devices in the device set is assigned to the ( group), thus making it unnecessary to set the operation authority over all the devices in a device set separately. It is recommended to configure device set by geographical region, network level, device type, or another criterion.
Diffe rentiate d Services Code Point
A marker in the header of each IP packet that prompts network routers to apply differentiated grades of service to various packet streams. It is specified by the DiffServ policy proposed by the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force). This allows Internet and other IP-based network service providers to offer different levels of service to customers.
DiffSe rv
A service architecture that provides the end-to-end QoS function. It consists of a series of functional units implemented at the network nodes, including a small group of per-hop forwarding behaviors, packet classification functions, and traffic conditioning functions such as metering, marking, shaping and policing.
Digital Distribution Frame
A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange with transmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection, cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals.
digital signal
A signal in which information is represented by a limited number of discrete states number of discrete states (for example, high and low voltages) rather than by fluctuating levels in a continuous stream, as in an analog signal. In the pulse code modulation (PCM) technology, the 8 kHz sampling frequency is used and a byte contains 8 bits in length. Therefore, a digital signal is also referred to as a byte-based code stream. Digital signals, with simple structures and broad bandwidth, are easy to shape or regenerate, and are not easily affected by external interference.
Distributed Link Aggregation Group
A board-level port protection technology used to detect unidirectional fiber cuts and to negotiate with the opposite end. Once a link down failure occurs on a port or a hardware failure occurs on a board, the services can automatically be switched to the slave board, achieving 1+1 protection for the inter-board ports.
DLAG
See Distributed Link Aggregation Group
DM
See Delay Measurement
DNI
See Dual Node Interconnection
domain
A logical subscriber group based on which the subscriber rights are controlled.
DS
See Differentiated Services Code Point
DSL
Digital Subscriber Line
DSLAM
Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
122
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
DSR
Data Set Ready
DTE
Data T erminal Equipments
DTR
Data T erminal Ready
Dual Node Inte rconnection
DNI provides an alternative physical interconnection point, between the rings, in case of an interconnection failure scenario.
DVB-ASI
Digital Video Broadcast- Asynchronous Serial Interface
DVMRP
Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol
DWDM
Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
E-AGGR
See Ethernet aggregation
Ear bracket
A piece of angle plate with holes in it on a rack. It is used to fix network elements or components.
ECC
See Embedded Control Channel
EFM
Ethernet in the First Mile
E-LAN
A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet virtual connection).
ElectroStatic Discharge
The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at different electrical potentials caused by direct or induced by an electrostatic field.
E-Line
A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual connection).
Embe dded Control Channel
A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer, to enable transmission of operation, istration, and maintenance (OAM) information between NEs.
EMS
Element Management System
encapsulation
A technology for layered protocols, in which a lower-level protocol accepts a message from a higher-level protocol and places it in the data portion of the lower-level frame. Protocol A's packets have complete header information, and are carried by protocol B as data. Packets that encapsulate protocol A have a B header, an A header, followed by the information that protocol A is carrying. Note that A could equal to B, as in IP inside IP.
Ente rprise System Connection
A path protocol which connects the host with various control units in a storage system. It is a serial bit stream transmission protocol. The transmission rate is 200 Mbit/s.
Entity
A part, device, subsystem, functional unit, equipment, or system that can be considered individually.
EoD
See Ethernet over Dual Domains
EPL
See Ethernet Private Line
A.6 E
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
123
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
EPLAN
See Ethernet virtual private LAN service
Equipment Serial Number
A string of characters that identify a piece of equipment and ensures correct allocation of a license file to the specified equipment. It is also called "equipment fingerprint".
ESCON
See Enterprise System Connection
ESD
See ElectroStatic Discharge
ESD jack
Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf or cabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap.
ESD wrist strap
Used to prevent the ElectroStatic Discharge (ESD) when you touch or operate a device or component.
ESN
See Equipment Serial Number
Ethe rnet
A LAN technology that uses Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s or 10000 Mbit/s. An Ethernet network features high reliability and is easy to maintain.
Ethe rnet aggregation
A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual connection).
Ethe rnet Alarm Group
The Ethernet alarm group periodically obtain the statistics value to compare with the configured threshold. If the value exceeds the threshold, an event is reported.
Ethe rnet over Dual Domains
A type of boards. EoD boards bridge the PSN and TDM networks, enabling Ethernet service transmission across PSN and TDM networks.
Ethe rnet Private LAN service
A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS networks. This service is carried over a dedicated bridge and point-to-multipoint connections.
Ethe rnet Private Line
A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-point connections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network.
Ethe rnet virtual private LAN service
A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS networks. This service is carried over a shared bridge and point-to-multipoint connections.
Ethe rnet virtual private line
A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS networks. This service is carried over a shared bridge and point-to-point connections.
ETSI
European Telecommunications Standards Institute
EVPL
See Ethernet virtual private line
EVPLAN
See Ethernet virtual private LAN service
Exe rcise Switching
An operation to check whether the protection switching protocol functions properly. The protection switching is not really performed.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
124
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
Exe rcise r - Ring
This command exercises ring protection switching of the requested channel without completing the actual bridge and switch. The command is issued and the responses are checked, but no working traffic is affected.
Extende d ID
The number of the subnet that an NE belongs to, for identifying different network segments in a WAN. The physical ID of an NE is comprised of the NE ID and extended ID.
extra traffic
The traffic that is carried over the protection channels when that capacity is not used for the protection of working traffic. Extra traffic is not protected.
Failure
If the fault persists long enough to consider the ability of an item with a required function to be terminated. The item may be considered as having failed; a fault has now been detected.
Fairness
A feature in which for any link specified in a ring network, the source node is provided with certain bandwidth capacities if the data packets transmitted by the source node are constrained by the fairness algorithm.
fairness algorithm
An algorithm designed to ensure the fair sharing of bandwidth among stations in the case of congestion or overloading.
fault
A failure to implement the function while the specified operations are performed. A fault does not involve the failure caused by preventive maintenance, insufficiency of external resources or intentional settings.
FC
See Fiber Channel
FD
See frequency diversity
FDDI
See fiber distributed data interface
FDI
Forward Defect Indicator
FDV
See Frame Delay Variation
FE
Fast Ethernet
feature code
Code used to select/activate a service feature (for example, forwarding, using two or three digit codes preceded by * or 11 or #, and which may precede subsequent digit selection).
FEC
See forwarding equivalence class
FEC
See Forward Error Correction
fibe r patch cord
A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for connections between subracks or inside a subrack.
A.7 F
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
125
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
Fiber Channel
A high-speed transport technology used to build storage area networks (SANs). Fiber channel can be on the networks carrying ATM and IP traffic. It is primarily used for transporting SCSI traffic from servers to disk arrays. Fiber channel s single-mode and multi-mode fiber connections. Fiber channel signaling can run on both twisted pair copper wires and coaxial cables. Fiber channel provides both connection-oriented and connectionless services.
Fiber Connect
A new generation connection protocol which connects the host to various control units. It carries single byte command protocol through the physical path of fiber channel, and provides higher rate and better performance than ESCON.
Fiber Connector
A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couple the optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. A connector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and a optical source (or a detector).
fibe r distribute d data interface
A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for high-speed fiber-optic local area networks (LANs). FDDI provides specifications for transmission rates of 100 megabits (100 million bits) per second on networks based on the token ring network.
fibe r/cable
General name of optical fiber and cable. It refers to the physical entities that connect the transmission equipment, carry transmission objects ( information and network management information) and perform the transmission function in the transmission network. The optical fiber transmits optical signal, while the cable transmits electrical signal. The fiber/cable between NEs represents the optical fiber connection or cable connection between NEs. The fiber/cable between SDH NEs represents the connection relationship between NEs. At this time, the fiber/cable is of optical fiber type.
FICON
See Fiber Connect
FIFO
First In First Out
Floating nut
Floating nuts (or as they are more correctly named, 't ee nuts') have a range of uses but are more commonly used in the hobby for engine fixing (securing engine mounts to the firewall), wing fixings, and undercarriage fixing.
Flow
An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics. On the network management system or NE software, flow is a group of classification rules. On boards, it is a group of packets that have the same quality of service (QoS) operation.
FLR
See Frame loss ratio
Forced switch
For normal traffic signals, switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exists on the protection section, by issuing a forced switch request for that traffic signal.
Forward Error Correction
A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during transmission are corrected at the receive end.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
126
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
forwarding e quivalence class
A class-based forwarding technology that classifies the packets with the same forwarding mode. Packets with the same FEC are processed similarly on an MPLS network. The division of FECs is flexible, and can be a combination of the source address, destination address, source port, destination port, protocol type, and VPN.
FPGA
Field Programmable Gate Array
frame
A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame length is represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle. A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words, a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements pre-specified by the sending and receiving parties.
Frame Delay Variation
A measurement of the variations in the frame delay between a pair of service frames, where the service frames belong to the same CoS instance on a point to point ETH connection.
Frame loss ratio
A ratio, is expressed as a percentage, of the number of service frames not delivered divided by the total number of service frames during time interval T, where the number of service frames not delivered is the difference between the number of service frames arriving at the ingress ETH flow point and the number of service frames delivered at the egress ETH flow point in a point-to-point ETH connection.
Free-run mode
An operating condition of a clock, the output signal of which is strongly influenced by the oscillating element and not controlled by servo phase-locking techniques. In this mode the clock has never had a network reference input, or the clock has lost external reference and has no access to stored data, that could be acquired from a previously connected external reference. Free-run begins when the clock output no longer reflects the influence of a connected external reference, or transition from it. Free-run terminates when the clock output has achieved lock to an external reference.
fre quency diversity
A diversity scheme in which two or more microwave frequencies with a certain frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading.
FTP
File Transfer Protocol
full-duplex
A full-duplex, or sometimes double-duplex system, allows communication in both directions, and, unlike half-duplex, allows this to happen simultaneously. Land-line telephone networks are full-duplex, since they allow both callers to speak and be heard at the same time. A good analogy for a full-duplex system would be a two-lane road with one lane for each direction.
Gain
The difference between the optical power from the input optical interface of the optical amplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the jumper fiber, which expressed in dB.
A.8 G
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
127
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
Gateway IP
When an NE accesses a remote network management system or NE, a router can be used to enable the T/IP communication. In this case, the IP address of the router is the gateway IP. Only the gateway NE requires the IP address. The IP address itself cannot identify the uniqueness of an NE. The same IP addresses may exist in different T/IP networks. An NE may have multiple IP addresses, for example, one IP address of the network and one IP address of the Ethernet port.
Gateway Ne twork Element
A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and the NM application layer.
GE
Gigabit Ethernet
Generic Framing Procedure
A framing and encapsulation method which can be applied to any data type. It has been standardized by ITU-T SG15.
GFP
See Generic Framing Procedure
GNE
See Gateway Network Element
GPS
Global Positioning System
GSM
Global System for Mobile Communications
GTS
Generic Traffic Shaping
GUI
Graphic Interface
half-duplex
A transmitting mode in which a half-duplex system provides for communication in both directions, but only one direction at a time (not simultaneously). Typically, once a party begins receiving a signal, it must wait for the transmitter to stop transmitting, before replying.
Hardware loopback
A connection mode in which a fiber jumper is used to connect the input optical interface to the output optical interface of a board to achieve signal loopback.
HDLC
High level Data Link Control
HD-SDI
See High Definition-Serial Digital Interface signal
HEC
Header Error Control
Hierarchical Quality of Service
A type of QoS that controls the traffic of s and performs the scheduling according to the priority of services. HQoS has an advanced traffic statistics function, and the can monitor the usage of bandwidth of each service. Hence, the bandwidth can be allocated reasonably through traffic analysis.
High De finition-Se rial Digital Inte rface signal
High definition video signal transported by serial digital interface.
A.9 H
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
128
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
History alarm
The confirmed alarm that has been saved in the memory and other external memories.
Historical performance data
The performance data that is stored in the history or that is automatically reported and stored on the NMS.
HP
Higher Order Path
HPT
Higher Order Path Termination
HQoS
See Hierarchical Quality of Service
IC
Integrated Circuit
IDU
Indoor Unit
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IETF
Internet Engineering Task Force
IF
Intermediate Frequency
IGMP
See Internet Group Management Protocol
IGMP Snooping
A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyzing Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) packets between hosts and Layer 3 devices. In this manner, the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.
IMA
See Inverse Multiplexing over ATM
IMA frame
A control unit in the IMA protocol. It is a logical frame defined as M consecutive cells, numbered 0 to M-l, transmitted on each of the N links in an IMA group.
Input jitter tolerance
The maximum amplitude of sinusoidal jitter at a given jitter frequency, which, when modulating the signal at an equipment input port, results in no more than two errored seconds cumulative, where these errored seconds are integrated over successive 30-second measurement intervals.
Intelligent powe r adjusting
A mechanism used to reduce the optical power of all the amplifiers in an adjacent regeneration section in the upstream to a safety level if the system detects the loss of optical signals on the link. If the fiber is broken, the device performance degrades, or the connector is not plugged well, the loss of optical signals may occur. With IPA, maintenance engineers will not be hurt by the laser sent out from the slice of broken fiber.
Inte rface board area
The area for the interface boards on the subrack.
Inte rnal cable
The cables and optical fibers which are used for interconnecting electrical interfaces and optical interfaces within the cabinet.
A.10 I
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
129
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
Inte rnet Group Management Protocol
One of the T/IP protocols for managing the hip of Internet Protocol multicast groups. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and maintain multicast group hips.
Inverse Multiplexing over ATM
A technique that involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates.
IP
Internet Protocol
IP address
A 32-bit (4-byte) binary digit that uniquely identifies a host (computer) connected to the Internet for communication with other hosts in the Internet by transferring packets. An IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation, consisting of decimal values of its 4 bytes, separated by periods (,), for example, 127.0.0.1. The first three bytes of an IP address identify the network to which the host is connected, and the last byte identifies the host itself.
IP ove r DCC
A technology that enables a DCC channel to carry T/IP protocol packets. The IP over DCC technology provides the T/IP protocol without using any extra overheads or service resources to ensure interconnection of management channels.
IPA
See Intelligent power adjusting
IS-IS
Intermedia System-Intermedia System
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network
ISO
International Standard Organization
ISP
Internet Service Provider
IST
Internal Spanning Tree
ITU-T
International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication Standardization
Jitter
Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system instability.
jitte r tolerance
Jitter tolerance is defined as the peak-to-peak amplitude of sinusoidal jitter applied on the input ATM-PON signal that causes a 1 dB optical power penalty at the optical equipment.
Label
A short identifier that is of fixed length and local significance. It is used to uniquely identify the FEC to which a packet belongs. It does not contain topology information. It is carried in the header of a packet and does not contain topology information.
LA
See Link Aggregation Control Protocol
A.11 J
A.12 L
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
130
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
LAG
See link aggregation group
LAN
Local Area Network
LAPS
Link Access Procedure-SDH
Lase r
A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor laser as the light source.
Layer
A concept used to allow the transport network functionality to be described hierarchically as successive levels; each layer being solely concerned with the generation and transfer of its characteristic information.
laye r 2 switch
A data forwarding method. In a LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is at the second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called Layer 2 switch.
LB
See Loopback
LBM
Loopback Message
LBR
Loopback Reply
LC
Lucent Connector
LCAS
See Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LCD
Liquid Crystal Display
LCT
Local Craft Terminal
License
A permission that the vendor provides for the with a specific function, capacity, and duration of a product. A license can be a file or a serial number. Usually the license consists of encrypted codes. The operation authority granted varies with the level of the license.
Link
In the topology view, a link is used to identify the physical or logical connection between two topological nodes. A link is used to connect signaling points (SPs) and signaling transfer points (STPs) and transmit signaling messages.
Link Aggregation Control Protocol
A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface to increase bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE 802.3ad.
link aggregation group
An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were a single link.
Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a control mechanism to hitless increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation, increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the responsibility of the network and element management systems.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
131
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
LLC
Logical Link Control
LM
See Loss Measurement
Locked switching
When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from being switched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to the working channel.
LO F
Loss of Frame
LO M
Loss of Multiframe
Loopback
A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the signal or message can be analyzed for errors. The loopback can be a inloop or outloop.
LOS
Loss of Signal
Loss Measurement
Loss measurement, a method used to collect counter values applicable for ingress and egress service frames where the counters maintain a count of transmitted and received data frames between a pair of MEPs.
Lower Threshold
A lower performance limit which when exceeded by a performance event counter will trigger a threshold-crossing event.
LP
Lower Order Path
LPT
Link State Through
LSP
Label Switched Path
LSR
Label Switching Router
LT
Link Trace
MA
See Maintenance Association
MAC
Medium Access Control
Maintenance Association
TThat portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, the connectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of Maintenance Entities.
Maintenance Domain
The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by connectivity fault management (CFM). The devices in a maintenance domain are managed by a single Internet service provider (ISP).
MAN
See Metropolitan Area Network
Manual switch
Switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless a failure condition exists on other sections (including the protection section) or an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect, by issuing a manual switch request for that normal traffic signal.
A.13 M
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
132
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
Mapping
A procedure by which tributaries are adapted into virtual containers at the boundary of an SDH network.
Marking-off template
A quadrate cardboard with four holes. It is used to mark the positions of the installation holes for the cabinet.
MBS
Maximum Burst Size
MCF
Message Communication Function
MCR
Minimum Cell Rate
MD
See Maintenance Domain
Mean launched power
The average power of a pseudo-random data sequence coupled into the fiber by the transmitter.
MEP
Maintenance End Point
Metropolitan Area Ne twork
A network that interconnects s with computer resources in a geographic area or region larger than that covered by even a large LAN but smaller than the area covered by an WAN. The term is applied to the interconnection of networks in a city into a single larger network (which may then also offer efficient connection to a wide area network). It is also used to mean the interconnection of several local area networks by bridging them with backbone lines. The latter usage is also sometimes referred to as a campus network.
MIB
Management Information Base
MIP
Maintenance Intermediate Point
MO DEM
MOdulator-DEModulator
MP
Maintenance Point
MPID
Maintenance Point Identification
MPLS
See Multiprotocol Label Switching
MS
Multiplex Section
MSA
Multiplex Section Adaptation
MSOH
See Multiplex Section Overhead
MSP
See Multiplex Section Protection
MST
Multiplex Section Termination
MSTI
Multiple Spanning Tree Instance
MSTP
See Multi-service transmission platform
MSTP
See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
MTIE
Maximum T ime Interval Error
MTU
Maximum Transmission Unit
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
133
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
Multiprotocol Label Switching
A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of networks, and is beneficial to routing.
Multi-service transmission platform
A platform based on the SDH platform, capable of accessing, processing and transmitting TDM services, ATM services, and Ethernet services, and providing unified management of these services.
Multicast
A process of transmitting data packets from one source to many destinations. The destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast group rather than a host.
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
A protocol that can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
Multiplex Se ction Ove rhead
The overhead that comprises rows 5 to 9 of the SOH of the STM-N signal. See SOH definition.
Multiplex Se ction Protection
A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and including two multiplex section termination (MST ) functions, from a "working" to a "protection" channel.
Multiplexing
A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher order path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex section.
NE
See network element
NE Explorer
The main operation interface, of the network management system, which is used to manage the telecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, the can query, manage and maintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.
network element
An NE contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One NE is at least equipped with one system control and communication(SCC) board which manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the SCC board.
network node inte rface
The interface at a network node which is used to interconnect with another network node.
network segment
A part of an Ethernet or other network, on which all message traffic is common to all nodes, that is, it is broadcast from one node on the segment and received by all others.
A.14 N
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
134
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
NLP
Normal Link Pulse
NMS
Network Management System
NNI
See network node interface
NPC
Network Parameter Control
nrt-VBR
Non Real-T ime Variable Bit Rate
NRZ
Non Return to Zero code
NSAP
Network Service Access Point
NTP
Network T ime Protocol
OA
See Optical Amplifier
O
See Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer
OAM
Operations, istration and Maintenance
OAM auto-discove ry
In the case of OAM auto-discovery, two interconnected ports, enabled with the Ethernet in the First Mile OAM (EFM OAM) function, negotiate to determine whether the mutual EFM OAM configuration match with each other by sending and responding to the OAM protocol data unit (OAMPDU). If the mutual EFM OAM configuration match, the two ports enter the EFM OAM handshake phase. In the handshake phase, the two ports regularly send the OAMPDU to maintain the neighborhood relation.
O
See Optical Channel Protection
ODF
See Optical Distribution Frame
ODU
Outdoor Unit
O FS
Out-of-frame Second
OHA
Overhead Access Function
OLT
Optical Line Terminal
Online Help
The capability of many programs and operating systems to display advice or instructions for using their features when so requested by the .
ONU
Optical Network Unit
OO F
Out of Frame
Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer
A device that can be used to add the optical signals of various wavelengths to one channel and drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel.
Optical Amplifie r
Devices or subsystems in which optical signals can be amplified by means of the stimulated emission taking place in a suitable active medium.
A.15 O
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
135
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
Optical attenuator
A ive device that increases the attenuation in a fiber link. It is used to ensure that the optical power of the signals received at the receive end is not extremely high. It is available in two types: fixed attenuator and variable attenuator.
Optical Channel Protection
In an optical transmission link that contains multiple wavelengths, when a certain wavelength goes faulty, the services at the wavelength can be protected if the optical channel protection is configured.
Optical Connector
A component normally attached to an optical cable or a piece of apparatus to provide frequent optical interconnection/disconnection of optical fibers or cables.
Optical Distribution Frame
A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.
Optical Inte rface
A component that connects several transmit or receive units.
Optical Time Domain Re flectometer
A device that sends a very short pulse of light down a fiber optic communication system and measures the time history of the pulse reflection to measure the fiber length, the light loss and locate the fiber fault.
orderwire
A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or maintenance engineers of different stations.
OSI
Open Systems Interconnection
OSN
Optical Switch Node
OSPF
Open Shortest Path First
O TDR
See Optical T ime Domain Reflectometer
O TU
See Optical transponder unit
Optical transponder unit
A device or subsystem that converts the accessed client signals into the G.694.1/G.694.2-compliant WDM wavelength.
Output optical power
The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.
Ove rhead
Extra bits in a digital stream used to carry information besides traffic signals. Orderwire, for example, would be considered overhead information.
Paire d slots
T wo slots of which the overheads can be ed through by using the bus on the backplane.
-through
The action of transmitting the same information that is being received for any given direction of transmission.
A.16 P
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
136
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
Path
A performance resource object defined in the network management system. The left end of a path is a device node whose port needs to be specified and the right end of a path is a certain IP address which can be configured by the . By defining a path in the network management system, a can test the performance of a network path between a device port and an IP address. The tested performance may be the path delay, packet loss ratio or other aspects.
PBS
Peak Burst Size
PC
Personal Computer
PCM
Pulse Code Modulation
PCR
Peak Cell Rate
PDH
See Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PDU
See Power distribution unit
PE
See provider edge
Pe rformance re gister
The memory space for performance event counts, including 15-min current performance , 24-hour current performance , 15-min historical performance , 24-hour historical performance , UAT and CSES . The object of performance event monitoring is the board functional module, so every board functional module has a performance . A performance is used to count the performance events taking place within a period of operation time, so as to evaluate the quality of operation from the angle of statistics.
performance threshold
A limit for generating an alarm for a selected entity. When the measurement result reaches or exceeds the preset alarm threshold, the performance management system generates a performance alarm.
Pe rmanent Virtual Connection
A connection between two ATM end hosts. The connection consists of PVPs between the ATM end hosts and their respective switches, and SVPs between the switches.
PGND
Protection Ground
PGND cable
A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, one half of the cable is yellow, whereas the other half is green.
PIM-SM
Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode
PIR
Peak Information Rate
plesiochronous
Qualifying two time-varying phenomena, time-scales, or signals in which corresponding significant instants occur at the same rate, any variations in rate being constrained within specified limits. Note: Corresponding significant instants are separated by time intervals having durations which may vary without limit.
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
137
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
PLL
Phase-Locked Loop
Pointer
An indicator whose value defines the frame offset of a virtual container with respect to the frame reference of the transport entity on which this pointer is ed.
POS
Packet Over SDH
Powe r box
A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies power for the subracks in the cabinet.
Powe r distribution unit
A unit that performs AC or DC power distribution.
PPP
Point-to-Point Protocol
PRBS
See Pseudo Random Binary Sequence
PRC
Primary Reference Clock
Primitive
In the hierarchy of signaling system No.7, when the upper layer applies for services from the lower layer or the lower layer transmits services to the upper layer, the data is exchanged between the and the service provider. The data transmitted between adjacent layers is called primitive.
Private Line
A line, such as a subscriber cable and trunk cable, which are leased by the telecommunication carrier and are used to meet the special requirements.
Protection path
A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.
Protection se rvice
A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.
Protection subnet
In the NMS, the protection subnet becomes a concept of network level other than multiplex section rings or path protection rings. The protection sub-network involves NEs and fiber cable connections.
Protection View
The interface, of the NMS, which is used to manage protection in the network.
provider edge
A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is responsible for managing VPN s, establishing LSPs between PEs, and exchanging routing information between sites of the same VPN. A PE performs the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network and the public channel. A PE can be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.
PS
Packet Switched
PSD
Power Spectral Density
Pseudo Random Binary Sequence
A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
138
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
Pseudo Wire
An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is established and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW is maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.
Pseudo Sire Emulation e dge-to-e dge
An end-to-end Layer 2 transmission technology. It emulates the essential attributes of a telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a packet switched network (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed time division multiplexing (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real situation.
PVC
See Permanent Virtual Connection
PW
See Pseudo Wire
PWE3
See Pseudo Sire Emulation edge-to-edge
QinQ
A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It add a public VLAN tag to a frame with a private VLAN tag to allow the frame with double VLAN tags to be transmitted over the service provider’s backbone network based on the public VLAN tag. This provides a layer 2 VPN tunnel for customers and enables transparent transmission of packets over private VLANs.
QoS
See Quality of Service
Quality of Service
A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel. Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a service provider to meet the demands of s.
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with the STP protocol.
RDI
Remote Defect Indication
Re ceiver Sensitivity
The minimum acceptable value of average received power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10 -12 BER (The FEC is open).
Re ference clock
A kind of stable and high-precision autonous clock providing frequencies for other clocks for reference.
REG
A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals.
Regeneration
The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes, waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits.
A.17 Q
A.18 R
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
139
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
Regenerator section overhead
The regenerator section overhead comprises rows 1 to 3 of the SOH of the STM-N signal.
Remote optical pumping amplifier
A remote optical amplifier subsystem designed for applications where power supply and monitoring systems are unavailable. The ROPA subsystem is a power compensation solution to the ultra-long distance long hop (LHP) transmission.
Resilient Packet Ring
A network topology being developed as a new standard for fiber optic rings.
RF
Radio Frequency
RFA
Request For Announcement
RFI
Request for Information
ring network
A type of network topology in which each node connects to exactly two other nodes, forming a circular pathway for signals.
RNC
Radio Network Controller
ROPA
See Remote optical pumping amplifier
route
The path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a T/IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically.
route r
A device on the network layer that selects routes in the network. The router selects the optimal route according to the destination address of the received packet through a network and forwards the packet to the next router. The last router is responsible for sending the packet to the destination host. Can be used to connect a LAN to a LAN, a WAN to a WAN, or a LAN to the Internet.
RP
Rendezvous Point
RPR
See Resilient Packet Ring
RS232
A asynchronous transfer mode that does not involve hand-shaking signal. It can communicate with RS232 and RS422 of other stations in point-to-point mode and the transmission is transparent. Its highest speed is 19.2kbit/s.
RS422
The specification that defines the electrical characteristics of balanced voltage digital interface circuits. The interface can change to RS232 via the hardware jumper and others are the same as RS232.
RSTP
See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RTN
Radio Transmission Node
RX
Receiver
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
140
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
A.19 S S1 byte
A byte to transmit network synchronization status information. On an SDH network, each NE traces hop by hop to the same clock reference source through a specific clock synchronization path, realizing synchronization on the entire network. If a clock reference source traced by an NE is missing, this NE will trace another clock reference source of a lower level. To implement protection switching of clocks in the whole network, the NE must learn about clock quality information of the clock reference source it traces. Therefore, ITU-T defines S1 byte to transmit network synchronization status information. It uses the lower four bits of the multiplex section overhead S1 byte to indicate 16 types of synchronization quality grades. Auto protection switching of clocks in a synchronous network can be implemented using S1 byte and a proper switching protocol.
SAN
Storage Area Network
SC
Square Connector
SCR
Sustainable Cell Rate
SD
See space diversity
SD
See Signal Degrade
SD
See Standard definition
SDH
See Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SDP
Serious Disturbance Period
SD-SDI
See Standard definition-Serial Digital Interface signal
SEC
SDH Equipment Clock
Section
The portion of a SONET transmission facility, including terminating points, between (i) a terminal network element and a regenerator or (ii) two regenerators. A terminating point is the point after signal regeneration at which performance monitoring is (or may be) done.
Self-healing
A function of establishing a replacement connection by network without the network management connection function. When a connection failure occurs, the replacement connection is found by the network elements and rerouted depending on network resources available at that time.
Serial port extended ECC
The ECC channel realized by means of serial port.
serve r
A network device that provides services to network s by managing shared resources, often used in the context of a client-server architecture for a LAN.
Service prote ction
A measure that ensures that the services can be received at the receive end.
SES
Severely Errored Second
SETS
Synchronous Equipment Timing Source
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
141
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
settings
Parameters of a system or operation that can be selected by the .
SF
See Signal Fail
Signal Fail
A signal indicating that associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect condition (non-degrade defect) is active.
SFP
See Small Form-Factor Pluggable
SHDSL
Single-line High speed Digital Subscriber Line
Side Mode Suppression Ratio
The Side Mode Suppression Ratio (SMSR) is the ratio of the largest peak of the total source spectrum to the second largest peak.
signal cable
Common signal cables cover the E1 cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber signal cable.
Signal Degrade
SD is a signal indicating the associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded defect (e.g., dDEG) condition is active.
Signal Fail
SF is a signal indicating the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect condition (not being the degraded defect) is active.
Simple Network Management Protocol
A network management protocol of T /IP. It enables remote s to view and modify the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the transmission of management information between any two points. The polling mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control information about each device is maintained by a management information block.
slide rail
Angle-bars on which shelves and chassis may slide and be ed within a cabinet or shelf.
Small Form-Factor Pluggable
A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.
SMSR
See Side Mode Suppression Ratio
SNC
SubNetwork Connection
SNCMP
See Subnetwork connection multipath protection
SN
See SubNetwork Connection Protection
SN node
Set the SNC node on the protection sub-network to sub-network connection protection that spans protection sub-networks. The SN node of the ring sub-network can electric circuit dually feed and selectively receive a timeslot out of the ring, thus implementing sub-network connection protection. The SN node is generally set on the node on the line board with the path protection type of the dual fed and selectively received.
SNCTP
See Subnetwork Connection T unnel Protection
SNMP
See Simple Network Management Protocol
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
142
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
SNR
Signal Noise Ratio
space diversity
A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a specific distance to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading. Currently, only receive SD is used.
Spanning Tree Protocol
STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundant network to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prune a loop network into a loop-free tree network.
SPI
Synchronous Physical Interface
SSM
See Synchronization Status Message
SSU
Synchronization Supply Unit
Standard definition
A video format with the resolution below 720p.
Standard definition-Serial Digital Inte rface signal
Standard definition video signal transported by serial digital interface.
Statistical multiplexing
A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can be transmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only to active input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devices to be connected than with other multiplexing techniques.
STM-4
SDH standard for transmission over optical fiber at 622.08 Mbit/s.
STP
See Spanning Tree Protocol
Sub-network numbe r
A number used to differentiate network sections in a sub-network conference. A sub-network ID consists of the first several digits (one or two) of a phone number. An order wire phone number consists of the sub-network ID and the number.
subnet
A type of smaller networks that form a larger network according to a rule, for example, according to different districts. This facilitates the management of the large network.
subnet mask
The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine, server or router matches with the IP address.
Subnetwork connection multipath prote ction
The only difference is that SN is of 1+1 protection and SNCMP is of N+1 protection. That is, several backup channels protect one active channel in SNCMP.
SubNetwork Connection Protection
A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced by a protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
143
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
Subnetwork Connection Tunnel Protection
SNCTP provides a VC-4 level channel protection. When the working channel is faulty, the services of the entire VC-4 path can be switched over to the protection channel.
A part used to and fix a cabinet on the antistatic floor. It is made of welded steel plates and is used to block up the cabinets to facilitate floor layout and cabling. Before the whole set of equipment is grounded, insulation plates must be installed under the s, and insulating coverings must be added to the expansion bolts to achieve good insulation performance.
Suppression state
An attribute set to determine whether an NE monitors the alarm. Under suppression status, NE will not monitor the corresponding alarm conditions and the alarm will not occur even when the alarm conditions are met.
SVC
Switching Virtual Connection
Switching priority
A priority of a board that is defined for protection switching. When several protected boards need to be switched, a switching priority should be set for each board. If the switching priorities of the boards are the same, services on the board that fails later cannot be switched. Services on the board with higher priority can preempt the switching resources of that with lower priority.
Switching restoration time
It refers to the period of time between the start of detecting and the moment when the line is switched back to the original status after protection switching occurs in the MSP sub-network.
Synchronization Status Message
A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link. Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clock information through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on their clocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff, and forward the synchronization information to downstream nodes.
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode, transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-ISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is used only for signals. SDH is suitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.
Synchronous source
A clock providing timing services to connected network elements. This would include clocks conforming to Recommendations G.811, G.812 and G.813.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
144
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
A.20 T Tandem Connection Monitor
In the SDH transport hierarchy, the TCM is located between the AU/TU management layer and HP/LP layer. It uses the N1/N2 byte of POH overhead to monitor the quality of the transport channels on a transmission section (TCM section).
TCM
See T andem Connection Monitor
T/IP
See T ransmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TDM
Time Division Multiplexing
TIM
Trace Identifier Mismatch
Timeslot
Continuously repeating interval of time or a time period in which two devices are able to interconnect.
Time Synchronization
Also called the moment synchronization, time synchronization means that the synchronization of the absolute time, which requires that the starting time of the signals keeps consistent with the UTC time.
TM
Terminal Multiplexer
TMN
Telecommunications Management Network
ToS
See Type of Service
TPS
See T ributary Protection Switch
Trail management function
A network level management function of the network management system. This function enables you to configure end-to-end services, view graphic interface and visual routes of a trail, query detailed information of a trail, filter, search and locate a trail quickly, manage and maintain trails in a centralized manner, manage alarms and performance data by trail, and print a trail report.
Transceive r
A transmitter and receiver housed together in a single unit and having some circuits in common, often for portable or mobile use.
Transmission Control Protocol/Inte rnet Protocol
Common name for the suite of protocols developed to the construction of worldwide internetworks.
transparent transmission
A process during which the signaling protocol or data is not processed in the content but encapsulated in the format for the processing of the next phase.
Tray
A component that can be installed in the cabinet for holding chassis or other devices.
Tributary loopback
A fault can be located for each service path by performing loopback to each path of the tributary board. There are three kinds of loopback modes: no loopback, outloop, and inloop.
Tributary Protection Switch
A function that uses a standby tributary processing board to protect N tributary processing boards.
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
145
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
Tributary unit
An information structure which provides adaptation between the lower order path layer and the higher order path layer. It consists of an information payload (the lower order VC) and a TU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to the higher order VC frame start.
Tributary Unit Group
One or more Tributary Units, occupying fixed, defined positions in a higher order VC-n payload is termed a Tributary Unit Group (TUG). TUGs are defined in such a way that mixed capacity payloads made up of different size Tributary Units can be constructed to increase flexibility of the transport network.
TTL
Time To Live
TU
Tributary Unit
TUG
See T ributary Unit Group
Tunnel
A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs. In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnel ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnel is an MPLS tunnel.
Type of Service
A field in an IP packet (IP datagram) used for quality of service (QoS). The TOS field has 8 bits in length, which is divided into five subfields.
UART
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
UAS
Unavailable Second
UBR
Unspecified Bit Rate
underfloor cabling
The cables connected cabinets and other devices are routed underfloor.
UNI
See -to-Network Interface
Unprotecte d
Pertaining to the transmission of the services that are not protected. The services cannot be switched to the protection channel if the working channel is faulty or the service is interrupted, because protection mechanism is not configured.
Unprotecte d sub-network
A sub-network without any protection mechanism. The purpose of such configuration is to provide the basic data of trail protection for subsequent trail management.
An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the NMS. The configuration data then covers the configuration data stored at the NMS side.
UPM
Uninterruptible Power Module
Uppe r threshold
TThe critical value that can induce unexpected events if exceeded.
UPS
Uninterruptible Power Supply
A.21 U
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
146
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
Upward cabling
Cables or fibers connect the cabinet with other equipment from the top of the cabinet.
Any entity external to the network which utilizes connections through the network for communication. A person or other entity authorized by a subscriber to use some or all of the services subscribed to by that subscriber.
-to-Network Inte rface
The interface between equipment and private or public network equipment (for example, ATM switches).
UTC
Universal T ime Coordinated
VB
Virtual Bridge
VBR
Variable Bit Rate
VC
Virtual Concatenation
VC
See Virtual Container
VCG
Virtual Concatenation Group
VCI
Virtual Channel Identifier
Virtual Container
The information structure used to path layer connections in the SDH. It consists of information payload and path overhead (POH) information fields organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 or 500 µs.
Virtual local area network
A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated with switched Ethernet.
Virtual Private Ne twork
A system configuration, where the subscriber is able to build a private network via connections to different network switches that may include private network capabilities.
VLAN
See Virtual local area network
VP
Virtual Path
VPI
Virtual Path Identifier
VPN
See Virtual Private Network
Wait to Restore
The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line.
WAN
Wide Area Network
Wande r
The long-term variations of the significant instants of a digital signal from their ideal position in time (where long-term implies that these variations are of frequency less than 10 Hz).
A.22 V
A.23 W
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
147
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service E Optical Transmission System Product Description
A Glossary and Acronyms
washer
A washer is a thin flat ring of metal or rubber which is placed over a bolt before the nut is screwed on.
Wavelength Division Multiplexing
A technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fiber, uses multiple wavelengths as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in a single fiber.
Wavelength prote ction group
Data for describing the wavelength protection structure. Its function is similar to that of the protection subnet for SDH NEs. The wavelength path protection can work only with the correct configuration of the wavelength protection group.
WDM
See Wavelength Division Multiplexing
WFQ
Weighted Fair Queuing
Winding pipe
A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe.
Working path
A path allocated to transport the normal traffic.
WRED
Weighted Random Early Detection
WTR
See Wait to Restore
Issue 01 (2011-06-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
148
Related Documents c2h70
Ptn Huawei 1r6g32
December 2019 51
Huawei Optix Ptn 910 Commissioning Guide (v100r002) 1a1d3l
December 2021 0
Huawei Optix Ptn 950 Installation Guide(v100r005) x704j
December 2020 0
Zte Ptn 562u6
December 2021 0
ing Grade Ptn 561d6h
October 2019 82